2. 《沙门果经》注释显示巴利原文
2. Sāmaññaphalasuttavaṇṇanā
《王臣论》注释显示巴利原文
Rājāmaccakathāvaṇṇanā
150 150.关于“王舍城”:此处因结合了险要之地与殊胜之处的圆满等特征,以首要方式被诸王所执取,故称“王舍城”。文中说“曼陀多王……乃至……被称为”。其中,由摩诃高毗昙大士所执取,即是勒努等诸王所执取,因此提及摩诃高毗昙。有人称“摩诃高毗昙”是一位具有大神力的远古国王。“因被执取”:即因成为王都而被执取。在解说方式上:由国王建造的一切屋舍所构成的城市,故称王舍城;因被灵鹫山等群山所围绕,犹如被山王环绕的屋舍,故也称王舍城;因拥有完美的殿堂,故“王所喜乐之屋舍”即是王舍城;因妥善安置守护,对来者不加害,反成为敌王牢狱般的屋舍,故也是王舍城;诸王见后而善加建立,故成为他们屋舍的,也是王舍城;因此地园林优美等因素而光彩照人,又因居住安乐等,有情众生以我所执而执取,或被执取,对此地有“王舍城”的种种称呼。此处为了表明由于该地的特殊性,使殊胜者得以受用,故说:“但此是这样”等。“他们”指夜叉。“游戏林”指成为游乐之处的林苑。显示巴利原文
150.Rājagaheti ettha duggajanapadaṭṭhānavisesasampadādiyogato padhānabhāvena rājūhi gahitanti rājagahanti āha ‘‘mandhātu…pe… vuccatī’’ti. Tattha mahāgovindena mahāsattena pariggahitaṃ reṇuādīhi rājūhi pariggahitameva hotīti mahāgovindaggahaṇaṃ. Mahāgovindoti mahānubhāvo eko purātano rājāti keci. Pariggahitattāti rājadhānībhāvena pariggahitattā. Pakāreti nagaramāpanena raññā kāritasabbagehattā rājagahaṃ, gijjhakūṭādīhi parikkhittattā pabbatarājehi parikkhittagehasadisantipi rājagahaṃ, sampannabhavanatāya rājamānaṃ gehanti pi rājagahaṃ, saṃvihitārakkhatāya anatthāvahabhāvena upagatānaṃ paṭirājūnaṃ gahaṃ gehabhūtantipi rājagahaṃ, rājūhi disvā sammā patiṭṭhāpitattā tesaṃ gahaṃ gehabhūtantipi rājagahaṃ, ārāmarāmaṇeyyakādīhi rājate, nivāsasukhatādinā sattehi mamattavasena gayhati, pariggayhatīti vā rājagahanti edise pakāre so padeso ṭhānavisesabhāvena uḷārasattaparibhogoti āha ‘‘taṃ paneta’’ntiādi. Tesanti yakkhānaṃ. Vasanavananti āpānabhūmibhūtaṃ upavanaṃ.
“无差别地”(avisesena)是指:正如在“具足巴帝摩卡防护而住”、“证得初禅而住”、“以慈俱行之心遍满一方而住”、“不作意一切相,证得无相心定而住”等句中那样,没有通过词语的连接来特别指明其差别。“威仪”(iriyāpatha),因为是身体活动转起的方式,故称为“路”(patha)。也就是说,若无行、住、坐、卧这些姿势,任何身体的活动便无法转起。“住”(viharati)即依此而转起;而“住处”(vihāro)一词,“天住”(dibbavihāra)指带来天界状态的住处,即广大心禅那(mahaggatajjhāna)。但在《导论》中说:“四无色定是无动摇住”。这是就修习殊胜状态的角度而言,如同慈心禅等是梵住一样。而在注释书中,由于它们同样带来天界的状态,那些也被称为“天住”。以增长利益等方式转起,成为梵、最上的住处,故为“梵住”(brahmavihārā),指慈心禅等。因为不与凡夫共通,是圣者的住处,故为“圣住”(ariyavihārā),指四种果定。显示巴利原文
Avisesenāti ‘‘pātimokkhasaṃvarasaṃvuto viharati’’ (ma. ni. 1.69; 3.75; vibha. 508), ‘‘paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharati, (dī. ni. 1.226; saṃ. ni. 2.152; a. ni. 4.123; pārā. 11) ‘‘mettāsahagatena cetasā ekaṃ disaṃ pharitvā viharati’’, (dī. ni. 1.556; 3.308; ma. ni. 1.77, 459, 509; 2.309, 315, 451, 471; 3.230; vibha. 642) ‘‘sabbanimittānaṃ amanasikārā animittaṃ cetosamādhiṃ samāpajjitvā viharatī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.459) viya saddantarasannidhānasiddhena visesaparāmasanena vinā. Iriyāya kāyikakiriyāya pavattanūpāyabhāvato pathoti iriyāpatho. Ṭhānādīnañhi gatinivatti ādiavatthāhi vinā na kañci kāyikakiriyaṃ pavattetuṃ sakkā. Viharati pavattati etena, viharaṇañcāti vihāro, dibbabhāvāvaho vihāro dibbavihāro, mahaggatajjhānāni. Nettiyaṃ pana ‘‘catasso āruppasamāpattiyo āneñjā vihārā’’ti vuttaṃ . Taṃ tāsaṃ mettājhānādīnaṃ brahmavihāratā viya bhāvanāvisesabhāvaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāsu pana dibbabhāvāvahasāmaññato tāpi ‘‘dibbavihārā’’ tveva vuttā. Hitūpasaṃhārādivasena pavattiyā brahmabhūtā seṭṭhabhūtā vihārāti brahmavihārā, mettājhānādikā. Anaññasādhāraṇattā ariyānaṃ vihārāti ariyavihārā, catassopi phalasamāpattiyo. Samaṅgīparidīpananti samaṅgibhāvaparidīpanaṃ. Iriyāpathasamāyogaparidīpanaṃ itaravihārasamāyogaparidīpanassa visesavacanassa abhāvato, iriyāpathasamāyogaparidīpanassa ca atthasiddhattā. Viharatīti ettha vi-saddo vicchedatthajotano, haratīti neti, pavattetīti attho. Tattha kassa kena vicchindanaṃ, kathaṃ kassa pavattananti antolīnaṃ codanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘so hī’’tiādi.
为了指出乞食的村落而说“在王舍城”,为了指出适合诸佛居住的处所而说“在芒果园”,因此说“这是他的”等。“此”(etaṃ),即“在王舍城”这一处格词,如同在表示附近时说“母牛在恒伽河边行走”、“井里有伽伽族”一样。“为童子所养育者”(kumārabhato),即由童子所养育的人,此亦即儿科医,如同“药”这个词仅指药物一样。“充满过失者”,指因风、胆汁等而充满过失。“泻除后”,即从过失的紊乱中得以净化。显示巴利原文
Gocaragāmadassanatthaṃ ‘‘rājagahe’’ti vatvā buddhānaṃ anurūpanivāsanaṭṭhānadassanatthaṃ ‘‘ambavane’’ti vuttanti āha ‘‘idamassā’’tiādi. Etanti etaṃ ‘‘rājagahe’’ti bhummavacanaṃ samīpatthe ‘‘gaṅgāya gāvo caranti, kūpe gaggakula’’nti ca yathā. Kumārena bhatoti kumārabhato, so eva komārabhacco yathā bhisaggameva bhesajjaṃ. Dosābhisannanti vātapittādivasena ussannadosaṃ. Virecetvāti dosapakopato vivecetvā.
“以十二半百”(aḍḍhateḷasahi),即“以半十三的百数”,也就是比丘的一千二百五十位。而这些比丘正是少于五十的十三个比丘百数,所以说“以半百”等。显示巴利原文
Aḍḍhateḷasahīti aḍḍhena terasahi aḍḍhaterasahi bhikkhusatehi. Tāni pana paññāsāya ūnāni terasabhikkhusatāni hontīti āha ‘‘aḍḍhasatenā’’tiādi.
“照耀”(rājati)意为闪耀、庄严。“令喜悦”(rañjeti)意为使人欢喜。“王”(raññā)指他的父亲频婆娑罗王。“敌人”(sattu)一词,兼有“统治”与“伤害”之义。显示巴利原文
Rājatīti dibbati, sobhatīti attho. Rañjetīti rameti. Raññoti pitu bimbisārarañño. Sāsanaṭṭhena hiṃsanaṭṭhena sattu.
“重的”(bhāriya):指沉重的,或他人无力承担的。“以金刀”(suvaṇṇasatthakena):即用金制成的刀;据说铁刀不宜用来处理国王的身体。或者,“以金刀”指用金镶嵌的刀。“割开手臂”:即采用刺静脉的方式割开手臂,和水混合后令他喝下,因为纯血对孕妇难以消化。“担”(bhāra):即担荷者,指团体中的负担,意为所负载之物。“我卸下了担”:即我完成了团体的负担、团体的束缚。“曾经”等语,出自《犍度》。显示巴利原文
Bhāriyeti garuke aññesaṃ asakkuṇeyye vā. Suvaṇṇasatthakenāti suvaṇṇamayena satthakena. Ayomayañhi rañño sarīraṃ upanetuṃ ayuttanti vadati. Suvaṇṇasatthakenāti vā suvaṇṇaparikkhatena satthakena bāhuṃ phālāpetvāti sirāvedhavasena bāhuṃ phalāpetvā udakena sambhinditvā pāyesi kevalassa lohitassa gabbhinitthiyā dujjīrabhāvato. Dhurāti dhurabhūtā, gaṇassa , dhorayhāti attho. Dhuraṃ nīharāmīti gaṇadhuraṃ gaṇabandhiyaṃ nibbattemi. ‘‘Pubbe kho’’tiādi khandhakapāḷi eva.
“波提尼”(potthaniyaṃ)指刀,也常被称为“爪”(nakhara)。“日日”(divā divassā)的意思是,即使在白昼亦是日日,此处特指正午时分。显示巴利原文
Potthaniyanti churikaṃ, yaṃ ‘‘nakhara’’ntipi [pothanikanti churikaṃ, yaṃ kharantipi (sārattha. ṭī. 3.339) pothanikanti churikaṃ, kharantipi (vi. vi. ṭī. 2.cūḷavaggavaṇṇanā 339)] vuccati. Divā divassāti divassapi divā, majjhanhikavelāyanti attho.
她舔舐他的身体而活命,以自杀的方式死去是不合适的。因为圣弟子们不会自我毁灭。所谓“以道果乐”,即以能带来道果之乐、与入流道果之乐相应的经行度日。“在塔庙庭院”:在作为香、花等供养处的塔庙庭院中。“为了坐”:为了比丘僧团的就座。在四大王天……投生为夜叉,于彼处,因过去多生投生于此,由长久亲近的爱乐之力而投生。显示巴利原文
Tassā sarīraṃ lehitvā yāpeti attūpakkamena maraṇaṃ na yuttanti. Na hi ariyasāvakā attānaṃ vinipātentīti. Maggaphalasukhenāti maggaphalasukhāvahena sotāpattimaggaphalasukhūpasañhitena caṅkamena yāpeti.Cetiyaṅgaṇeti gandhapupphādīhi pūjanaṭṭhānabhūte cetiyaṅgaṇe . Nisajjanatthāyāti bhikkhusaṅghanisīdanatthāya. Cātumahārājikadevaloke…pe… yakkho hutvā nibbatti tattha bahulaṃ nibbattapubbatāya ciraparicitanikantivasena.
“激荡”:由于对儿子的爱力量强大,以及与生俱来的喜悦之流向外扩散,以此所生的色法遍满全身,令整个身体激荡。因此说“穿透骨髓而站立”。“父德”:即父亲对儿子的爱之功德。“使放开”:此处“iti”声表示方式,由此指代前述“派遣杀手等种种方式”。“广说之理趣”:指应结合阿阇世净信等因缘详述的道理,此处仅为理趣。那么,为何此处未详细讲述?答:“因已见于他处,故未全述。”显示巴利原文
Khobhetvāti puttasinehassa balavabhāvato, sahajātapītivegassa ca savipphāratāya taṃsamuṭṭhānarūpadhammehi pharaṇavasena sakalasarīraṃ āloḷetvā. Tenāha ‘‘aṭṭhimiñjaṃ āhacca aṭṭhāsī’’ti. Pituguṇanti pitu attani sinehaguṇaṃ. Muñcāpetvāti ettha iti-saddo pakārattho, tena ‘‘abhimārakapurisapesanādippakārenā’’ti vutte eva pakāre paccāmasati. Vitthārakathānayoti ajātasattupasādanādivasena vitthārato vattabbāya kathāya nayamattaṃ. Kasmā panettha vitthāranayā kathā na vuttāti āha ‘‘āgatattā pana sabbaṃ na vutta’’nti.
“憍萨罗王”:指大憍萨罗王。“智者之称”:即智者的同义词。“他们知道”:即了知。以名为“吠陀”的智慧为工具,运作、转起,故称为“由吠陀”。显示巴利原文
Kosalaraññoti mahākosalarañño. Paṇḍitādhivacananti paṇḍitavevacanaṃ. Vidantīti jānanti. Vedena ñāṇena karaṇabhūtena īhati pavattatīti vedehi.
“此处”:指在这一天。“或由不食”中的“或”字含不确定义,由此也涵盖了某些意恶行、恶戒等。正如牧牛人的布萨是就贪俱之心而说,尼乾陀的布萨是就妄语等而说。如经中所说:“他以那贪俱之心度过一日”(《增支部》1.71),以及“在应当劝导真实时,他们却劝导妄语”等。“此处”:在“布萨”一词中。“义摄”:对所要阐述之义的提取。显示巴利原文
Etthāti etasmiṃ divase. Anasanena vāti vā-saddo aniyamattho, tena ekaccamanoduccaritadussīlyādīni saṅgaṇhāti. Tathā hi gopālakūposatho abhijjhāsahagatacittassa vasena vutto, nigaṇṭhuposatho mosavajjādivasena. Yathāha ‘‘so tena abhijjhāsahagatena cetasā divasaṃ atināmetī’’ti (a. ni. 1.71), ‘‘iti yasmiṃ samaye sacce samādapetabbā, musāvāde tasmiṃ samaye samādapentī’’ti (a. ni. 1.71) ca ādi. Etthāti uposathasadde. Atthuddhāroti vattabbaatthānaṃ uddhāraṇaṃ.
也许有人会问:词语只是依于单纯的意义而生起,因此一个词不能表达多个意义,不是吗?诚然,就特定的词而言确是如此。然而,当考虑到这些意义都能被“布萨”一词所表述的共同性时,这种考察便称为“布萨”一词的义摄。在下文“如是我闻”等处出现的义摄,也是同理。再者,尽管“布萨”一词在诵巴帝摩卡等领域中也是以共通的形式使用,但由于特殊词不能表达那种共通性,这里不取那种共通性,而只说明了此意义,应如是理解。由戒清净者和合而住、共同实行,故为布萨,即诵巴帝摩卡。通过受持或决意,为圣者之住等目的而亲近安住,故为布萨,即戒。通过不食等方式亲近安住、随顺安住,故为布萨,即禁食。受持即是布萨。由于属于布萨家族,对于属于第九大范围的象王,不依任何造作,唯依习惯而赋予名称,故说“在布萨龙王等概念中,这只是一个施设”。然而,“布萨”一词在日期上的应用,注释书中已作说明。在此,“清净者”:因完全远离烦恼垢秽而清净。“ve”:仅为小品词。或“ve”即“明确地”。“恒常是弗沙”:即使恒常,也是弗沙星宿。有些人认为在弗沙月或……显示巴利原文
Nanu ca atthamattaṃ pati saddā abhinivisantīti na ekena saddena aneke atthā abhidhīyantīti? Saccametaṃ saddavisese apekkhite, tesaṃ pana atthānaṃ uposathasaddavacanīyatā sāmaññaṃ upādāya vuccamāno ayaṃ vicāro uposathasaddassa atthuddhāroti vutto. Heṭṭhā ‘‘evaṃ me suta’’ntiādīsu āgate atthuddhārepi eseva nayo. Kāmañca pātimokkhuddesādivisayopi uposathasaddo sāmaññarūpo eva visesasaddassa avācakabhāvato, tādisaṃ pana sāmaññaṃ anādiyitvā ayamattho vuttoti veditabbaṃ. Sīlasuddhivasena upetehi samaggehi vasīyati anuṭṭhīyatīti uposatho, pātimokkhuddeso. Samādānavasena adhiṭṭhānavasena vā upecca ariyavāsādiatthaṃ vasitabbato uposatho, sīlaṃ. Anasanādivasena upecca vasitabbato anuvasitabbato uposatho. Upavāsoti samādānaṃ. Uposathakulabhūtatāya navamahatthinikāyapariyāpanne hatthināge kiñci kiriyaṃ anapekkhitvā rūḷhivasena samaññāmattaṃ uposathoti āha ‘‘uposatho nāgarājātiādīsu paññattī’’ti. Divase pana uposathasaddappavatti aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttā eva. Suddhassa ve sadā phaggūti ettha pana suddhassāti sabbaso kilesamalābhāvena suddhassa. Veti nipātamattaṃ. Veti vā byattanti attho. Sadā phaggūti niccakālampi phagguṇanakkhattameva. Yassa hi phagguṇamāse uttaraphagguṇadivase titthanhānaṃ karontassa saṃvaccharikapāpapavāhanaṃ hotīti laddhi, taṃ tato vivecetuṃ idaṃ bhagavatā vuttaṃ. Suddhassuposatho sadāti yathāvuttasuddhiyā suddhassa uposathaṅgāni vatasamādānāni ca asamādiyatopi niccaṃ uposatho, uposathavāso evāti attho. Pañcadasannaṃ tithīnaṃ pūraṇavasena pannaraso.
因为这里有很多、或极多的白睡莲,故为“有白睡莲”,即属于有白睡莲的那个日子。因为是四个月份的圆满,故为“四满月”。那个词在圣典中被称为“cātumāsinī”,因此说“但在这里,它被称为cātumāsinī”。那时,由于迦提月的圆满,故为月圆满。由于雨季这个季节的圆满,故为季节圆满。由于以迦提月为标志的一年的圆满,故为年圆满。“Mā”被称为月亮,因为其运行而可衡量日子。这里“圆满”:由于这个夜晚所有部分的完全圆满而圆满,因为那时月亮完全圆满地显现。这里,“在那布萨日,十五日”等词是从白天的角度而说,“在月光下”等是从夜晚的角度而说。显示巴利原文
Bahuso , atisayato vā kumudāni ettha santīti kumudavatī, tissaṃ kumudavatiyā. Catunnaṃ māsānaṃ pāripūribhūtāti cātumāsī. Sā eva pāḷiyaṃ cātumāsinīti vuttāti āha ‘‘idha pana cātumāsinīti vuccatī’’ti. Tadā kattikamāsassa puṇṇatāya māsapuṇṇatā. Vassānassa utuno puṇṇatāya utupuṇṇatā. Kattikamāsalakkhitassa saṃvaccharassa puṇṇatāya saṃvaccharapuṇṇatā. ‘‘Mā’’ iti cando vuccati tassa gatiyā divasassa minitabbato. Ettha puṇṇoti etissā rattiyā sabbakalāpāripūriyā puṇṇo. Tadā hi cando sabbaso paripuṇṇo hutvā dissati. Ettha ca ‘‘tadahuposathe pannarase’’ti padāni divasavasena vuttāni, ‘‘komudiyā’’tiādīni rattivasena.
“被王臣围绕”:被出身王族的大臣们所围绕;或者,被臣属的国王与大臣们所围绕。“四种随烦恼”:即云、雾、烟尘、罗睺这四种随烦恼。此结论已在注释书中确定。显示巴利原文
Rājāmaccaparivutoti rājakulasamudāgatehi amaccehi parivuto. Atha vā anuyuttakarājūhi ceva amaccehi ca parivuto. Caturupakkilesāti abbhā mahikā dhūmarajo rāhūti imehi catūhi upakkilesehi. Sanniṭṭhānaṃ kataṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ.
“喜语”:指由喜所生起的话语。凡是那种不顾及听者、只因广大的喜悦而自然突然从口中说出的话语,在此处即被称为“自说”。因此说:“那喜悦之语,心无法摄持……”等。显示巴利原文
Pītivacananti pītisamuṭṭhānaṃ vacanaṃ. Yañhi vacanaṃ paṭiggāhakanirapekkhaṃ kevalaṃ uḷārāya pītiyā vasena sarasato sahasāva mukhato niccharati, taṃ idha ‘‘udāna’’nti adhippetaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘yaṃ pītivacanaṃ hadayaṃ gahetuṃ na sakkotī’’tiādi.
“无过”:指从过失中离去、远离。这是将ta字变为na字,如说“战胜烦恼者,名为胜者,即胜利者”那样。“anīya”后缀应知是表主动义,故说“令心愉悦”,即“可爱、悦意”,如同“能导引出离的诸法”。因为月光使夜晚美丽,故说:“已远离所说的过失……”等等。其中,云等即是所说的过失,因他们离去,此夜便“美丽”;又由于时节和合成就而显得清净可爱,当知此义。所谓“适合作为相”:意为与此夜相应的日、月、季、年,能如此成为日、月、季、年的标志,所以称为“有相”,即能够被认知为相。显示巴利原文
Dosehi itā gatā apagatāti dosinā ta-kārassa na-kāraṃ katvā yathā ‘‘kilese jito vijitāvīti jino’’ti. Anīya-saddo kattuatthe veditabboti āha ‘‘manaṃ ramayatī’’ti ‘‘ramaṇīyā’’ti yathā ‘‘niyyānikā dhammā’’ti. Juṇhavasena rattiyā surūpatāti āha ‘‘vuttadosavimuttāyā’’tiādi. Tattha abbhādayo vuttadosā, tabbigameneva cassā dassanīyatā, tena, utusampattiyā ca pāsādikatā veditabbā. Lakkhaṇaṃ bhavituṃ yuttāti etissā rattiyā yutto divaso māso utu saṃvaccharoti evaṃ divasamāsautusaṃvaccharānaṃ sallakkhaṇaṃ bhavituṃ yuttā lakkhaññā, lakkhaṇīyāti attho.
因经中说“亲近奉事谁,能令我心净信”,故此处的“沙门或婆罗门”乃指最胜义的沙门与最胜义的婆罗门,并非仅具出家相的沙门,亦非仅凭出身种姓的婆罗门。因此说:“因已止息诸恶故为沙门,因已除遣诸恶故为婆罗门。”本应使用复数而用单数,或本应使用单数而用复数,此属语词的变通。但在注释中,仅依单数形式显示此变通。对于自身或值得尊敬的对象,即便是仅一人,也惯用复数表达。“以一切”:即指“这夜晚实在美丽啊”等所有言辞。“作光耀相之业”:指成为光耀之相、成为明显标志的作用,即作为标记之业。而说“提婆达多尚且如此”中的“尚且”,是用来与自身作关联比较。由此,正如阿阇世王因杀害自己的父亲——那位圣弟子、大师的侍者而造下重罪,同样地,这里依于那位曾给世尊带来极大伤害的提婆达多而生起的欢喜,引出此义。“在他的背影之后”:意为依着耆婆的背影,以他为先导而跟随,即依止于他。“为了断除散乱”:意为为了断除……显示巴利原文
‘‘Yaṃ no payirupāsato cittaṃ pasīdeyyā’’ti vuttattā ‘‘samaṇaṃ vā brāhmaṇaṃ vā’’ti ettha paramatthasamaṇo ca paramatthabrāhmaṇo ca adhippeto, na pabbajjāmattasamaṇo, na jātimattabrāhmaṇo cāti āha ‘‘samitapāpatāya samaṇaṃ. Bāhitapāpatāya brāhmaṇa’’nti. Bahuvacane vattabbe ekavacanaṃ, ekavacane vā vattabbe bahuvacanaṃ vacanabyatayo. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ekavacanavaseneva byatayo dassito. Attani, garuṭṭhāniye ca ekasmimpi bahuvacanappayogo nirūḷhoti. Sabbenapīti ‘‘ramaṇīyā vatā’’tiādinā sabbena vacanena. Obhāsanimittakammanti obhāsabhūtanimittakammaṃ paribyattaṃ nimittakaraṇanti attho. Devadatto cāti. Ca-saddo attūpanayane, tena yathā rājā ajātasattu attano pitu ariyasāvakassa satthuupaṭṭhākassa ghātanena mahāparādho , evaṃ bhagavato mahāanatthakarassa devadattassa avassayabhāvena pīti imamatthaṃ upaneti. Tassa piṭṭhichāyāyāti tassa jīvakassa piṭṭhiapassayena, taṃ pamukhaṃ katvā taṃ apassāyāti attho. Vikkhepapacchedanatthanti bhāviniyā attano kathāya uppajjanakavikkhepanassa pacchindanatthaṃ, anuppattiatthanti adhippāyo. Tenāha ‘‘tassaṃ hī’’tiādi.
151 151.“据说,他……”等语,出自古注。此解释方式同样适用于下文对“末迦梨”一词的词源解释。“走近”:即已来到跟前。“他便执取了那种出家”:意指他只把那种裸形城邑的形相,执取为出家。显示巴利原文
151.‘‘So kirā’’tiādi porāṇaṭṭhakathāya āgatanayo. Eseva nayo parato makkhalipadanibbacanepi . Upasaṅkamantīti upagatā. Tadeva pabbajjaṃ aggahesīti tadeva naggarūpaṃ pabbajjaṃ katvā gaṇhi.
所谓“由出家众聚合而成的僧伽”,仅指出家众聚集这一形式而称之为僧伽,并非依出离见与极清净戒的沙门性而和合共住,这是意趣所在。“存在”:指那位自称导师的人拥有这些随从。“正是他”:即指那个仅由出家众组成团体的人。然而有些人说:“依出家众的团体而称‘有僧伽者’,依在家众的团体而称‘有群众者’。”这只是他们个人的见解,因为在世间,“僧伽”一词通常只用在集体上。“以制定学处的方式”:指通过裸体外道的誓愿修行等来制定学处的方式。“显著”:即因拥有僧伽等身份而为人所知。说了“少欲”之后,为了显示在那人身上能感受到的少欲状态,故说“因为少欲,连衣服也不穿”。应知,在那人身上并不具备像佛教修行者中那样以隐藏真实善德为特征的真正少欲。“声誉”:指称赞的声音。因为被认可为“以此度过轮回暴流”,所以依止处被称为见解,故说“作依止处者,即作见解者”。“众人所敬信”:意谓“这很好”而受到认可,并非被善人们所认可,因此说“这就是善的”等等。他知道……显示巴利原文
Pabbajitasamūhasaṅkhātosaṅghoti pabbajitasamūhatāmattena saṅgho, na niyyānikadiṭṭhisuvisuddhasīlasāmaññavasena saṃhatattāti adhippāyo. Assa atthīti assa satthupaṭiññassa parivārabhūto atthi. Svevāti pabbajitasamūhasaṅkhātova. Keci pana ‘‘pabbajitasamūhavasena saṅghī, gahaṭṭhasamūhavasena gaṇī’’ti vadanti, taṃ tesaṃ matimattaṃ gaṇe eva loke saṅgha-saddassa nirūḷhattā. Ācārasikkhāpanavasenāti acelaka vatacariyādiācārasikkhāpanavasena. Pākaṭoti saṅghīādibhāvena pakāsito. ‘‘Appiccho’’ti vatvā tattha labbhamānaṃ appicchattaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘appicchatāya vatthampi na nivāsetī’’ti vuttaṃ. Na hi tasmiṃ sāsanike viya santaguṇanigūhaṇalakkhaṇā appicchatā labbhatīti. Yasoti kittisaddo. ‘‘Taranti etena saṃsārogha’’nti evaṃ sammatattā titthaṃ vuccati laddhīti āha ‘‘titthakaroti laddhikaro’’ti. Sādhusammatoti ‘‘sādhū’’ti sammato, na sādhūhi sammatoti āha ‘‘ayaṃ sādhū’’tiādi. ‘‘Imāni me vatasamādānāni ettakaṃ kālaṃ suciṇānī’’ti pabbajitato paṭṭhāya atikkantā bahū rattiyo jānātīti rattaññū. Tā panassa rattiyo cirakālabhūtāti katvā ciraṃ pabbajitassa assāti cirapabbajito. Tattha cirapabbajitatāgahaṇena buddhisīlataṃ dasseti, rattaññutāgahaṇena tattha sampajānataṃ. Addhānanti dīghakālaṃ. Kittako pana soti āha ‘‘dve tayo rājaparivaṭṭe’’ti, dvinnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ rājūnaṃ rajjaṃ anusāsanapaṭipāṭiyoti attho. ‘‘Addhagato’’ti vatvā kataṃ vayogahaṇaṃ osānavayāpekkhanti āha ‘‘pacchimavayaṃ anuppatto’’ti. Ubhayanti ‘‘addhagato, vayoanuppatto’’ti padadvayaṃ.
这是指他先前曾与父亲一同前往大师座前听法之事,因此说“想听闻禅那与神通……乃至……”。所谓“通过见到”:并非仅仅见到而已,而是在见到之后,与他们互相问候交谈,随后听闻了无业论,便对那些人感到不满意。“关于功德的谈论”:指谈论那些不实的功德,因此说“变得更为不悦”。若他不悦,又为何沉默不语?解释说:“虽不欢喜……”等等。显示巴利原文
Pubbe pitarā saddhiṃ satthu santikaṃ gantvā desanāya sutapubbataṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘jhānābhiññādi…pe… sotukāmo’’ti. Dassanenāti na dassanamattaṃ, disvā pana tena saddhiṃ ālāpasallāpaṃ katvā tato akiriyavādaṃ sutvā tesaṃ anattamano ahosi. Guṇakathāyāti abhūtaguṇakathāya. Tenāha ‘‘suṭṭhutaraṃ anattamano hutvā’’ti. Yadi anattamano, kasmā tuṇhī ahosīti āha ‘‘anattamano samānopī’’tiādi.
152 152.“牛舍”:指一个名为牛舍的村庄。也有说,是指雨季时牛群栖息的棚舍。显示巴利原文
152.Gosālāyāti evaṃ nāmake gāme. Vassānakāle gunnaṃ tiṭṭhanasālāti eke.
153 153.“更为可厌的”:指更加下劣。“织在经线上”:指在经线展开后编织而成。通过“寒冷时受寒冷”等六种形态,开示了那下劣者的更加下劣之处。显示巴利原文
153.Paṭikiṭṭhataranti nihīnataraṃ. Tantāvutānīti tante pasāretvā vītāni. ‘‘Sīte sīto’’tiādinā chahākārehi tassa nihīnassa nihīnatarataṃ dasseti.
154 「排泄粪便后」:“pi”(也)字,亦涵盖饭后、被某些不净物弄脏等情形。「堆沙塔」:依习俗用沙堆成塔。显示巴利原文
154.Vaccaṃ katvāpīti pi-saddena bhojanaṃ bhuñjitvāpi kenaci asucinā makkhito pīti imamatthaṃ sampiṇḍeti. Vālikathūpaṃ katvāti vattavasena vālikāya thūpaṃ katvā.
156 「障碍的烦恼」:指在轮回中起障碍作用的贪等烦恼,其对象为田地、妻儿等。显示巴利原文
156.Palibuddhanakilesoti saṃsāre palibuddhanakicco rāgādikileso khettavatthuputtadārādivisayo.
儿科医耆婆的故事注释显示巴利原文
Komārabhaccajīvakakathāvaṇṇanā
157 因事情未能如其意愿发展,故说“这于我实无益处”。耆婆的沉默犹如挫败我的意图,因此,通过询问令他开口,方能实现我的意图——这正是国王心中的想法。为显明此意,他说了“那么,关于那头象……”等语。「为何沉默」:因何故而沉默?是何缘由令你沉默?由此,他接着问:“因何缘由而沉默?”显示巴利原文
157. Na yathādhippāyaṃ vattatīti katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘anattho vata me’’ti. Jīvakassa tuṇhībhāvo mama adhippāyassa maddanasadiso, tasmā taṃ pucchitvā kathāpanena mama adhippāyo pūretabboti ayamettha rañño ajjhāsayoti dassento ‘‘hatthimhi nu kho panā’’tiādimāha. Kiṃ tuṇhīti kiṃ kāraṇā tuṇhī, kiṃ taṃ kāraṇaṃ, yena tuvaṃ tuṇhīti vuttaṃ hoti. Tenāha ‘‘kena kāraṇena tuṇhī’’ti.
虽然一切如来的行道皆是不共的、稀有且不可思议的,然而入胎、降生、出家、成就正自觉、转法轮、双神变、从天降下,这些在含天的世间中极其显著,无人能驳斥,故在此特为举出。「如是已出现的叙述」即指这样的叙述意义:“以如是的方式已经出现、已经生起”的叙述意义。这是受格。“abbhuggato”中的前缀“abhi”是表示“如是已出现之叙述”的指示词;由此,“taṃ kho pana bhagavantaṃ”这一受格实际上表达所有格的意义,因此说“tassa kho pana bhagavato”即是“彼世尊”的意思。「具备善功德者」:即具足善妙功德,意为依靠他、以他为所缘。「最胜者」在此也是如此。因为应被称扬,故称“声誉”;该声誉本身又因能被称扬而称“名声”,所以说“称扬之声即是声誉”。以赞叹方式生起的声音,便是称赞之声。由于它依不共功德而生起,故能遍满、压倒并超出于含天的世间。显示巴利原文
Kāmaṃ sabbāpi tathāgatassa paṭipatti anaññasādhāraṇā acchariyaabbhutarūpā ca, tathāpi gabbhokkanti- abhijātiabhinikkhamanaabhisambodhidhammacakkappavattana- yamakapāṭihāriyadevorohaṇāni sadevake loke ativiya supākaṭāni, na sakkā kenaci paṭibāhitunti tāniyevettha uddhaṭāni. Itthambhūtākhyānattheti itthaṃ evaṃ pakāro bhūto jātoti evaṃ kathanatthe. Upayogavacananti. ‘‘Abbhuggato’’ti ettha abhīti upasaggo itthambhūtākhyānatthajotako, tena yogato ‘‘taṃ kho pana bhagavanta’’nti idaṃ sāmiatthe upayogavacanaṃ, tenāha ‘‘tassa kho pana bhagavatoti attho’’ti. Kalyāṇaguṇasamannāgatoti kalyāṇehi guṇehi yutto, taṃ nissito tabbisayatāyāti adhippāyo. Seṭṭhoti etthāpi eseva nayo. Kittetabbato kitti, sā eva saddanīyato saddoti āha ‘‘kittisaddoti kittiyevā’’ti. Abhitthavanavasena pavatto saddo thutighoso. Anaññasādhāraṇaguṇe ārabbha pavattattā sadevakaṃ lokaṃ ajjhottharitvā abhibhavitvā uggato.
「彼世尊」:即那位圆满三十波罗蜜、摧毁一切烦恼、证悟无上正自觉者,是诸天中的天,诸帝释中的帝释,诸梵天中的梵天,世间的依怙,由于具足吉祥等功德因缘,在含天的世间中,“世尊”之名周遍称扬,这便是世尊。而“世尊”这一名称,正是对大师的称扬。因此,尊者法将军说:“世尊,这个名字不是母亲起的”等等(《大义释》84)。下文则是对世尊功德的称扬。显示巴利原文
So bhagavāti yo so samatiṃ sapāramiyo pūretvā sabbakilese bhañjitvā anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhiṃ abhisambuddho devānaṃ atidevo sakkānaṃ atisakko brahmānaṃ atibrahmā lokanātho bhāgyavantatādīhi kāraṇehi sadevake loke ‘‘bhagavā’’ti sabbattha patthaṭakittisaddo, so bhagavā. ‘‘Bhagavā’’ti ca idaṃ satthu nāmakittanaṃ. Tenāha āyasmā dhammasenāpati ‘‘bhagavāti netaṃ nāmaṃ mātarā kata’’ntiādi (mahāni. 84). Parato pana bhagavāti guṇakittanaṃ.
正如禅修者将“阿拉汉”等九个名号各自结合“iti”字而随念佛功德,为了显示即使以简略的方式随念也是如此,论师说:“iti pi arahaṃ, iti pi sammāsambuddho … iti pi bhagavā”。这里的“iti”字,如同在“itipetaṃ abhūtaṃ, itipetaṃ atacchaṃ”等(《长部》1.5)中那样,具有“令现前”的作用;“pi”字具有“合集”的作用,由此也显示出这些功德众多之意。为了显示智者即使以简略方式随念,亦能将这些功德简略地呈现在心中而忆念,故论师说:“因如是种种理由,故作如是说”。当这样确定而称扬时,对于被简略称扬的世尊,就生起极大的净信。「远离」指极为远离。「诸敌」指烦恼敌。「诸辐」指轮回轮的辐。「已破碎」指已被破坏。「诸资具等」指衣等资具以及殊胜的供养。「从那里」指从《清净道论》。正如可从《清净道论》获知,同样,从其注释中也可得到这些详细内容。显示巴利原文
Yathā kammaṭṭhānikena ‘‘araha’’ntiādīsu navaṭṭhānesu paccekaṃ iti-saddaṃ yojetvā buddhaguṇā anussarīyanti, evaṃ buddhaguṇasaṅkittakenāpīti dassento ‘‘itipi arahaṃ, itipi sammāsambuddho…pe… itipi bhagavā’’ti āha. ‘‘Itipetaṃ abhūtaṃ, itipetaṃ ataccha’’ntiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.5) viya idha iti-saddo āsannapaccakkhakaraṇattho, pi-saddo sampiṇḍanattho, tena ca tesaṃ guṇānaṃ bahubhāvo dīpito. Tāni ca saṅkittentena viññunā cittassa sammukhībhūtāneva katvā saṅkittetabbānīti dassento ‘‘iminā ca iminā ca kāraṇenāti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti āha. Evañhi nirūpetvā kittente yassa saṅkitteti, tassa bhagavati ativiya abhippasādo hoti. Ārakattāti suvidūrattā. Arīnanti kilesārīnaṃ. Arānanti saṃsāracakkassa arānaṃ. Hatattāti vihatattā. Paccayādīnanti cīvarādipaccayānañceva pūjāvisesānañca. Tatoti visuddhimaggato. Yathā ca visuddhimaggato, evaṃ taṃsaṃvaṇṇanatopi nesaṃ vitthāro gahetabbo.
因为耆婆曾多次在世尊面前听闻佛陀的功德而安住,且已见谛,于佛陀的教法中离疑惑、得无畏自信,所以论师说:“然而耆婆……”等。“五色”指以微小等五种方式。由于他已累积广大善行,因此他的身体相续不断地触及这些色彩。由于业障的缘故,国王的功德身则已被损伤破坏。显示巴利原文
Yasmā jīvako bahuso satthusantike buddhaguṇe sutvā ṭhito, diṭṭhasaccatāya ca satthusāsane vigatakathaṃkatho vesārajjappatto, tasmā āha ‘‘jīvako panā’’tiādi. Pañcavaṇṇāyāti khuddikādivasena pañcappakārāya. Nirantaraṃ phuṭaṃ ahosi katādhikārabhāvato. Kammantarāyavasena hissa rañño guṇasarīraṃ khatupahataṃ ahosi.
158 说“最上”之后,为了显示不仅“最优越”是其理由,而且“安静无噪音”也是理由,所以说“马、车、车乘”等。为了保证象乘中完全没有交合行为,只让母象来承载。为消除国王的猜疑,让女人坐在靠近的地方。为显示国王令他人难以接近,让那些女人穿上男装、手持武器。“通报”(paṭivedesī)就是告知。“那”(tadeva)指行走,或不走。显示巴利原文
158. ‘‘Uttama’’nti vatvā na kevalaṃ seṭṭhabhāvo evettha kāraṇaṃ, atha kho appasaddatāpi kāraṇanti dassetuṃ ‘‘assayānarathayānānī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Hatthiyānesu nibbisevanameva gaṇhanto hatthiniyova kappāpesi. Rañño āsaṅkānivattanatthaṃ āsannacārībhāvena tattha itthiyova nisajjāpitā. Rañño paresaṃ durupasaṅkamanabhāvadassanatthaṃ tā purisavesaṃ gāhāpetvā āvudhahatthā kāritā. Paṭivedesīti ñāpesi. Tadevāti gamanaṃ, agamanameva vā.
159 “Mahañca”本是具格意义,却用了主格,因此说为“mahatā ca”(以大的)。“Mahaccā”意为“以大的”,由于词性颠倒而说,其实是指“以大的”。因此说“以大王威势”,即统领两个大国的自在祥瑞。“Āsattakhaggāni”意为挂在肩上的剑,即佩剑。因为这些人于家族、财富、自在等方面有大度量,故称为“大人们”(mahāmattā),即具大神力的大臣们。“如同持明少年”(vijjādharataruṇā viyāti),即如同持明者的童子。“王家之子”(Raṭṭhiyaputtā)指王家子弟。“象群”(Hatthighaṭā)就是象的群体。“相互碰撞”(Aññamaññasaṅghaṭṭanā)指因无间断地行走而彼此连接。显示巴利原文
159.Mahañcāti karaṇatthe paccattavacananti āha ‘‘mahatācā’’ti. Mahaccāti mahatiyā , liṅgavipallāsavasena vuttaṃ, mahantenāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tenāha ‘‘rājānubhāvenā’’ti ‘‘dvinnaṃ mahāraṭṭhānaṃ issariyasirī’’ti aṅgamagadharaṭṭhānaṃ ādhipaccamāha. Āsattakhaggānīti aṃse olambanavasena sannaddhaasīni. Kulabhogaissariyādivasena mahatī mattā etesanti mahāmattā, mahānubhāvā rājapurisā. Vijjādharataruṇā viyāti vijjādharakumārā viya. Raṭṭhiyaputtāti bhojaputtā. Hatthighaṭāti hatthisamūhā. Aññamaññasaṅghaṭṭanāti avicchedavasena gamanena aññamaññasambandhā.
心的恐惧本身即具恐惧之义,故称为“怖畏”,因为以某种方式令人怖畏。而“智”则仅对于应当怖畏的事物,当其现起为怖畏时,审察“此应怖畏”,以此思量而称为“怖畏”。因此说:“怖畏现起智”是恐惧还是不恐惧?它并不恐惧。因为它只是这样思量:过去的诸行已灭,现在的诸行在灭,未来的诸行将灭。(《清净道论》2.751)“所缘”是引发恐惧的根源,故是“怖畏”。“愧”由厌恶罪恶而令人恐惧,故也是“怖畏”。“Bhayānaka”指令人恐惧的样子。“Bhaya”指智上的怖畏。“Saṃvega”即悚惧,是伴有愧的智与恐惧。“Santāsa”指彻底的惊恐。以应当恐惧的意义为“怖畏”,以可怖的状态为“恐惧”,因此合称为“怖畏恐惧”(bhayabherava),即应恐惧的事物。所以说“到来”。显示巴利原文
Cittutrāso sayaṃ bhāyanaṭṭhena bhayaṃ yathā tathā bhāyatīti katvā. Ñāṇaṃ bhāyitabbe eva vatthusmiṃ bhayato upaṭṭhite ‘‘bhāyitabbamida’’nti bhayato tīraṇato bhayaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘bhayatupaṭṭhānañāṇaṃ pana bhāyati nabhāyatīti? Na bhāyati. Tañhi atītā saṅkhārā niruddhā, paccuppannā nirujjhanti, anāgatā nirujjhissantīti tīraṇamattameva hotī’’ti (visuddhi. 2.751). Ārammaṇaṃ bhāyati etasmāti bhayaṃ. Otappaṃ pāpato bhāyati etenāti bhayaṃ. Bhayānakanti bhāyanākāro. Bhayanti ñāṇabhayaṃ. Saṃveganti sahottappañāṇaṃ santāsanti sabbaso ubbijjanaṃ. Bhāyitabbaṭṭhena bhayaṃ bhīmabhāvena bheravanti bhayabheravaṃ, bhītabbavatthu. Tenāha ‘‘āgacchatī’’ti.
“称赞怯弱者”:因怖畏恶、惊惧恶,所以智者称赞怯弱者。至于作恶时勇悍、厚颜无耻者,智者决不会称赞。因此说:“因为诸善人由怖畏而不作恶”。这里的“怖畏”指由于对恶的恐惧,或出于惭愧。“身体动摇”即因恐惧而身体颤抖。“一”(Eke)指上寺的住众。接下来的“在王舍城”等语,是他们对词义的解说。通常,同龄人称为“同伴”,此为惯用义;但任何朋友均可称为同伴,因此“同伴之称”即是朋友之称。“不欺骗”即不欺诳。“会毁坏”即因心散乱而受扰。显示巴利原文
Bhīruṃpasaṃsantīti pāpato bhāyanato uttasanato bhīruṃ pasaṃsanti paṇḍitā. Na hi tattha sūranti tasmiṃ pāpakaraṇe sūraṃ pagabbhadhaṃsinaṃ na hi pasaṃsanti. Tenāha ‘‘bhayā hi santo na karonti pāpa’’nti. Tattha bhayāti pāputrāsato, ottappahetūti attho. Sarīracalananti bhayavasenasarīrasaṃkampo. Eketi uttaravihāravāsino. ‘‘Rājagahe’’tiādi tesaṃ adhippāyavivaraṇaṃ. Kāmaṃ vayatulyo ‘‘vayasso’’ti vuccati, rūḷhireso, yo koci pana sahāyo vayasso, tasmā vayassābhilāpoti sahāyābhilāpo. Na vippalambhesīti na visaṃvādesi. Vinasseyyāti cittavighātena vihaññeyya.
沙门果问注释显示巴利原文
Sāmaññaphalapucchāvaṇṇanā
160 “世尊的威力”即佛陀的威神力。它触动了国王的身体,正如种德婆罗门前往世尊处时,进入树林深处时所发生的那样。“一”指上寺的住众。显示巴利原文
160.Bhagavato tejoti buddhānubhāvo. Rañño sarīraṃ phari yathā taṃ soṇadaṇḍassa brāhmaṇassa bhagavato santikaṃ gacchantassa antovanasaṇḍagatassa. Eketi uttaravihāravāsino.
161 “Yena, tena”为处格意义的具格,故解释为“世尊在何处,他便去往何处”。为了显示当时在比丘僧团中,沉默毫无例外地遍满,因此采用了“一片沉默、一片沉默”的说法,意思是“无论何处……即是我的寂静”。因手的不自主弯曲与不正知的行动,应知为“手悔恨”(hatthakukkucca)。“vā”字表示未言说的选项义,由此显示其他不调伏的状态,应如是知。其中,眼的不调伏最为首要且难以防护,为了显示无有此种不调伏,故说“以一切装饰品严饰”等。由身业与语业的寂静,可以推知意业也自然获得了寂静,因此说“以及由意的寂静”。“Upasama”即调伏,意为达到行持的成就。在“五重转轮”(pañcaparivaṭṭe)中,即指五众围绕。以“五种行相”(pañcahākārehi),即如“于可爱不可爱中同等”(《中部》38、192等)等处所说,以及以五种圣智成就的五种方式。在“如来特征”(tādilakkhaṇe)中,即指如来的状态。显示巴利原文
161.Yena, tenāti ca bhummatthe karaṇavacananti āha ‘‘yattha bhagavā, tattha gato’’ti. Tadā tasmiṃ bhikkhusaṅghe tuṇhībhāvassa anavasesato byāpibhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tuṇhībhūtaṃ tuṇhībhūta’’nti vuttanti āha ‘‘yato yato…pe… mevāti attho’’ti. Hatthassa kukatattā asaṃyamo asampajaññakiriyā hatthakukkuccanti veditabbo. Vā-saddo avuttavikappattho, tena tadañño asaṃyamabhāvo vibhāvitoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tattha pana cakkhuasaṃyamo sabbapaṭhamo, dunnivāro cāti tadabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘sabbālaṅkārapaṭimaṇḍita’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Kāyikavācasikena upasamena laddhena itaropi anumānato laddho eva hotīti āha ‘‘mānasikena cā’’ti. Upasamanti saṃyamaṃ, ācārasampattinti attho. Pañcaparivaṭṭeti pañcapurisaparivaṭṭe. Pañcahākārehīti ‘‘iṭṭhāniṭṭhe tādī’’ti (mahāni. 38, 192) evaṃ ādinā āgatehi, pañcavidhaariyiddhisiddhehi ca pañcahi pakārehi. Tādilakkhaṇeti tādibhāve.
162 “没有解答问题的负担”(Na me pañhavissajjane bhāro atthi),这是显示导师于一切处无碍智行的状态。当说“你若想问”时,他们并不这样回答,而是怎么说呢?他们说“听闻后我们将了知”,因为他们处于有限智的状态。而佛陀们则示现一切知者的开许(sabbaññupavāraṇaṃ)。关联句:“夜叉、王、天、沙门、婆罗门、游方者”,这是为了显示诸如“贤友,你若想问……”(《相应部》1.237, 246;《经集·旷野夜叉经》等)这些经文是针对哪些人而说。其中,“贤友,你若想问”是旷野夜叉给予的机会,其余是王等所说。“Manasicchasī”意为以意欲问。“Pucchavho, yaṃ kiñci manasicchatha”指对于巴婆利的疑惑,以意请问。而对于你们所有人,任何一切疑惑,或以意,或以其他方式,如你们所欲求的,请这样问。这是义趣。显示巴利原文
162.Na me pañhavissajjane bhāro atthīti satthu sabbattha appaṭihatañāṇacāratādassanaṃ. Yadākaṅkhasīti na vadanti, kathaṃ pana vadantīti āha ‘‘sutvā vedissāmā’’ti padesañāṇe ṭhitattā. Buddhā pana sabbaññupavāraṇaṃ pavārentīti sambandho. ‘‘Yakkhanarindadevasamaṇabrāhmaṇaparibbājakāna’’nti idaṃ ‘‘pucchāvuso yadākaṅkhasī’’tiādīni (saṃ. ni. 1.237, 246; su. ni. āḷavakasutte) suttapadāni pucchantānaṃ yesaṃ puggalānaṃ vasena āgatāni, taṃ dassanatthaṃ. ‘‘Pucchāvuso yadākaṅkhasī’’ti idaṃ āḷavakassa yakkhassa okāsakaraṇaṃ, sesāni narindādīnaṃ. Manasicchasīti manasā icchasi. Pucchavho, yaṃ kiñci manasicchathāti bāvarissa saṃsayaṃ manasā pucchavho. Tumhākaṃ pana sabbesaṃ yaṃ kiñci sabbasaṃsayaṃ manasā, aññathā ca, yathā icchatha, tathā pucchavhoti adhippāyo.
“Sādhurūpā”:谓具有善的本质。“Dhamma”:指传统法。“Vuddha”:指通过戒等而达到智慧,即值得尊重的意思。“Esa bhāro”:这个负担,指的是断除疑惑这个负担,意为这个到来的负担必须被承担。“Ñatvā sayaṃ”:指不依靠他人的教导,自己了知。显示巴利原文
Sādhurūpāti sādhusabhāvā. Dhammoti paveṇīdhammo. Vuddhanti sīlādīhi buddhippattaṃ, garunti attho. Esa bhāroti esa saṃsayūpacchedanasaṅkhāto bhāro, āgato bhāro avassaṃ āvahitabboti adhippāyo. Ñatvā sayanti parūpadesena vinā sayameva ñatvā.
「Suciratenā」:指名为善行的婆罗门。「Tagghā」:指确定、必定地。「Yathāpi kusalo tathā」:正如那位善巧一切法、了知一切的遍知者所了知并宣说的那样,我也将如是宣说。「Rājā ca kho taṃ yadi kāhati vā na vā」:至于派你来此询问的国王,是否会照你所说的去做,那是他的事。而我呢,将会对你解说——我将阐明、将讲说。显示巴利原文
Suciratenāti evaṃ nāmakena brāhmaṇena. Tagghāti ekaṃsena. Yathāpi kusalo tathāti yathā sabbadhammakusalo sabbavidū jānāti katheti, tathā ahamakkhissaṃ. Rājā ca kho taṃ yadi kāhati vā na vāti yo taṃ idha pucchituṃ pesesi, so rājānaṃ tayā pucchitaṃ karotu vā mā vā, ahaṃ pana te akkhissaṃ akkhissāmi, ācikkhissāmīti attho.
163 163.「Sippanaṭṭhena」:因具有‘专业技术’的含义,是应该被学习的事物,又是维持生计的原因,所以技艺本身即是技艺处。「Seyyathidaṃ」是一个小品词,意为‘哪些是那些?’。为避免冗长,「Puthu sippāyatanānī」等句,先以共通的方式总举各种技艺,再别别说明依这些技艺维生的人们,这样便以人为主题进行叙述。否则,若是先展示所要说的那些技艺处,再去说明依那些技艺维生的人们,就会造成重复啰嗦。因此才接着说‘象兵’等。显示巴利原文
163. Sippanaṭṭhena sikkhitabbatāya ca sippameva sippāyatanaṃ jīvikāya kāraṇabhāvato . Seyyathidanti nipāto, tassa te katameti attho. Puthu sippāyatanānīti hi sādhāraṇato sippāni uddisitvā upari taṃtaṃsippūpajīvino niddiṭṭhā puggalādhiṭṭhānakathāya papañcaṃ pariharituṃ. Aññathā yathādhippetāni tāva sippāyatanāni dassetvā puna taṃtaṃsippūpajīvīsu dassiyamānesu papañco siyāti. Tenāha ‘‘hatthārohā’’tiādi.
「象兵」:指那些骑乘大象,或使人骑乘大象的人。凡能使人胜任骑象的种种方法,以及为象执行这些方法的所有人,都包含在这个词中。因此说‘所有即’等。这其中,「hatthācariyā」谓那些教导大象及象兵的训练师。「hatthivejjā」谓那些医治大象的良医。「hatthimeṇḍā」谓那些保护象足的人。而‘等’一词,还包括了提供象草等饲料的人。对于「马兵」和「车兵」,解释的方法也一样:被系缚于战车上的人即是‘车兵’,‘车护’则指保护车轴的人。「弓箭手」:指那些持弓,以及训练人持弓者;「issāsā」则指教授射箭术的教练。因此说‘弓箭老师即射手’。「Celakā」:指那些在战斗中举着布或布幡前进的人,因此说‘那些在战斗中手持胜利旗帜行于前头的人’。「Calakā」:指那些以种种阵型,去摇动、驱散敌方部队的人,无论其如何列阵。显示巴利原文
Hatthiṃ ārohanti, ārohāpayanti cāti hatthārohā. Yehi payogehi puriso hatthino ārohanayoggo hoti, hatthissa taṃ payogaṃ vidhāyataṃ sabbesaṃ petesaṃ gahaṇaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘sabbepī’’tiādi. Tattha hatthācariyā nāma ye hatthino hatthārohakānañca sikkhapakā. Hatthivejjā nāma hatthibhisakkā. Hatthimeṇḍā nāma hatthīnaṃ pādarakkhakā. Ādi-saddena hatthīnaṃ yavasadāyakādike saṅgaṇhāti. Assārohā rathikāti etthāpi eseva nayo. Rathe niyuttā rathikā. Ratharakkhā nāma rathassa āṇirakkhakā. Dhanuṃ gaṇhanti, gaṇhāpenti cāti dhanuggahā, issāsā dhanusippassa sikkhāpakā ca. Tenāha ‘‘dhanuācariyā issāsā’’ti. Celena celapaṭākāya yuddhe akanti gacchantīti celakāti āha ‘‘ye yuddhe jayadhajaṃ gahetvā purato gacchantī’’ti. Yathā tathā ṭhite senike byūhakaraṇavasena tato calayanti uccālentīti calakā. Sakuṇagghiādayo viya maṃsapiṇḍaṃ parasenāsamūhaṃ sāhasikamahāyodhatāya chetvā chetvā dayanti uppatitvā uppatitvā gacchantīti piṇḍadāyakā. Dutiyavikappe piṇḍe dayanti janasammadde uppatantā viya gacchantīti piṇḍadāyakāti attho veditabbo. Uggatuggatāti thāmajavaparakkamādivasena ativiya uggatā uggāti attho. Pakkhandantīti attano vīrasūrabhāvena asajjamānā parasenaṃ anupavisantīti attho. Thāmajavabalaparakkamādisampattiyā mahānāgā viya mahānāgā. Ekantasūrāti ekākisūrā attano sūrabhāveneva ekākino hutvā yujjhanakā. Sajālikāti savammikā. Saraparittāṇacammanti cammaparisibbitaṃ kheṭakaṃ, cammamayaṃ vā phalakaṃ. Gharadāsayodhāti antojātayodhā.
“Āḷāra”意为大厨房,在其中工作的人称为“āḷārikā”,即厨师、炊事者。“Pūvikā”指制作糕点的人,他们做出各种糕点后,靠贩卖维生。“Kappakā”指通过剪发、剃须等工作,为人们打理仪容的人。“Nhāpakā”指以香粉、涂油等方法,为人去除污垢、润泽肤色,亦即帮人沐浴者。以绸带等打结方式计数的典籍,由于中间没有间断,故称为“无空隙的”(acchiddaka);而依靠这种计数方法谋生的人,便称为“读无空隙书的人”(acchiddakapāṭhakā)。通过手的动作来表达意图,称为手印。此处的“手”,具体指手的一部分——手指,就如“吃饭时,我不会把整只手放进嘴里”这类说法中的用法。因此,借助手指的屈伸等动作来计数,即名手印计数。“Cittakārā”等:其中的“等”字,应包含那些靠绘画、织布、壁书、竹编等手艺营生的人。“Diṭṭheva dhamme”指就在这一生、这一有身之中。“Sandiṭṭhik显示巴利原文
Āḷāraṃ vuccati mahānasaṃ, tattha niyuttāti āḷārikā, bhattakārā. Pūvikāti pūvasampādakā, ye pūvameva nānappakārato sampādetvā vikkiṇantā jīvanti. Kesanakhalikhanādivasena manussānaṃ alaṅkāravidhiṃ kappenti saṃvidahantīti kappakā. Nhāpakāti cuṇṇavilepanādīhi malaharaṇavaṇṇasampādanavidhinā nhāpentīti nhāpakā. Navantādividhinā pavatto gaṇanagantho antarā chiddābhāvena acchiddakoti vuccati, taṃ gaṇanaṃ upanissāya jīvantā acchiddakapāṭhakā. Hatthena adhippāyaviññāpanaṃ hatthamuddā hattha-saddo cettha tadekadesesu aṅgulīsu daṭṭhabbo. ‘‘Na bhuñjamāno sabbaṃ hatthaṃ mukhe pakkhipissāmī’’tiādīsu viya, tasmā aṅgulisaṅkocanādinā gaṇanā hatthamuddāya gaṇanā. Cittakārādīnīti. Ādi-saddena bhamakārakoṭṭakalekhaka vilīvakārādīnaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Diṭṭheva dhammeti imasmiṃyeva attabhāve. Sandiṭṭhikamevāti asamparāyikatāya sāmaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, sayaṃ anubhavitabbaṃ attapaccakkhaṃ diṭṭhadhammikanti attho. Sukhitanti sukhappattaṃ. Uparīti devaloke. So hi manussalokato uparimo. Kammassa katattā nibbattanato tassa phalaṃ tassa aggisikhā viya hoti, tañca uddhaṃ devaloketi āha ‘‘uddhaṃ aggaṃ assā atthīti uddhaggikā’’ti. Saggaṃ arahatīti attano phalabhūtaṃ saggaṃ arahati, tattha sā nibbattanārahoti attho. Sukhavipākāti iṭṭhavipākavipaccanīkā. Suṭṭhu aggeti ativiya uttame uḷāre. Dakkhanti vaḍḍhanti etāyāti dakkhiṇā, pariccāgamayaṃ puññanti āha ‘‘dakkhiṇaṃ dāna’’nti.
“道同分”意指已止息罪恶的沙门状态。国王心想:“这些出家人,从世间获得奴仆、雇工等人的礼敬等利益,这便是现见的沙门果吗?”为探究“是否真有沙门或婆罗门能了知此意义”,他便去询问富兰那迦叶等人,听闻其说法后,内心并不满意,因此也向世尊提出了此问。所以说,他是针对后文将提到的奴仆雇工譬喻而发问的。显示巴利原文
Maggosāmaññaṃ samitapāpasamaṇabhāvoti katvā. Yasmā ayaṃ rājā pabbajitānaṃ dāsakassakādīnaṃ lokato abhivādanādilābho sandiṭṭhikaṃ sāmaññaphalanti cintetvā ‘‘atthi nu kho koci samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā īdisamatthaṃ jānanto’’ti vīmaṃsanto pūraṇādike pucchitvā tesaṃ kathāya anārādhitacitto bhagavantampi tamatthaṃ pucchi, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘upari āgataṃ pana dāsakassakopamaṃ sandhāya pucchatī’’ti.
“黑分”:指在所问的意义上,所能得到的、与恶见相应的属于杂染的部分。“白分”:指与此相反、出现于后文经中的属于清净的部分。“沙门喧嚣”:指沙门圈子的嘈杂纷扰,即种种沙门学说之间的相互矛盾与冲突。“沙门争论”:指正是由于那种矛盾,而出现的“持这些主张的沙门婆罗门有此过失,持他们主张的沙门婆罗门有彼过失”等种种指责。他以善巧说法的方式,为国王善加厘清了这些义理,此为其用意所在。显示巴利原文
Kaṇhapakkhanti yathāpucchite atthe labbhamānaṃ diṭṭhigatūpasañhitaṃ saṃkilesapakkhaṃ. Sukkapakkhanti tabbidhuraṃ uparisuttāgataṃ vodānapakkhaṃ. Samaṇakolāhalanti samaṇakotūhalaṃ taṃtaṃsamaṇavādānaṃ aññamaññavirodhaṃ. Samaṇabhaṇḍananti teneva virodhena ‘‘evaṃvādīnaṃ tesaṃ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ ayaṃ doso, evaṃvādīnaṃ ayaṃ doso’’ti evaṃ taṃtaṃvādassa paribhāsanaṃ. Rañño bhāraṃ karonto attano desanākosallenāti adhippāyo.
164 「似智者」:就像生的东西被装成熟的样子,指那些徒有智者外表、貌似聪明的人。显示巴利原文
164.Paṇḍitapatirūpakānanti āmaṃ viya pakkānaṃ paṇḍitābhāsānaṃ.
这是对富兰那迦叶所持论说的注释。显示巴利原文
Pūraṇakassapavādavaṇṇanā
165 「Ekaṃidāha」意为一日。此处的「idha」只是小品词,所指即是“一时”的意思。「Saritabbayuttaṃ」:适合忆念,即值得随念。显示巴利原文
165.Ekaṃidāhanti ekāhaṃ. Idha-saddo cettha nipātamattaṃ, ekāhaṃ samayaṃ ticceva attho. Saritabbayuttanti anussaraṇānucchavikaṃ.
166 「sahatthā karontassāti」:指亲自用手造作的人。应舍的、固定的等,在这里也因亲手做而被包含。「hatthādīnīti」:指手、脚、耳、鼻等。“烧、焚、逼迫”是说“以棍棒压迫者”。《破除迷执》里解释为“威胁者”,此处则将威胁、呵责以棍棒概括,故说“以棍棒压迫者”。「sokaṃ sayaṃkarontassāti」:自己造作他人悲伤之因的人,或令悲伤生起者。「parehīti」:那些听从自己话的人。「sayampi phandatoti」:由于迫害他人,自己也随之而动。“令杀”一词兼具单纯主动与使令主动两种含义,所以说“杀者和令杀者”。「kāraṇavasenāti」:即以使令而做的方式。显示巴利原文
166.Sahatthā karontassāti sahattheneva karontassa. Nissaggiyathāvarādayopi idha sahatthakaraṇeneva saṅgahitā. Hatthādīnīti hatthapādakaṇṇanāsādīni. Pacanaṃ dahanaṃ vibādhananti āha ‘‘daṇḍena uppīḷentassā’’ti. Papañcasūdaniyaṃ ‘‘tajjentassa vā’’ti attho vutto, idha pana tajjanaṃ paribhāsanaṃ daṇḍeneva saṅgahetvā ‘‘daṇḍena uppīḷentassa’’ icceva vuttaṃ. Sokaṃ sayaṃkarontassāti parassa sokakāraṇaṃ sayaṃ karontassa, sokaṃ vā uppādentassa. Parehīti attano vacanakarehi. Sayampi phandatoti parassa vibādhanapayogena sayampi phandato. ‘‘Atipātāpayato’’ti padaṃ suddhakattuatthe hetukattuatthe ca vattatīti āha ‘‘hanantassāpi hanāpentassāpī’’ti. Kāraṇavasenāti kārāpanavasena.
「gharasandhi」指房屋墙壁内外相接处的缝隙。「nillopo」指无余掠取,即毫无剩余地掠取。「ekāgāriko」指专在一家行掠取的人。「paripantho」指于一切处、在道路上拦路劫杀。由于先前未受调伏者不能生起恶,因此恶不被造作,故无恶业。若是如此,众生又为何会造作恶业呢?于是说:“然而众生会生起‘我们正在造恶业’这样的想。”他的主张如此:这些众生的杀害等行为,并不触及自我,因为那自我是恒常、无变化的;而身体无识,如同朽木,即使破坏它也没有任何恶业。“以剃刀轮”指以锋利剃刀所成的轮。显示巴利原文
Gharassa bhitti anto bahi ca sandhitā hutvā ṭhitā gharasandhi. Kiñcipi asesetvā niravaseso lopo nillopo. Ekāgāre niyutto vilopo ekāgāriko. Parito sabbaso panthe hananaṃ paripantho. Pāpaṃ na karīyati pubbe asaññato uppādetuṃ asakkuṇeyyattā, tasmā natthi pāpaṃ. Yadi evaṃ kathaṃ sattā pāpe paṭipajjantīti āha ‘‘sattā pana pāpaṃ karomāti evaṃ saññino hontī’’ti. Evaṃ kirassa hoti – imesañhi sattānaṃ hiṃsādikiriyā na attānaṃ phusati tassa niccatāya nibbikārattā sarīraṃ pana acetanaṃ kaṭṭhakaliṅgarūpamaṃ, tasmiṃ vikopitepi na kiñci pāpanti. Khuranemināti nisitakhuramayaneminā.
恒河以南是不宜之地,恒河以北是适宜之地,由此意图而说“南方……”等,故称“南岸之人粗暴”等。「mahāyāganti」指类似于大胜利祭的大祭祀。「uposathakammena vāti」即通过布萨羯磨与根律仪。因为“调伏”一词在此处是表达根律仪与布萨戒。然而有人说:“‘以布萨羯磨’是根调伏的修饰语,故意思是‘以成为布萨羯磨的根调伏’。”「sīlasaṃyamenāti」指以身语律仪。「saccavajjenāti」即通过真实语。之所以单独提出,是因为在世间它被视为最殊胜的善法。如同在恶法中妄语为最重,在善法中真实语亦为最重。正因如此,世尊曾说:“过去诸佛说一法……”等。「pavattīti」指那被称为“作”的,在造作者相续中作为果生起的缘而生起。「sabbathāti」即以“作者”等所说的一切方式。他否定业本身,却不回答国王所问的现见沙门果,此为他的意图。这一确定之说,是为了遮止对异熟的否定。因为凡是认可否定业者,实质上异熟也被一并否定了。因此接下来会说:“即使排斥业……”显示巴利原文
Gaṅgāya dakkhiṇā disā appatirūpadeso, uttarā disā patirūpadesoti adhippāyena‘‘dakkhiṇañca’’tiādi vuttanti āha ‘‘dakkhiṇatīre manussā kakkhaḷā’’tiādi. Mahāyāganti mahāvijitayaññasadisaṃ mahāyāgaṃ. Uposathakammena vāti uposathakammena ca. Dama-saddo hi indriyasaṃvarassa uposathasīlassa ca vācako idhādhippeto. Keci pana ‘‘uposathakammenāti idaṃ indriyadamanassa visesanaṃ, tasmā ‘uposathakammabhūtena indriyadamanenā’’ti atthaṃ vadanti . Sīlasaṃyamenāti kāyikavācasikasaṃvarena . Saccavajjenāti saccavācāya, tassā visuṃ vacanaṃ loke garutarapuññasammatabhāvato. Yathā hi pāpadhammesu musāvādo garu, evaṃ puññadhammesu saccavācā. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘ekaṃ dhammaṃ atītassā’’tiādi. Pavattīti yo ‘‘karotī’’ti vuccati, tassa santāne phaluppattipaccayabhāvena uppatti. Sabbathāti ‘‘karoto’’tiādinā vuttena sabbappakārena. Kiriyameva paṭikkhipati, na raññā puṭṭhaṃ sandiṭṭhikaṃ sāmaññaphalaṃ byākarotīti adhippāyo. Idaṃ avadhāraṇaṃ vipākapaṭikkhepanivattanatthaṃ. Yo hi kammaṃ paṭikkhipati, tena atthato vipākopi paṭikkhitto eva nāma hoti. Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘kammaṃ paṭibāhantenāpī’’tiādi (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.170-172).
「vijitaṃ」指因不能被敌对国王征服而特别战胜之处,即敕令所行之处。“不要住在我的征服地”这样的驱逐,是对出家者的迫害,故说“应驱逐即是应迫害”。「uggaṇhanaṃ」是对他所说的义理作“是这样”的审察与注意;「nikujjanaṃ」是以令心坚固的方式持守。由于此二者皆被否定,故说「anuggaṇhanto anikujjanto」——不执取、不执持。因而说“不依实质而执取”等。显示巴利原文
Paṭirājūhi anabhibhavanīyabhāvena visesato jitanti vijitaṃ, āṇāpavattideso. ‘‘Mā mayhaṃ vijite vasathā’’ti apasādanā pabbajitassa viheṭhanā pabbājanāti katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘apasādetabbanti viheṭhetabba’’nti. Uggaṇhanaṃ tena vuttassa atthassa ‘‘evameta’’nti upadhāraṇaṃ sallakkhaṇaṃ, nikujjanaṃ tassa addhaniyabhāvāpādanavasena cittena sandhāraṇaṃ. Tadubhayaṃ paṭikkhipanto āha ‘‘anuggaṇhanto anikujjanto’’ti. Tenāha ‘‘sāravasena aggaṇhanto’’tiādi.
这是对末伽梨·瞿舍罗所持论说的注释。显示巴利原文
Makkhaligosālavādavaṇṇanā
168 「ubhayenāti」是以否定因与缘而作的言说。「saṃkilesapaccayanti」是导致杂染、使心秽浊的原因。「visuddhipaccayanti」是从杂染中得清净、令心澄明的因。「attakāroti」指各个众生应当自己去造的业,应当由自己成就的精进。「parakāranti」是依靠他人的力量而成就的精进。因此说“由此……”等。「mahāsattanti」指最后有的大菩萨,应知这里也包括辟支菩萨。「manussasobhagyatanti」指在人群中的幸运状态。「evanti」即依所说方式。他通过对业论者、作用论者的否定——也就是说,击破了“比丘们,有黑业、黑异熟”(《增支部》4.232)等教法中正在运转的胜轮。「natthi purisakāreti」:因为如上所说的自作、他作并不存在,所以各个众生的个人作用——所谓人的努力——便丝毫也没有。因此说“由此……”等。「natthi balanti」:所谓能引导众生获得现法利益、来世利益或涅槃成就的力量,是完全不存在的。因此说“于此……”等。这显示巴利原文
168.Ubhayenāti hetupaccayapaṭisedhanavacanena. Saṃkilesapaccayanti saṃkilissanassa malīnabhāvassa kāraṇaṃ. Visuddhipaccayanti saṅkikilesato visuddhiyā vodānassa kāraṇaṃ. Attakāroti tena tena sattena attanā kātabbakammaṃ attanā nipphādetabbapayogo. Parakāranti parassa vāhasā ijjhanakapayojanaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘yenā’’tiādi. Mahāsattanti antimabhavikaṃ mahābodhisattaṃ, paccekabodhisattassapi ettheva saṅgaho veditabbo. Manussasobhagyatanti manussesu subhagabhāvaṃ. Evanti vuttappakārena. Kammavādassa kiriyavādassa paṭikkhipanena ‘‘atthi bhikkhave kammaṃ kaṇhaṃ kaṇhavipāka’’ntiādi (a. ni. 4.232) nayappavatte jinacakke pahāraṃ deti nāma. Natthi purisakāreti yathāvuttaattakāraparakārābhāvato eva sattānaṃ paccattapurisakāro nāma koci natthīti attho. Tenāha ‘‘yenā’’tiādi. Natthi balanti sattānaṃ diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikanibbānasampattiāvahaṃ balaṃ nāma kiñci natthi. Tenāha ‘‘yamhī’’tiādi. Nidassanamattañcetaṃ, saṃkilesikampi cāyaṃ balaṃ paṭikkhipateva. Yadi vīriyādīni purisakāravevacanāni, kasmā visuṃ gahaṇanti āha ‘‘idaṃ no vīriyenā’’tiādi. Saddatthato pana tassā tassā kiriyāya ussannaṭṭhena balaṃ. Sūravīrabhāvāvahaṭṭhena vīriyaṃ. Tadeva daḷhabhāvato, porisadhuraṃ vahantena pavattetabbato ca purisathāmo. Paraṃ paraṃ ṭhānaṃ akkamanappavattiyā purisaparakkamoti vuttoti veditabbaṃ.
「众生」(sattā)是因为对色等有所耽着,在色等中黏着不舍而得名。「命」(pāṇā)由于以呼吸的方式维持运转,故称为命。他将这些依有一根等加以分类而说,因此说“一根者”等。「生类」(bhūtā)是由于在卵壳、胎藏等处出生,所以说“卵……胎……而生……者”等。「活命」(jīvā)是因为它们仿佛持命而生长,故称活命。因此说“稻、麦”等。「无自在」(avasā)指这些众生在杂染或清净上全无自主能力。「无力、无精进」(abalā avīriyā)是说它们无力,也无精进。「决定」(niyatā)如同不可割断的线、不可破碎的宝石,它们以决定的形态而转起,以趣、生、结缚、解脱为决定。所谓「各各趣向」(tattha tattha gamananti)是指六种生类在种种趣中的趋向、会遇与聚合。「自性而已」(sabhāvoyevāti):就像荆棘的尖锐、木苹果的圆形、种种禽兽的各种形态颜色一样,这一切世间并没有因和缘,就这样变化着;这只是自性,并非由人刻意显示巴利原文
Sattayogato rūpādīsu sattavisattatāya sattā. Pāṇanato assasanapassasanavasena pavattiyā pāṇā. Te pana so ekindriyādivasena vibhajitvā vadatīti āha ‘‘ekindriyo’’tiādi. Aṇḍakosādīsu bhavanato ‘‘bhūtā’’ti vuccantīti āha ‘‘aṇḍakosa…pe… vadatī’’ti . Jīvanato pāṇaṃ dhārentā viya vaḍḍhanato jīvā. Tenāha ‘‘sāliyavā’’tiādi. Natthi etesaṃ saṃkilesavisuddhīsu vasoti avasā. Natthi nesaṃ balaṃ vīriyaṃ cāti abalā avīriyā. Niyatāti acchejjasuttāvutābhejjamaṇino viya niyatappavattitāya gatijātibandhāpavaggavasena niyāmo. Tattha tattha gamananti channaṃ abhijātīnaṃ tāsu tāsu gatīsu upagamanaṃ samavāyena samāgamo. Sabhāvoyevāti yathā kaṇṭakassa tikhiṇatā, kapitthaphalānaṃ parimaṇḍalatā, migapakkhīnaṃ vicittākāratā, evaṃ sabbassāpi lokassa hetupaccayena vinā tathā tathā pariṇāmo ayaṃ sabhāvo eva akittimoyeva. Tenāha ‘‘yena hī’’tiādi. Chaḷābhijātiyo parato vitthārīyanti. ‘‘Sukhañca dukkhañca paṭisaṃvedentī’’ti vadanto adukkhamasukhabhūmiṃ sabbena sabbaṃ na jānātīti ulliṅganto ‘‘aññā adukkhamasukhabhūmi natthīti dassetī’’ti āha.
「上等生类」(pamukhayonīnanti)是指在人、畜生等中,像刹帝利、婆罗门以及狮子、老虎等那样为首的生类。「六十百」(saṭṭhisatānīti)即六千。「五作业」(pañca ca kammuno satānīti)的词义,显示为“五百作业”。「同样的道理」(eseva nayo)这一句,是用来类推“仅仅依凭思辨力量而显示无意义之见”这一意义。在此,所谓“仅仅是凭思辨力量”表明:那些思辨者毫无节制,他们对自己所构想的任何事物,但凡自己构想出来的,便执为真实;由于他们如此顽固地执取依思辨而得的见解,因此智者对于他们所持的那些见解,不应再作思虑。有些人,即北方寺的住众,他们说:“五种业就是眼、耳、鼻、舌、身这五根,这五根被安立为‘五种业’。”关于业的执取,其关联如下:因为此五根是粗显的,所以把它们执取为“圆满业”;而意业不粗显,因此被执取为“半业”。「六十二道」(dvaṭṭhipaṭipadāti)本来应当说“dvāsaṭṭhi paṭipadā”显示巴利原文
Pamukhayonīnanti manussatiracchānādīsu khattiyabrāhmaṇādisīhabyagghādivasena padhānayonīnaṃ. Saṭṭhisatānīti chasahassāni. ‘‘Pañca ca kammuno satānī’’ti padassa atthadassanaṃ ‘‘pañcakammasatāni cā’’ti. ‘‘Eseva nayo’’ti iminā ‘‘kevalaṃ takkamattakena niratthakaṃ diṭṭhiṃ dīpetī’’ti imamevatthaṃ atidisati. Ettha ca ‘‘takkamattakenā’’ti iminā yasmā takkikā niraṅkusatāya parikappanassa yaṃ kiñci attano parikappitaṃ sārato maññamānā tatheva abhinivissa takkadiṭṭhigāhaṃ gaṇhanti, tasmā na tesaṃ diṭṭhivatthusmiṃ viññūhi vicāraṇā kātabbāti dasseti. Kecīti uttaravihāravāsino. Te hi ‘‘pañca kammānīti cakkhusotaghānajivhākāyā imāni pañcindriyāni ‘pañca kammānī’ti paññāpentī’’ti vadanti. Kammanti laddhīti oḷārikabhāvato paripuṇṇakammanti laddhi. Manokammaṃ anoḷārikattā upaḍḍhakammanti laddhīti yojanā. Dvaṭṭhipaṭipadāti ‘‘dvāsaṭṭhi paṭipadā’’ti vattabbe sabhāvaniruttiṃ ajānanto ‘‘dvaṭṭhipaṭipadā’’ti vadati. Ekasmiṃ kappeti ekasmiṃ mahākappe, tatthāpi ca vivaṭṭaṭṭhāyīsaññite ekasmiṃ asaṅkhyeyyekappe.
“屠羊者”即杀羊的人。同理,屠猪者等也应如此理解。“猎人”指任何其他捕鹿者、猎师。他们因专作恶业而被说为“黑生类”。“比丘们”指佛教中的比丘。据说他暗指“他们带着欲贪而受用”,因此说:“在四种资具中夹着刺来吃。”为什么这么说呢?因为他固执地认为“他们受用极其美妙的资具”,所以即便比丘们依正理获得资具而受用,由于他执取与邪命外道规条相违的见解,便指责他们在资具中夹着刺来吃——这是另一种说法。另有一些出家者尤其致力于自我苦行,他们如同生活在刺上,故称“刺行者”。因奉行站立进食、拒绝沐浴等禁行,他们被认为更为白净。“裸形者的弟子”指邪命外道的弟子。据说他们因信奉邪命外道的见解而自许心得清净,因此比尼干陀更白净。像难陀等人,正是将那种邪命外道的行持做到了极致而安住。因此,比尼干陀及邪命外道弟子更白净者,便被称为至上白生类。这便是他的执取。显示巴利原文
Urabbhe hanantīti orabbhikā. Evaṃ sūkarikādayo veditabbā. Luddāti aññepi ye keci māgavikanesādā. Te pāpakammapasutatāya ‘‘kaṇhābhijātīti vadati. Bhikkhū’’ti buddhasāsane bhikkhū. Te kira ‘‘sachandarāgā paribhuñjantī’’ti adhippāyena ‘‘catūsu paccayesu kaṇṭake pakkhipitvā khādantī’’ti vadati. Kasmāti ce? Yasmā ‘‘te paṇītapaṇīte paccaye paṭisevantī’’ti tassa micchāgāho, tasmā ñāyaladdhepi paccaye bhuñjamānā ājīvakasamayassa vilomagāhitāya paccayesu kaṇṭake pakkhipitvā khādanti nāmāti vadatīti apare. Eke pabbajitā, ye savisesaṃ attakilamathānuyogaṃ anuyuttā. Tathā hi te kaṇṭake vattantā viya hontīti ‘‘kaṇṭakavuttikā’’ti vuttā. Ṭhatvā bhuñjananahānapaṭikkhepādivatasamāyogena paṇḍaratarā. ‘‘Acelakasāvakā’’ti ājīvakasāvake vadati. Te kira ājīvakaladdhiyā visuddhacittatāya nigaṇṭhehipi paṇḍaratarā. Nandādayo hi tathārūpaṃ ājīvakapaṭipattiṃ ukkaṃsaṃ pāpetvā ṭhitā. Tasmā nigaṇṭhehi ājīvakasāvakehi ca paṇḍaratarā paramasukkābhijātīti ayaṃ tassa laddhi.
“男子界”是以精勤之人来解说。那些界自然也适用于女人。“比丘与堕落者”等是依他们自己的经文所说。其中,“堕落者”指为了乞食而四处游走的人,或是依从他们行持而修行的人。“胜利者”指已经衰老、因年迈而体质衰弱的人,或是战胜了自己行持的对立面而安住的人。据说他处于这种状态后,对任何人都不说法,因此说“什么也不说”。即使别人对他撇嘴、做口形等变化,他出于忍辱,也一句话不说,也有此说。“无所得者”即如“他不从瓮口接受”等所说那样,因无所得的种种因缘集合而成为无所得者;正因如此,他因饥饿羸弱,以躺卧为归宿,被称为“沙门顺地”。显示巴利原文
Purisabhūmiyoti padhānapuggalena niddeso. Itthīnampi tā bhūmiyo icchanteva. ‘‘Bhikkhu ca pannako’’tiādi tesaṃ pāḷiyeva. Tattha pannakoti bhikkhāya vicaraṇako, tesaṃ vā paṭipattiyā paṭipannako. Jinoti jiṇṇo jarāvasena hīnadhātuko, attano vā paṭipattiyā paṭipakkhaṃ jinitvā ṭhito. So kira tathābhūto dhammampi kassaci na kathesi. Tenāha ‘‘na kiñci āhā’’ti. Oṭṭhavadanādivippakāre katepi khamanavasena na kiñci vadatītipi vadanti. Alābhinti ‘‘so na kumbhimukhā paṭiggaṇhātī’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.394) nayena vuttaalābhahetusamāyogena alābhiṃ, tatoyeva jighacchādubbalaparetatāya sayanaparāyanaṃ ‘‘samaṇaṃ pannabhūmī’’ti vadati.
“活命方式有百种”意为众生赖以生存的生计方式有百种。以“羊”摄之,便含山羊之类;以“鹿”摄之,则含鹿、野牛等一切鹿类。“众多天神”是依四天王天乃至梵身天等,以及它们内部各种细分,而说为众多天神。其中,四天王天的部分分类应依《大会经》来阐明。“人类亦是无边”指依洲岛、地域、家族种姓、生计等差别,人类同样具有无边的类别。“毕舍遮”即是饿鬼。他们种类繁多,如亡者、新死者等,形体有大有小。他以“六牙湖、曼陀基尼河、枯瓦里亚湖、目支邻陀湖”等名称来称呼他们。显示巴利原文
Ājīvavuttisatānīti sattānaṃ ājīvabhūtāni jīvikāvuttisatāni. Pasuggahaṇena eḷakajāti gahitā, migaggahaṇena rurugavayādisabbamigajāti. Bahū devāti cātumahārājikādibrahmakāyikādivasena, tesaṃ antarabhedavasena bahū devā. Tattha cātumahārājikānaṃ ekaccabhedo mahāsamayasuttavasena (dī. ni. 2.331) dīpetabbo. Manussāpi anantāti dīpadesakulavaṃsājīvādivibhāgavasena manussāpi anantabhedā. Pisācā eva pesācā. Te aparapetādayo mahantamahantā. Chaddantadahamandākiniyo kuvāḷiyamucalindanāmena vadati.
“已出离者”指已断除烦恼结缚的人。即使是智者……也不会向上超越,为什么呢?因为众生轮回的时限是决定的。对于尚未成熟的轮回因相,通过戒等令其成熟,即称速得清净。对于已经成熟的业,则通过一再地触证,适时地不使其达到成熟,这便称为令其灭尽。显示巴利原文
Pavuṭāti pabbagaṇṭhikā. Paṇḍitopi…pe… uddhaṃ na gacchati, kasmā? Sattānaṃ saṃsaraṇakālassa niyatabhāvato. Aparipakkaṃ saṃsaraṇanimittaṃ sīlādinā paripāceti nāma sīghaṃyeva visuddhippattiyā. Paripakkaṃ kammaṃ phussa phussa patvā patvā kālena paripakkabhāvānāpādanena byantiṃ karoti nāma.
“线团”指在线团之中。“如同在解开时便自行消逝一般”:以此比喻说明,众生的轮回是逐渐灭尽的,并不会增长,因为轮回的体相是有限制的。显示巴利原文
Suttaguḷeti suttavaṭṭiyaṃ. ‘‘Nibbeṭhiyamānameva paletī’’ti upamāya sattānaṃ saṃsāro anukkamena khīyateva, na tassa vaḍḍhatīti dasseti paricchinnarūpattā.
阿耆多翅舍钦婆罗教说的注释显示巴利原文
Ajitakesakambalavādavaṇṇanā
171 “施”:因是以所施之物为首而说为布施,故他说“主张所施之物没有果报”;然而,他如何能否定布施米饭等物品的行为本身呢?对于“供奉”与“祭祀”也当如此理解。“大祠”指对一切人开放的广大布施。“宾客恭敬”指因有宾客身份而应作的恭敬。“果”指功德利益之果与等流果。“异熟”指同类果报。“不存在他世者的此世”,意指对于住于他世者,由其业应得的此世是不存在的。“也不存在此世者的他世”,意指对于住于此世者,由其业应得的他世是不存在的。在此,他说出了理由:“这一切皆于该处断灭。”意思是,这些有情,无论安住于何种生存地、何种胎门等处,都于该处断灭,以不再生起、完全坏灭的方式而毁灭。以果报不存在为理由:他是基于对父母的正确行持与错误行持均无果报,才说“无母,无父”,而并非基于父母本身不存在,亦非基于现在人们对他们所行的恭敬或不恭敬行为不存在,因为那些是世间现量可见的。为了显示这些有情就像水泡一样,只是产生,并非以死后投生为基础,所以说“他说不存在化生有情”,意思是“他说没有死后而投生的有情”。显示巴利原文
171.Dinnanti deyyadhammasīsena dānaṃ vuttanti āha ‘‘dinnassa phalābhāvaṃ vadatī’’ti, dinnaṃ pana annādivatthuṃ kathaṃ paṭikkhipati. Eseva nayo yiṭṭhaṃ hutanti etthāpi. Mahāyāgoti sabbasādhāraṇaṃ mahādānaṃ. Pāhunakasakkāroti pāhunabhāvena kātabbasakkāro. Phalanti ānisaṃsaphalaṃ, nissandaphalañca. Vipākoti sadisaphalaṃ. Paraloke ṭhitassa ayaṃ loko natthīti paraloke ṭhitassa kammunā laddhabbo ayaṃ loko na hoti. Idhaloke ṭhitassāpi paraloko natthīti idhaloke ṭhitassa kammunā laddhabbo paraloko na hoti. Tattha kāraṇamāha ‘‘sabbetattha tattheva ucchijjantī’’ti. Ime sattā yattha yattha bhave, yoniādīsu ca ṭhitā tattha tattheva ucchijjanti nirudayavināsavasena vinassanti. Phalābhāvavasenāti mātāpitūsu sammāpaṭipattimicchāpaṭipattīnaṃ phalassa abhāvavasena ‘‘natthi mātā, natthi pitā’’ti vadati, na mātāpitūnaṃ, nāpi tesu idāni kayiramānasakkārāsakkārānaṃ abhāvavasena tesaṃ lokapaccakkhattā. Pubbuḷakassa viya imesaṃ sattānaṃ uppādo nāma kevalo, na cavitvā āgamanapubbakoti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘natthi sattā opapātikā’’ti vuttanti āha ‘‘cavitvā upapajjanakasattā nāma natthīti vadatī’’ti. Samaṇena nāma yāthāvato jānantena kassaci kiñci akathetvā saññatena bhavitabbaṃ, aññathā āhopurisikā nāma siyā. Kiñhi paro parassa karissati? Tathā ca attano sampādanassa kassaci avassayo eva na siyā tattha tattheva ucchijjanatoti āha ‘‘ye imañca…pe… pavedentī’’ti.
“系着于四大种者”即是“由四大种所成”。然而,正如由泥土所生的器皿是泥土所成,同样,此身由四大种所生,故说“由四大种所成”。“内地界”是指存在于众生相续中的地界。“外地界”是指外在的大地。“归入”:如同从外在土地聚中,作为其一部分的地元素来到并成为内在状态、以众生身份而安住之后,现在又如陶罐等中的地元素一样,归入、融入那同一个外在的土地聚,完全无别,达到同一性。对于水界等,也是同理:在此,其意趣是,如由雨云从大海中取来的水,在变成雨水后,又再归入大海本身;如从太阳光线中取来的称为因陀罗火的热,又再归入太阳光线;如从大风蕴中吹出的大风,又归入那同一个风蕴——这是见行者的意图。“意成为第六的诸根跃入虚空”,他们说这是因为它们的所缘境不存在。因为通过执取了能识知者,所识知境也已被包含在内了。“功德与过失的诸句”是指关于功德与过失的类别章节。“唯以身体为诸句”是指所意欲表达的,因为身体应通过种种行为去实践。“令人迷执于诸物”被称为“dattu”,即愚痴的人。被那些愚痴的人、被那些幼……显示巴利原文
Catūsu mahābhūtesu niyuttoti cātumahābhūtiko. Yathā pana mattikāya nibbattaṃ bhājanaṃ mattikāmayaṃ, evaṃ ayaṃ catūhi mahābhūtehi nibbattoti āha ‘‘catumahābhūtamayo’’ti. Ajjhattikapathavīdhātūti sattasantānagatā pathavīdhātu. Bāhirapathavīdhātunti bahiddhā mahāpathaviṃ. Upagacchatīti bāhirapathavikāyato tadekadesabhūtā pathavī āgantvā ajjhattikabhāvappattiyā sattabhāvena saṇṭhitā idāni ghaṭādigatapathavī viya tameva bāhirapathavikāyaṃ upeti upagacchati sabbaso tena nibbisesataṃ ekībhāvameva gacchati. Āpādīsupi eseva nayoti ettha pajjunnena mahāsamuddato gahitaāpo viya vassodakabhāvena punapi mahāsamuddameva, sūriyarasmito gahitaṃ indaggisaṅkhātatejo viya puna sūriyarasmiṃ, mahāvāyukhandhato niggatamahāvāto viya tameva vāyukhandhaṃ upeti upagacchatīti diṭṭhigatikassa adhippāyo. Manacchaṭṭhāni indriyāni ākāsaṃ pakkhandanti tesaṃ visayābhāvāti vadanti. Visayigahaṇena hi visayāpi gahitā eva hontīti. Guṇāguṇapadānīti guṇadosakoṭṭhāsā. Sarīrameva padānīti adhippetaṃ sarīrena taṃtaṃkiriyāya pajjitabbato. Dabbanti muyhantīti dattū, mūḷhapuggalā. Tehi dattūhi bālamanussehi. ‘‘Paraloko atthī’’ti mati yesaṃ, te atthikā, tesaṃ vādoti atthikavādo, taṃ atthikavādaṃ.
“他否定业”,是因为他具有“无业论者”的立场。“他否定异熟”,是因为他完全否定了来世的转生。“他否定两者”,是因为通过彻底否定因,果也就自然被否定了。所谓“两者”,就是指业和异熟。因为他宣称:“众生无因无缘而染污,也(无因无缘)而清净”,这样既否定业,也否定异熟,因为他说在染污和清净中没有缘的作用。因此,他被称为“否定了那两者”。如果异熟被否定,则是由于若无业,就不会有异熟;如果业被否定,则是由于若无异熟,业就变得毫无意义。“以义理”就是从本质上说。“两者否定者”:尽管在经典中,它们是作为各自表述不同见解的独立学说而出现,但每一种(三分的见解)本质上都是“两者否定者”,因为它们都具有否定两者的性质。因为“两者否定者”是一个表达原因的词;而“乃无因论者”等则是立论的语句。这是因为,一个人通过否定异熟而成为无果论者、断灭论者;从义理上说,他通过否定业也就是无业论者,通过否定两者也就是无因论者。对于其余两种见解,也应当这样类推。显示巴利原文
Kammaṃpaṭibāhati akiriyavādibhāvato. Vipākaṃ paṭibāhati sabbena sabbaṃ āyatiṃ upapattiyā paṭikkhipanato. Ubhayaṃ paṭibāhati sabbaso hetupaṭibāhaneneva phalassapi paṭikkhittattā. Ubhayanti hi kammaṃ vipākañcāti ubhayaṃ. So hi ‘‘ahetū appaccayā sattā saṃkilissanti, visujjhanti cā’’ti (dī. ni. 1.168; ma. ni. 2.100, 227; saṃ. ni. 3.212) vadanto kammassa viya vipākassāpi saṃkilesavisuddhīnaṃ paccayattābhāvavacanato tadubhayaṃ paṭibāhati nāma. Vipāko paṭibāhito hoti asati kamme vipākābhāvato. Kammaṃ paṭibāhitaṃ hoti asati vipāke kammassa niratthakabhāvāpattito. Atthatoti sarūpena. Ubhayappaṭibāhakāti visuṃ visuṃ taṃtaṃdiṭṭhidīpakabhāvena pāḷiyaṃ āgatāpi paccekaṃ tividhadiṭṭhikā eva ubhayapaṭibāhakattā. Ubhayappaṭibāhakāti hi hetuvacanaṃ. ‘‘Ahetukavādā cevā’’tiādi paṭiññāvacanaṃ. Yo hi vipākapaṭibāhanena natthikadiṭṭhiko ucchedavādī, so atthato kammapaṭibāhanena akiriyadiṭṭhiko, ubhayapaṭibāhanena ahetukadiṭṭhiko ca hoti. Sesadvayepi eseva nayo.
「他们诵习」:即学习并读诵那阐明该见解的论典。「他们思察」:即审虑其义理。「他们」等语句,是显示他们思察的方式。「在那所缘上」:即在如所计度的业果无有等事上,也就是在基于「作恶者不被视为作恶」等理路而生起的邪见所缘上。「邪念得以安住」:即对于通过传闻领受的、以「作恶者不被视为作恶」等形态而呈现的义理,以与之相应的遍寻进行思惟,当这些义理如同有形之物般以其自性呈现于心时,由于长时串习,生起「正是如此」的审察忍可,以此审察忍可力而如是执取后,一再如此修习、多所作为者,当他被邪寻所执取、并得到邪精进支助时,便执取非彼自性者为「彼之自性」,如此,那与彼邪见相应、得到「邪念」之称的渴爱便得以安住。「心成为一境」:即依各自寻等缘的获得,心专一于该所缘,舍弃了多境性,如同进入安止定一般,成为一境。这里是以心来代表而说邪定。因为邪定也是依靠殊胜的缘而获得修习之力,在这些场合能做出类似安止的作用,应知如同射师射击羚羊等时所起的专注那样。「速行心速行」:即以此方式,在多次的前分速行刹那生起之后,于最后速行过程之末,有七个速行心速行。在第一个速行心时,还是可以疗治的。同样,在第二等速行心也是如此。这只是为了说明法的本性,并不是说在那个刹那,有任何方法可以对治它们。显示巴利原文
Sajjhāyantīti taṃ diṭṭhidīpakaṃ ganthaṃ uggahetvā paṭhanti. Vīmaṃsantīti tassa atthaṃ vicārenti. ‘‘Tesa’’ntiādi vīmaṃsanākāradassanaṃ. Tasmiṃ ārammaṇeti yathāparikappitakammaphalābhāvādike ‘‘karoto na karīyati pāpa’’nti ādinayappavattāya laddhiyā ārammaṇe. Micchāsati santiṭṭhatīti ‘‘karoto na karīyati pāpa’’ntiādivasena anussavūpaladdhe atthe tadākāraparivitakkanehi saviggahe viya sarūpato cittassa paccupaṭṭhite cirakālaparicayena evametanti nijjhānakkhamabhāvūpagamanena nijjhānakkhantiyā tathāgahite punappunaṃ tatheva āsevantassa bahulīkarontassa micchāvitakkena samādiyamānā micchāvāyāmūpatthambhitā ataṃsabhāvaṃ ‘‘taṃsabhāva’’nti gaṇhantī micchāsatīti laddhanāmā taṃladdhisahagatā taṇhā santiṭṭhati. Cittaṃ ekaggaṃ hotīti yathāsakaṃ vitakkādipaccayalābhena tasmiṃ ārammaṇe avaṭṭhitatāya anekaggataṃ pahāya ekaggaṃ appitaṃ viya hoti. Cittasīsena micchāsamādhi eva vutto. Sopi hi paccayavisesehi laddhabhāvanābalo īdise ṭhāne samādhānapatirūpakiccakaroyeva, vāḷavijjhanādīsu viyāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Javanāni javantīti anekakkhattuṃ tenākārena pubbabhāgiyesu javanavāresu pavattesu sabbapacchime javanavāre satta javanāni javanti. Paṭhame javane satekicchā honti. Tathā dutiyādīsūti dhammasabhāvadassanamattametaṃ, na pana tasmiṃ khaṇe tesaṃ tikicchā kenaci sakkā kātuṃ.
「在那里」是指在那三种邪见之中。「某一个人落入一种见」:若有人仅对一种见生起执著及修习,他便只落入那一种见。若对两种或三种见有执著及修习,他便落入两种或三种见。这说明,先前以「遮破两者」为门而阐明的义理成就之「一切见者」,属于前分。然而,作为「堕入邪性决定」入流分之邪见,则如同因各自缘具足成就而有别异所缘的诸殊胜证得不能同时生起一样,绝不相互混杂。通过「即使落入一种……」等语句,显示这三种见具有同等力用与同等果报。因此,于一人而言,此三者生起时绝不交织;当其中一见给与异熟果时,其余二见则成为给予增上力的助缘。「这被称为轮回之桩」一句,应以别义而非了义来解释。正如《破斥犹豫》中所说:「那么,他只是在某一有身中成为确定,还是在另一有身中也会确定呢?仅在某一有身中确定,但由于串习之力,他在其他生命相续中还是会偏好那个见解。」因为这些不善法是微弱、虚弱的,不似善法那样有力、大力,故说:「仅在某一有身中确定。」否显示巴利原文
Tatthāti tesu tīsu micchādassanesu. Koci ekaṃ dassanaṃ okkamatīti yassa ekasmiṃyeva abhiniveso āsevanā ca pavattā, so ekameva dassanaṃ okkamati. Yassa pana dvīsu tīsupi vā abhiniveso āsevanā ca pavattā, so dve tīṇipi okkamati, etena yā pubbe ubhayapaṭibāhakatāmukhena dīpitā atthasiddhā sabbadiṭṭhikatā, sā pubbabhāgiyā. Yā pana micchattaniyāmokkantibhūtā, sā yathāsakaṃ paccayasamudāgamasiddhito bhinnārammaṇānaṃ viya visesādhigamānaṃ ekajjhaṃ anuppattiyā asaṅkiṇṇā evāti dasseti. ‘‘Ekasmiṃ okkantepī’’tiādinā tissannampi diṭṭhīnaṃ samānabalataṃ samānaphalatañca dasseti. Tasmā tissopi cetā ekassa uppannā abbokiṇṇā eva, ekāya vipāke dinne itarā anubalappadāyikāyo honti. ‘‘Vaṭṭakhāṇu nāmesā’’ti idaṃ vacanaṃ neyyatthaṃ, na nītatthaṃ. Tathā hi papañcasūdaniyaṃ ‘‘kiṃ panesa ekasmiṃyeva attabhāve niyato hoti, udāhu aññasmiṃ pīti? Ekasmiṃyeva niyato, āsevanavasena pana bhavantarepi taṃ taṃ diṭṭhiṃ roceti yevā’’ti (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 3.129) vuttaṃ. Akusalañhi nāmetaṃ abalaṃ dubbalaṃ, na kusalaṃ viya sabalaṃ mahābalaṃ. Tasmā ‘‘ekasmiṃyeva attabhāve niyato’’ti vuttaṃ. Aññathā sammattaniyāmo viya micchattaniyāmopi accantiko siyā, na ca accantiko. Yadi evaṃ vaṭṭakhāṇujotanā kathanti āha ‘‘āsevanavasena panā’’tiādi. Tasmā yathā ‘‘sakiṃ nimuggopi nimuggo eva bālo’’ti vuttaṃ, evaṃ vaṭṭakhāṇujotanā. Yādise hi paccaye paṭicca ayaṃ taṃ taṃ dassanaṃ okkanto puna kadāci tappaṭipakkhe paccaye paṭicca tato sīsukkhipanamassa na hotīti na vattabbaṃ, tasmā ‘‘yebhuyyena hi evarūpassa bhavato vuṭṭhānaṃ nāma natthī’’ti vuttaṃ.
「因此」即因为如此,此真实法也成为轮回之桩的缘,所以。「欲求利益者」是指通过现法利益、来世利益及究竟义,而希望依自身功德获得增长的人。显示巴利原文
Tasmāti yasmā evaṃ saṃsārakhāṇubhāvassapi paccayo apaṇṇakajāto, tasmā. Bhūtikāmoti diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikaparamatthānaṃ vasena attano guṇehi vaḍḍhikāmo.
波拘陀迦旃延论释显示巴利原文
Pakudhakaccāyanavādavaṇṇanā
174 「无因作」:指不由任何平等或不平等之因所造作、所安排。「无作相」:指这些事物并无所谓「被造作的方式」。此两句,说明它们不会依世间任何因缘条件而生起。「也不以神通所化」:指非由任何具神通、得心自在的天人或自在天等的神通所化现。「非化」:即不被任何事物所化。如上所说的义理,即是《梵网经释义》中所解释的意思。「不育」:如同不能生育的牲畜和不结果的扇叶树头棕等植物,意指对任何事物都不会产生,以此否定地界等能生起色等事物的功能。其理论认为:色、声等与地界等,是互不关联而各自运作的。「如山顶而立」:就如同山顶,不被任何事物所生,亦不产生任何事物,这些也是如此。当世俗说「种子生出芽等」时,他认为那只是已然存在的事物从中显现出来,并非从无生有;否则,一处应从另一处获得,这是他的意趣所在。「因坚住故」:因无变易而能坚住。「不动摇」:即不会陷入变易。由于没有变易,这七个身如柱般坚固屹立。「不动性」:即安住于自己的本性。因此说「不变易」。正因具有不变易之法,它们彼此之间才不会互相恼害。若会有变易,便可能生起恼害;同样,显示巴利原文
174.Akatāti samena visamena vā kenaci hetunā na katā na vihitā. Katavidho karaṇavidhi natthi etesanti akatavidhānā. Padadvayenāpi loke kenaci hetupaccayena nesaṃ anibbattanabhāvaṃ dasseti. Iddhiyāpi na nimmitāti kassaci iddhimato cetovasippattassa devassa , issarādino vā iddhiyāpi na nimmitā. Animmāpitā kassaci animmāpitā. Vuttatthamevāti brahmajālavaṇṇanāyaṃ (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.30) vuttatthameva. Vañjhāti vañjhapasuvañjhatālādayo viya aphalā, kassaci ajanakāti attho, etena pathavikāyādīnaṃ rūpādijanakabhāvaṃ paṭikkhipati. Rūpasaddādayo hi pathavikāyādīhi appaṭibaddhavuttikāti tassa laddhi. Pabbatakūṭaṃ viya ṭhitāti kūṭaṭṭhā, yathā pabbatakūṭaṃ kenaci anibbattitaṃ, kassaci ca anibbattakaṃ, evamete pīti adhippāyo. Yamidaṃ ‘‘bījato aṅkurādi jāyatī’’ti vuccati, taṃ vijjamānameva tato nikkhamati, na avijjamānaṃ, aññathā aññatopi aññassa upaladdhi siyāti adhippāyo. Ṭhitattāti nibbikārābhāvena ṭhitattā. Na calantīti vikāraṃ nāpajjanti. Vikārābhāvato hi tesaṃ sattannaṃ kāyānaṃ esikaṭṭhāyiṭṭhitatā. Aniñjanañca attano pakatiyā avaṭṭhānameva. Tenāha ‘‘na vipariṇamantī’’ti. Avipariṇāmadhammattā eva hi te aññamaññaṃ na byābādhenti. Sati hi vikāraṃ āpādetabbatāya byābādhakatāpi siyā, tathā anuggahetabbatāya anuggāhakatāti tadabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ pāḷiyaṃ nālantiādi vuttaṃ. Pathavī eva kāyekadesattā pathavikāyo. Jīvasattamānaṃ kāyānaṃ niccatāya nibbikārabhāvato na hantabbatā, na ghātetabbatā cāti neva koci hantā vā ghātetā vā, tenevāha ‘‘sattannaṃ tveva kāyāna’’ntiādi. Yadi koci hantā natthi, kathaṃ satthappahāroti āha ‘‘yathā muggarāsi ādīsū’’tiādi. Kevalaṃ saññāmattameva hoti. Hananaghātanādi pana paramatthato nattheva kāyānaṃ avikopanīyabhāvatoti adhippāyo.
对尼干陀那陀子(Nigaṇṭha Nāṭaputta)教说的注释。显示巴利原文
Nigaṇṭhanāṭaputtavādavaṇṇanā
177 “四部分之分”即“四支”,“四支”也就是“具四支”。这里“支”字是“部分”的意思,如同“夜的第一分”。此处的“部分”以防护为特征,故说“具四支防护者”,即以四种部分的防护而得防护。“禁止一切冷水”是指禁止一切冷水的受用。“具足一切止恶”是具足一切种类的防护特征。“抖落罪恶”是以一切消磨为特征的止恶而抖落罪恶。“触达”是由于抛弃了八种业而达到解脱,被以业尽为特征的一切止恶所触达,即达到并安住于那种状态。“心达边际”是因证得解脱而心达到最高极限。“已调御”是因为身体等诸根中已无需要制御的对象,故心已调御。“善安住心”是彻底地善安立心。“随顺显示巴利原文
177. Cattāro yāmā bhāgā catuyāmā, catuyāmā eva cātuyāmā, bhāgattho hi idha yāma-saddo yathā ‘‘rattiyā paṭhamo yāmo’’ti . So panettha bhāgo saṃvaralakkhaṇoti āha ‘‘cātuyāmasaṃvutoti catukoṭṭhāsena saṃvarena saṃvuto’’ti. Paṭikkhittasabbasītodakoti paṭikkhittasabbasītodakaparibhogo. Sabbena pāpavāraṇena yuttoti sabbappakārena saṃvaralakkhaṇena samannāgato. Dhutapāpoti sabbena nijjaralakkhaṇena pāpavāraṇena vidhutapāpo. Phuṭṭhoti aṭṭhannampi kammānaṃ khepanena mokkhappattiyā kammakkhayalakkhaṇena sabbena pāpavāraṇena phuṭṭho taṃ patvā ṭhito. Koṭippattacittoti mokkhādhigameneva uttamamariyādappattacitto. Yatattoti kāyādīsu indriyesu saṃyametabbassa abhāvato saṃyatacitto. Suppatiṭṭhitacittoti nissesato suṭṭhu patiṭṭhitacitto. Sāsanānulomaṃ nāma pāpavāraṇena yuttatā. Tenāha ‘‘dhutapāpo’’tiādi. Asuddhaladdhitāyāti ‘‘atthi jīvo, so ca siyā nicco, siyā anicco’’ti evamādiasuddhaladdhitāya . Sabbāti kammapakativibhāgādivisayā sabbā nijjhānakkhantiyo. Diṭṭhiye vāti micchādiṭṭhiyo eva jātā.
对散阇耶毗罗胝子(Sañcaya Belaṭṭhaputta)教说的注释。显示巴利原文
Sañcayabelaṭṭhaputtavādavaṇṇanā
179-181 179-181. 此即《梵网经》注释中对“鳗鱼散乱论”的解说方法,因其具有散乱解答的性质,且此处同样引用了散乱论。显示巴利原文
179-181.Amarāvikkhepevuttanayo evāti brahmajāle amarāvikkhepavādasaṃvaṇṇanāyaṃ (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.61-63) vuttanayo eva vikkhepabyākaraṇabhāvato, tatheva cettha vikkhepavādassa āgatattā.
对第一种现见沙门果的注释。显示巴利原文
Paṭhamasandiṭṭhikasāmaññaphalavaṇṇanā
183 183. “如同令你喜欢”是指我现在所问的义理,随你心意所喜。“家内所生”是说生在女奴的腹中。“以财买得”即用钱所买。“被捆绑而取者”指被强制拘拿而来。“自己”指自身、本人。“为奴的状态”即奴仆的身份。有些奴仆虽然懒惰不做事,也不会被称为“做工者”,因此说“不懒惰,具有做工的习惯”。“首先”是因为要去最近的地方,所以在清晨更早的时刻。“之后”是指在主人躺下之后。“未从卧起”指夜晚将明时,还未从床上起来。“从凌晨时刻开始”是从刚过的夜晚凌晨开始。“直到主人夜晚入睡”是指在另一天的傍晚时分,直至入睡。显示巴利原文
183.Yathā te rucceyyāti idāni mayā pucchiyamāno attho yathā tava citte roceyya. Gharadāsiyā kucchismiṃ jāto antojāto. Dhanena kīto dhanakkīto. Bandhaggāhagahito karamarānīto. Sāmanti sayameva. Dāsabyanti dāsabhāvaṃ. Koci dāsopi samāno alaso kammaṃ akaronto ‘‘kammakāro’’ti na vuccatīti āha ‘‘analaso kammakaraṇasīloyevā’’ti. Paṭhamamevāti āsannataraṭṭhānūpasaṅkamanato pageva puretarameva. Pacchāti sāmikassa nipajjāya pacchā. Sayanato avuṭṭhiteti rattiyā vibhāyanavelāya seyyato avuṭṭhite. Paccūsakālato paṭṭhāyāti atītāya rattiyā paccūsakālato paṭṭhāya. Yāva sāmino rattiṃ niddokkamananti aparāya padosavelāyaṃ yāva niddokkamanaṃ. Kiṃ kāranti kiṃ karaṇīyaṃ, kiṃkārabhāvato pucchitvā kātabbaveyyāvaccanti attho.
“如天”(devo viyāti):具足权威、眷属等成就,如同天界的主宰之神。“我真愿如此”(so vatassāhanti):但愿我也能如此。连接意为:我愿像那位国王一样,我该如何修福?若我修广大福业的话。在“so vatassa'ssa”的读法中,连接意为:“那位国王如是,我愿成为如是”,若修福业的话。因此说“这就是那个意思”。“我”(assanti):在上人的语境中,虽“我”字通常不用,此处应理解为使用了。“乃至有生之年,我不能布施”:即使尽一生布施,也不及那位国王一日所施的百分之一。因此,我将努力出家,如此连接。显示巴利原文
Devo viyāti ādhipaccaparivārādisampattisamannāgato padhānadevo viya. So vatassāhanti so vata assaṃ ahaṃ. So rājā viya ahampi bhaveyyaṃ, kathaṃ puññāni kareyyaṃ, yadi puññāni uḷārāni kareyyanti yojanā. ‘‘So vatassa’ssa’’nti pāṭhe so rājā assa ahaṃ assaṃ vata, yadi puññāni kareyyanti yojanā. Tenāha ‘‘ayamevattho’’ti. Assanti uttamapurisappayoge ahaṃ-saddo appayuttopi payutto eva hoti. Yāvajīvaṃ na sakkhissāmi dātunti yāvajīvaṃ dānatthāya ussāhaṃ karontopi yaṃ rājā ekaṃ divasaṃ deti , tato satabhāgampi dātuṃ na sakkhissāmi. Tasmā pabbajissāmīti pabbajjāyaṃ ussāhaṃ katvāti yojanā.
“以身防护”(kāyena saṃvuto):意为防护由身门生起的恶法后而安住,故说“以身防护后”等。“以衣、食为最上”(ghāsacchādanena paramatāya):在寻求衣、食时,以严格简朴而处最上;或衣、食本身即为其最上、极致,除此之外不寻求、不期待任何其他资具,故称“以衣、食为最上”,此状态即为“以衣、食为最上性”。“身住远离”(vivekaṭṭhakāyānaṃ):身住于远离人群集会之处。“乐出离”(nekkhammābhiratānaṃ):乐于禅那。“达到最上清净”(paramavodānappattānaṃ):由禅那乐而达到最上殊胜的清净。“无依”(nirupadhīnaṃ):因烦恼之依与行作之依永灭,故为无依。“入无行”(visaṅkhāragatānaṃ):证得涅槃。这里,第一种远离,可与其他两种远离一起达到,也可单独达到;第二种同样;但第三种……显示巴利原文
Kāyenasaṃvutoti kāyena saṃvaritabbaṃ kāyadvārena pavattanakaṃ pāpadhammaṃ saṃvaritvā vihareyyāti ayamettha atthoti āha ‘‘kāyena pihito hutvā’’tiādi. Ghāsacchādanena paramatāyāti ghāsacchādanapariyesane sallekhavasena paramatāya, ukkaṭṭhabhāve saṇṭhito ghāsacchādanameva vā paramaṃ parā koṭi etassa, na tato paraṃ kiñci āmisajātaṃ pariyesati paccāsisati cāti ghāsacchādanaparamo, tabbhāvo ghāsacchādanaparamatā, tassā ghāsacchādanaparamatāya. Vivekaṭṭhakāyānanti gaṇasaṅgaṇikato pavivitte ṭhitakāyānaṃ. Nekkhammābhiratānanti jhānābhiratānaṃ. Tāya eva jhānābhiratiyā paramaṃ uttamaṃ vodānaṃ visuddhiṃ pattatāya paramavodānappattānaṃ. Kilesūpadhiabhisaṅkhārūpadhīnaṃ accantavigamena nirupadhīnaṃ. Visaṅkhāragatānanti adhigatanibbānānaṃ. Ettha ca paṭhamo viveko itarehi dvīhi vivekehi sahāpi pattabbo vināpi, tathā dutiyo. Tatiyo pana itarehi dvīhi saheva pattabbo, na vināti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Gaṇe janasamāgame sannipatanaṃ gaṇasaṅgaṇikā, taṃ pahāya eko viharati carati puggalavasena asahāyattā. Citte kilesānaṃ sannipatanaṃ cittakilesasaṅgaṇikā, taṃ pahāya eko viharati kilesavasena asahāyattā. Maggassa ekacittakkhaṇikattā, gotrabhuādīnañca ārammaṇamattattā na tesaṃ vasena sātisayā nibbutisukhasamphusanā, phalasamāpattinirodhasamāpattivasena sātisayāti āha ‘‘phalasamāpattiṃ vā nirodhasamāpattiṃ vā pavisitvā’’ti. Phalapariyosāno hi nirodhoti.
184 “引向前”(abhiharitvā):以面对面的方式引领,此句省略了“我将以衣服等达成目的”之语。“合适”(sappāya):能消除一切疾病,因而具有饶益性。“护”(gopanā):以保护未来免受灾患为本质的守护、保护与监护。“防护”(āvaraṇagutti):以遮止现前事物为本质的防护与监护。显示巴利原文
184.Abhiharitvāti abhimukhībhāvena netvā. ‘‘Ahaṃ cīvarādīhi payojanaṃ sādhessāmī’’ti vacanaseso. Sappāyanti sabbagelaññapaharaṇavasena upakārāvahaṃ. Bhāvinā anatthato paripālanavasena gopanā rakkhāgutti. Paccuppannassa nisedhavasena āvaraṇagutti.
第二种现见沙门果的注释显示巴利原文
Dutiyasandiṭṭhikasāmaññaphalavaṇṇanā
186 「kasati」(他耕作):指耕作。「gahapatika」(居士):此处“ka”音节表示微末,故称“唯为一屋之主的长者”,以此否定其为多家宗族之长。「karaṃ karoti」(他作务):即从事事务。「vaḍḍheti」(增长):谓由层层增上的成就而增长。如此,即便舍弃很少的财产,出家也极为困难,此义应以《鹌鹑喻经》阐明。故说:“优陀夷,譬如有一穷人、无所有、困乏之人,拥有破败简陋、仅堪乌鸦栖止、形貌鄙陋的破屋”等,经中广为解说。若说舍弃哪怕少许财富而出家尚且艰难,那么为何在“奴仆之篇章”中未提到对财富的执取?对此答道:“然而在‘奴仆之篇章’中……”等等。正如奴仆的财富由他人掌控,等于非其所有;亲属亦复如是。因此在“奴仆之篇章”中亦未将亲属纳入考量,应作如是解。显示巴利原文
186.Kasatīti kasiṃ karoti. Gahapatikoti ettha ka-saddo appatthoti āha ‘‘ekagehamatte jeṭṭhako’’ti, tena anekakulajeṭṭhakabhāvaṃ paṭikkhipati. Karaṃ karotīti karaṃ sampādeti. Vaḍḍhetīti uparūpari sampādanena vaḍḍheti. Evaṃ appampi pahāya pabbajituṃ dukkaranti ayamattho laṭukikopamasuttena (ma. ni. 2.151, 152) dīpetabbo. Tenāha ‘‘seyyathāpi, udāyi, puriso daliddo assako anāḷhiyo, tassassa ekaṃ agārakaṃ oluggaviluggaṃ kākātidāyiṃ naparamarūpa’’nti vitthāro. Yadi appampi bhogaṃ pahāya pabbajituṃ dukkaraṃ, kasmā dāsavāre bhogaggahaṇaṃ na katanti āha ‘‘dāsavāre panā’’tiādi. Yathā ca dāsassa bhogāpi abhogā parāyattabhāvato, evaṃ ñātayo pīti dāsavāre ñātiparivaṭṭaggahaṇampi na katanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
更殊胜沙门果的注释显示巴利原文
Paṇītatarasāmaññaphalavaṇṇanā
189 「evarūpāhi」(以这些):即以如前所述奴仆、农夫等譬喻相类似的种种譬喻,世尊有能力阐明沙门果,纵使经历一日一夜乃至更久亦无妨,因其具足无碍辩才,能以种种不同方式开示。「tathāpi」(虽然如此):虽则开示内容辗转增上、丰富多元,亦复如是。显示巴利原文
189.Evarūpāhīti yathāvuttadāsakassakūpamāsadisāhi upamāhi sāmaññaphalaṃ dīpetuṃ pahoti bhagavā sakalampi rattindivaṃ tato bhiyyopi anantapaṭibhānatāya vicittanayadesanabhāvato. Tathāpīti satipi desanāya uttaruttarādhikanānānayavicittabhāve.
该词(「sādhuka」)的意义,实即「sādhu」一词加上音节“ka”扩展而成。因此,解释「sādhuka」词义者,在提取义理时便引用了「sādhu」一词。「āyācane」(请求):指当面请求,意即盼望。「sampaṭicchane」(纳受):是领受之意。「sampahaṃsane」(随喜):即对现存功德生起欢喜、喜悦,是令心高昂欣喜的意思。「dhammarucī」(乐法者):谓希求功德之人。「paññāṇavā」(有慧者):是具备智慧的人。「addubbho」(不欺诳者):是不伤害者,意即不恼害之人。「idhāpi」(此处亦):指在此《沙门果经》中亦然,这便是「sādhu」一词的意义。「daḷhīkammeti」(坚固作):指在恭敬中所作的行为。「āṇattiyanti」(命令中):谓在命令中的意思。因为当说到“善听,善作意”时,藉由「sādhuka」一词,既使听闻与作意成为恭敬行,又显出命令的意味,正如它也有这一种意味。显示巴利原文
Ekatthametaṃ padaṃ sādhusaddasseva ka-kārena vaḍḍhitvā vuttattā, teneva sādhuka-saddassa atthaṃ vadantena atthuddhāravasena sādhu-saddo udāhaṭo. Āyācaneti abhimukhayācane, abhipatthanāyanti attho . Sampaṭicchaneti paṭiggaṇhane . Sampahaṃsaneti saṃvijjamānaguṇavasena haṃsane tosane, udaggatākaraṇeti attho. Dhammarucīti puññakāmo. Paññāṇavāti paññavā. Addubbhoti adūsako, anupaghātakoti attho. Idhāpīti imasmiṃ sāmaññaphalepi. Ayaṃ sādhu-saddo. Daḷhīkammeti sakkacca kiriyāyaṃ. Āṇattiyanti āṇāpane. ‘‘Suṇohi sādhukaṃ manasi karohī’’ti hi vutte sādhuka-saddena savanamanasikārānaṃ sakkaccakiriyā viya tadāṇāpanampi jotitaṃ hoti, āyācanatthatā viya cassa āṇāpanatthatā veditabbā. Sundarepīti sundaratthepi. Idāni yathāvuttena sādhuka-saddassa atthattayena pakāsitaṃ visesaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘daḷhīkammatthena hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
「manasi karohi」(作意):此处,作意并非以引导所缘为特相,而是以将心安置为特相——在路心引导与速行引导的作意之前,先作安置。为显明此义,故说“转向”等。防止耳根散乱:由于将心导向听闻,遮止了其他行为,故称为“倾耳来听”。防止意根散乱:因其遮止了其他念头。防止执取音节颠倒:特为指明「sādhukaṃ」(善)一词。防止执取义颠倒之理,与此相同。以“持守、审察等”的“等”字,摄取了权衡、决定等,以及对见的善通达。「sabyañjana」(具音节):此处,能表达所欲之义者,即名为“音节”,也就是自性语。与音节俱行,便称为“具音节”,即具足音节之义。「sāttha」(有义):所谓“义”,即应追求、应亲近、应随念者,如四遍清净戒等。与彼义同在,便称为“有义”,即具足义之理。于“法深奥”等句中,“法”指经典,“开示”指对内心确认之经典的宣说,“义”指经典之义理,“通达”指对经典及其义理的如实觉悟。而且显示巴利原文
Manasi karohīti ettha manasikāro na ārammaṇapaṭipādanalakkhaṇo, atha kho vīthipaṭipādanajavanapaṭipādanamanasikārapubbakaṃ citte ṭhapanalakkhaṇoti dassento ‘‘āvajjā’’tiādimāha. Sotindriyavikkhepavāraṇaṃ savane niyojanavasena kiriyantarapaṭisedhanabhāvato, sotaṃ odahāti attho. Manindriyavikkhepavāraṇaṃ aññacintāpaṭisedhanato. Byañjanavipallāsaggāhavāraṇaṃ ‘‘sādhuka’’nti visesetvā vuttattā. Pacchimassa atthavipallāsaggāhavāraṇepi eseva nayo. Dhāraṇūpaparikkhādīsūti ādi-saddena tulanatīraṇādike, diṭṭhiyā suppaṭividhe ca saṅgaṇhāti. Sabyañjanoti ettha yathādhippetamatthaṃ byañjayatīti byañjanaṃ, sabhāvanirutti. Saha byañjanenāti sabyañjano, byañjanasampannoti attho. Sātthoti araṇīyato upagantabbato anudhātabbato attho, catupārisuddhisīlādiko . Tena saha atthenāti sāttho, atthasampannoti attho. Dhammagambhīrotiādīsu dhammo nāma tanti. Desanā nāma tassā manasā vavatthāpitāya tantiyā desanā. Attho nāma tantiyā attho. Paṭivedho nāma tantiyā, tantiatthassa ca yathābhūtāvabodho. Yasmā cete dhammadesanā atthappaṭivedhā sasādīhi viya mahāsamuddo mandabuddhīhi dukkhogāhā, alabbhaneyyapatiṭṭhā ca, tasmā gambhīrā. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘yasmā ayaṃ dhammo…pe… sādhukaṃ manasi karohī’’ti. Ettha ca paṭivedhassa dukkarabhāvato dhammatthānaṃ, desanāñāṇassa dukkarabhāvato desanāya dukkhogāhatā, paṭivedhassa pana uppādetuṃ asakkuṇeyyatāya, ñāṇuppattiyā ca dukkarabhāvato dukkhogāhatā veditabbā. Desanaṃ nāma uddisanaṃ, tassa niddisanaṃ bhāsananti idhādhippetanti āha ‘‘vitthārato bhāsissāmī’’ti. Paribyattaṃ kathanañhi bhāsanaṃ, tenāha ‘‘desessāmīti…pe… vitthāradīpana’’nti.
为了以经文证明上述意义,故说“因此说”等。「sāḷikāya viya nigghoso」(如鹪鹩之鸣声):犹如鹪鹩的鸣声,甜美、悦耳、令人喜爱。「paṭibhānanti」(答言):即声音。「udīrayī」(发出):即被发出,或被说出。显示巴利原文
Yathāvuttamatthaṃ suttapadena samatthetuṃ ‘‘tenāhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Sāḷikāyiva nigghosoti sāḷikāya ālāpo viya madhuro kaṇṇasukho pemanīyo. Paṭibhānanti saddo. Udīrayīti uccārīyati, vuccati vā.
如此说时,他便生起了踊跃:即当世尊说“谛听,善作意,我当说法”时,他心想:“看来世尊不仅将简要开示,亦将详细宣说。”于是生起踊跃,欢喜喜悦。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ vutte ussāhajātoti evaṃ ‘‘suṇohi sādhukaṃ manasi karohi bhāsissāmī’’ti vutte ‘‘na kira bhagavā saṅkhepeneva desessati, vitthārenapi bhāsissatī’’ti sañjātussāho haṭṭhatuṭṭho hutvā.
190 此处的“在此处”一词,指如来出生之处,故称为“表处所、地点的介词”。而那个“此”字,仅是泛泛取其“此处”之字面义,并非特指某一具体处所。如后文所说:“在某些地方,这只是为了凑足音节而已。”其中的“世间”是依世间而说,因它与“世间”一词为同位语关系。其余两个词,则当视作仅因与其它词相邻,才各自被如此说出。因为“在此处,如来、世间”中的“世间”,实指出生处的范畴;而在此处,即将此轮围世界理解为“世间”。而“沙门”指入流者,“第二种沙门”指一来者。确有此说:“比丘们,何为沙门?比丘们,于此,比丘断尽三结,成为入流者……”等等。“比丘们,何为第二种沙门?比丘们,于此,比丘断尽三结,贪嗔痴转薄弱……”等等。这里的“空间”意指某个地方。而“就住在此处”意为就住在这因陀娑罗窟中。显示巴利原文
190.‘‘Idhā’’ti iminā vuccamānaṃ adhikaraṇaṃ tathāgatassa uppattiṭṭhānabhūtaṃ adhippetanti āha ‘‘desāpadese nipāto’’ti. ‘‘Svāya’’nti sāmaññato idhasaddamattaṃ gaṇhāti, na yathāvisesitabbaṃ idha-saddaṃ. Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘katthaci padapūraṇamattamevā’’ti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.190). Lokaṃ upādāya vuccati loka-saddena samānādhikaraṇabhāvena vuttattā . Sesapadadvaye pana padantarasannidhānamattena taṃ taṃ upādāya vuttatā daṭṭhabbā. Idha tathāgato loketi hi jātikhettaṃ, tatthāpi ayaṃ cakkavāḷo ‘‘loko’’ti adhippeto. Samaṇoti sotāpanno. Dutiyo samaṇoti sakadāgāmī. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘katamo ca bhikkhave samaṇo? Idha bhikkhave bhikkhu tiṇṇaṃ saṃyojanānaṃ parikkhayā sotāpanno hotī’’tiādi (a. ni. 4.241). ‘‘Katamo ca bhikkhave dutiyo samaṇo? Idha bhikkhave bhikkhu tiṇṇaṃ saṃyojanānaṃ parikkhayā rāgadosamohānaṃ tanuttā’’tiādi (a. ni. 4.241). Okāsanti kañci padesaṃ. Idheva tiṭṭhamānassāti imissā eva indasālaguhāyaṃ tiṭṭhamānassa.
之所以说它仅为凑足音节,是因为它无法表处所,亦不能从中领解其他含义。所谓“阿拉汉”等词已详细解说,这是指关联解释。义理上的详解须借助言辞来完成,故提及“词”。诸如“世尊如来以另外八种原因……”等,在《自说经》注释等典籍,以及《清净道论大复注》中,都已依他途对“阿拉汉”等词作了详细解说。因此,应依彼处所说之理来理解此处的含义。因为如来之生包含于有情类中,故在说出“此处指有情世间”之后,为了指明他于哪类有情、何处降生,便接着说“正在有情世间降生时……”等。至于“如来不生于天界”等应说之事,下文将述。所谓“得核心者”,指藉由家族、财富、自在等而成为核心人物。“婆罗门居士”则指梵摩、沸伽罗娑罗等婆罗门,及给孤独等居士。显示巴利原文
Padapūraṇamattameva okāsāpadisanassāpi asambhavato atthantarassa abodhanato. Arahanti ādayo saddā vitthāritāti yojanā. Atthato vitthāraṇaṃ saddamukheneva hotīti saddaggahaṇaṃ. Yasmā. ‘‘Aparehipi aṭṭhahi kāraṇehi bhagavā tathāgato’’tiādinā udānaṭṭhakathādīsu, (udā. aṭṭha. 18; itivu. aṭṭha. 38) arahanti ādayo visuddhimaggaṭīkāyaṃ aparehi pakārehi vitthāritā , tasmātesu vuttānayenapi so (visuddhi. ṭī. 1.129, 130) attho veditabbo. Tathāgatassa sattanikāyantogadhatāya ‘‘idha pana sattaloko adhippeto’’ti vatvā tatthāyaṃ yasmiṃ sattanikāye yasmiñca okāse uppajjati, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘sattaloke uppajjamānopi cā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Tathāgato na devaloke uppajjatī’’tiādīsu yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ parato āgamissati. Sārappattāti kulabhogissariyādivasena sārabhūtā. Brāhmaṇagahapatikāti brahmāyupokkharasātiādibrāhmaṇā ceva anāthapiṇḍikādigahapatikā ca.
在“善生”等所说的四种选项中,第一种选项是从显示为了成佛而较接近的修行实践这个角度来说的。因为安住在较接近的修行实践中的人,由于出生的必然性,被称为“出生”,更何况是安住在修行实践顶端的人了。第二种选项,是从能带来成佛的出离开始,显示较接近的修行实践的角度来说的。第三种,是从成佛之法修行圆满开始,显示为了成佛的修行实践的角度来说的。因为大士们并非从出生或往生之时才开始累积成佛资粮。第四种,则是从开始修行成佛之法时算起。因为自从成为决定必得菩提之时起,有智慧的人就可以说“佛出生了”,这是由于出生的必然性。而就像说“河流流动”是基于流动这个行为没有间断而使用现在时态一样,同样地,基于为了出生而修行的行为没有间断,在四个选项中才都被称为“出生”。所谓“最先出生的状态”,指的是在四个选项中首先提到的,如来的出生这种存在状态。因此说:“意思是‘已经出生’,这就是此处的内涵。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Sujātāyā’’tiādinā vuttesu catūsu vikappesu paṭhamo vikappo buddhabhāvāya āsannatarapaṭipattidassanavasena vutto. Āsannatarāya hi paṭipattiyā ṭhito ‘‘uppajjatīti’’ vuccati uppādassa ekantikattā, pageva paṭipattiyā matthake ṭhito. Dutiyo buddhabhāvāvahapabbajjato paṭṭhāya āsannapaṭipattidassanavasena, tatiyo buddhakaradhamma pāripūrito paṭṭhāya buddhabhāvāya paṭipattidassanavasena. Na hi mahāsattānaṃ uppatibhavūpapattito paṭṭhāya bodhisambhārasambharaṇaṃ nāma atthi. Catuttho buddhakaradhammasamārambhato paṭṭhāya. Bodhiyā niyatabhāvappattito pabhuti hi viññūhi ‘‘buddho uppajjatī’’ti vattuṃ sakkā uppādassa ekantikattā. Yathā pana sandanti nadiyoti sandanakiriyāya avicchedamupādāya vattamānappayogo, evaṃ uppādatthāya paṭipajjanakiriyāya avicchedamupādāya catūsu vikappesu ‘‘uppajjati nāmā’’ti vuttaṃ. Sabbapaṭhamaṃ uppannabhāvanti catūsu vikappesu sabbapaṭhamaṃ vuttaṃ tathāgatassa uppannatāsaṅkhātaṃ atthibhāvaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘uppanno hotīti ayañhettha attho’’ti.
“彼世尊”是何义?即那位以“如来、阿拉汉”等词所称叹功德的,便是世尊。至于“此世间”,并非仅指大众眼前所见的部分,而是为了显示毫无遗漏地完全涵盖,故说“含天神的”等词,因此他说:“现在指出这应说的内容。”所谓“所生故”,是指依各自的业与烦恼而投生。这里以五欲天为例来含摄,是根据排除余类的道理,因为其余天界已被其他词句含摄。而“含天神的”一词,是以部分指点整体,以整体作为复合词的含义。至于第六欲天被含摄,则依近缘的道理,因为他在那里出生,也住在那里。对于梵身天等梵天界的含摄,也依同样的道理。而关于“敌人”与“沙门婆罗门”的含摄,那仅是举例说明;因为那些并非敌人、也未止息与去除诸恶的沙门婆罗门,经由“自称沙门婆罗门”这类词句而被含摄。虽然根据“含天神的”等修饰语可知,“世间”一词是以有情为对象,因其有同类的关系;但在“有毛的、有翼的”等说法中,即便并非同类,也可构成如此复合词,显见有通融的余地,因此说这含摄了众生,并指出以“众生”一词总摄。显示巴利原文
So bhagavāti yo ‘‘tathāgato araha’’ntiādinā kittitaguṇo, so bhagavā. ‘‘Imaṃ loka’’nti nayidaṃ mahājanassa sammukhamattaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, atha kho anavasesaṃ pariyādāyāti dassetuṃ ‘‘sadevaka’’ntiādi vuttaṃ, tenāha ‘‘idāni vattabbaṃ nidassetī’’ti. Pajātattāti yathāsakaṃ kammakilesehi nibbattattā. Pañcakāmāvacaradevaggahaṇaṃ pārisesañāyena itaresaṃ padantarehi saṅgahitattā. Sadevakanti ca avayavena viggaho samudāyo samāsattho. Chaṭṭhakāmāvacaradevaggahaṇaṃ paccāsattiñāyena. Tattha hi so jāto, taṃnivāsī ca. Brahmakāyikādibrahmaggahaṇanti etthāpi eseva nayo. Paccatthika…pe… samaṇabrāhmaṇaggahaṇanti nidassanamattametaṃ apaccatthikānaṃ, asamitābāhitapāpānañca samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ sassamaṇabrāhmaṇīvacanena gahitattā. Kāmaṃ ‘‘sadevaka’’ntiādi visesanānaṃ vasena sattavisayo lokasaddoti viññāyati tulyayogavisayattā tesaṃ, ‘‘salomako sapakkhako’’tiādīsu pana atulyayogepi ayaṃ samāso labbhatīti byabhicāradassanato pajāgahaṇanti āha ‘‘pajāvacanena sattalokaggahaṇa’’nti.
无色界有情安住于自身那不动摇的定境中,因此而嬉游,故称为“天”,获得这样的词源解释,便说:依“含天神的”含摄了无色界世间。由此也会说:“与生到空无边处天的诸天共住。”依“含魔的”含摄六欲天世间,因为那里特受魔的支配运作。有色梵天世间亦含摄其中,而无色梵天世间则已被单独含摄。所说的“以四众”,是指刹帝利等四众;另外的四众,则已由“含魔的”等说法含摄在内。其余一切有情世间,含摄龙、金翅鸟等种类。显示巴利原文
Arūpino sattā attano āneñjavihārena viharantā dibbantīti devāti imaṃ nibbacanaṃ labhantīti āha ‘‘sadevakaggahaṇena arūpāvacaraloko gahito’’ti. Tenāha ‘‘ākāsānañcāyatanūpagānaṃ devānaṃ sahabyata’’nti (a. ni. 3.117). Samārakaggahaṇena chakāmāvacaradevaloko gahito tassa savisesaṃ mārassa vase vattanato. Rūpī brahmaloko gahito arūpībrahmalokassa visuṃ gahitattā. Catuparisavasenāti khattiyādicatuparisavasena, itarā pana catasso parisā samārakādiggahaṇena gahitā evāti. Avasesasabbasattaloko nāgagaruḷādibhedo.
至此,先以部分的方式把握世间并显示了关联。现在,为以每一种别相、无余地把持世间并显示关联,便说“在此处也可”等。其中,“以最显著为界限”是指通过对最殊胜趣有的了知而确立。因为在五趣中,天趣有情最为殊胜;于天趣中,无色界有情更以烦恼和苦被远远弃舍、具备寂静微妙的不动定、寿命极长等特点,而最为显著。所说“大梵天有大神力”等,是依一万世界的大梵天来说的,因为前文已说“以最显著为界限”。所谓“无上”,是指最殊胜的九种出世间法。而“依修习次第”,是依于修习,也依他人内心的意愿,而排列出“含天神的”等词语的次第。显示巴利原文
Ettāvatā ca bhāgaso lokaṃ gahetvā yojanaṃ dassetvā idāni tena tena visesena abhāgaso lokaṃ gahetvā yojanaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘api cetthā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ukkaṭṭhaparicchedatoti ukkaṃsagativijānanena. Pañcasu hi gatīsu devagatipariyāpannāva seṭṭhā, tatthāpi arūpino dūrasamussāritakilesadukkhatāya, santapaṇītaāneñjavihārasamaṅgitāya, atidīghāyukatāyāti evamādīhi visesehi ativiya ukkaṭṭhā. ‘‘Brahmā mahānubhāvo’’tiādi dasasahassiyaṃ mahābrahmuno vasena vadati. ‘‘Ukkaṭṭhaparicchedato’’ti hi vuttaṃ. Anuttaranti seṭṭhaṃ nava lokuttaraṃ. Bhāvānukkamoti bhāvavasena paresaṃ ajjhāsayavasena ‘‘sadevaka’’ntiādīnaṃ padānaṃ anukkamo.
“以三种方式”:指与天、魔、梵结合的三种状态。“于三处”:即“含天的”等三句。“以种种方式”:即指以含天等种种状态。而“已遍尽三界”,则是古师所说。显示巴利原文
Tīhākārehīti devamārabrahmasahitatāsaṅkhātehi tīhi pakārehi. Tīsu padesūti ‘‘sadevaka’’ntiādīsu tīsu padesu. Tena tenākārenāti sadevakattādinā tena tena pakārena. Tedhātukameva pariyādinnanti porāṇā panāhūti yojanā.
“Abhiññā(证智)”一词省略了ya音,意为“已证知”,故注释说“以证智,即以增上智而证知”。这是为了排除推测、譬喻、义准等认知方式,因为那些并非现量;而佛陀世尊唯一的量便是现量——由于世尊的智慧在一切处都无碍运行,诸佛世尊于一切法皆为现量亲证。显示巴利原文
Abhiññāti ya-kāralopenāyaṃ niddeso, abhijānitvāti ayamettha atthoti āha ‘‘abhiññāya adhikena ñāṇena ñatvā’’ti. Anumānādipaṭikkhepoti anumānaupamānaatthāpattiādipaṭikkhepo ekappamāṇattā. Sabbattha appaṭihatañāṇacāratāya hi sabbapaccakkhā buddhā bhagavanto.
“无上离欲之乐”指果等至之乐。由于世尊说法时,有时也会住于等至而说法,因此经文舍去了“住定与混合”等表述,而采用了“亦”字。实际上,世尊说法时,当大众发出赞叹,或随念所闻法义时,他便以预备心划出那一刻,随后进入果等至;出定之后,即从站立处开始说法。对于根器利、略闻即悟者,他说得简略;对于需要广说方悟者,他则详细开演。法的善美在于无过,或者说无过即是善美,故经中说“唯说无过失法”。以说法者的自在力,通过教令等方式策励、觉醒,这便称为“说法”,应从教法(所传经教)的角度来理解,因此经文说“就说法而言,即使是四句偈……”等。序分和结分也因随顺大师的说法而被摄于教法中,故说“序分为初,此语为结”。显示巴利原文
Anuttaraṃvivekasukhanti phalasamāpattisukhaṃ, tena ṭhitimissāpi [vīthimissāpi (sārattha. ṭī. 1.verañjakaṇḍavaṇṇanāyaṃ) dhitimissāpi (ka)] kadāci bhagavato dhammadesanā hotīti hitvāpīti pi-saddaggahaṇaṃ. Bhagavā hi dhammaṃ desento yasmiṃ khaṇe parisā sādhukāraṃ vā deti, yathāsutaṃ vā dhammaṃ paccavekkhati, taṃ khaṇaṃ pubbabhāgena paricchinditvā phalasamāpattiṃ samāpajjati, yathāparicchedañca samāpattito vuṭṭhāya ṭhitaṭṭhānato paṭṭhāya dhammaṃ deseti. Ugghaṭitaññussa vasena appaṃ vā vipañcitaññussa, neyyassa vā vasena bahuṃ vā desento. Dhammassa kalyāṇatā niyyānikatāya, niyyānikatā ca sabbaso anavajjabhāvenevāti āha ‘‘anavajjameva katvā’’ti. Desakāyattena āṇādividhinā abhisajjanaṃ pabodhanaṃ desanāti sā pariyattidhammavasena veditabbāti āha ‘‘desanāya tāva catuppadikāyapi gāthāyā’’tiādi. Nidānanigamanānipi satthuno desanāya anuvidhānato tadantogadhāni evāti āha ‘‘nidānamādi, idaṃ evocāti pariyosāna’’nti.
依据应受教诫者各自的过失而予以教诫,随其品类予以调伏——这便称为「教诫」与「调伏」,也就是「教法」。应当从行道的法——即实修之法来理解,因此说“戒、定、观”等。「诸善法」即指那些无有过失的法,也就是戒,以及止与观;戒与见之所以为初,因为它们是「超人法」的根本。正如圣道远离两端而成为「中道」,正确的行道在发端与完成之间,也因处于中位而得名「中」,所以经中说:“诸比丘……有所謂之中”。依有余涅槃的方式,果被称为「终」;依无余涅槃的方式,涅槃被称为「终」。接着为以经典证成此二者皆是教法之究竟,故说“即以此义,此句”等。此处,由“有音节”等语可知,所说之法具足初中后义。依每一义而安立的音声相续,以偈颂与契经的方式确定下来,便名为「教法」。此处所说「说法」的核心义,特别是指戒等,因此说:“世尊说法……开示”。其中,“开示戒”是以戒一词含摄了具足众资具的戒;同样,以道一词含摄了具足相应资具的道。由这两者,便无余地囊括了教法的全部义理。此处所言“由此”,正是……显示巴利原文
Sāsitabbapuggalagatena yathāparādhādisāsitabbabhāvena anusāsanaṃ tadaṅgavinayādivasena vinayanaṃ sāsananti taṃ paṭipattidhammavasena veditabbanti āha ‘‘sīlasamādhivipassanā’’tiādi. Kusalānaṃ dhammānanti anavajjadhammānaṃ sīlassa, samathavipassanānañca sīladiṭṭhīnaṃ ādibhāvo taṃ mūlakattā uttarimanussadhammānaṃ. Ariyamaggassa antadvayavigamena majjhimapaṭipadābhāvo viya, sammāpaṭipattiyā ārabbhanipphattīnaṃ vemajjhattāpi majjhabhāvoti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Atthi bhikkhave…pe… majjhaṃ nāmā’’ti. Phalaṃ pariyosānaṃ nāma saupādisesatāvasena, nibbānaṃ pariyosānaṃ nāma anupādisesatāvasena. Idāni tesaṃ dvinnampi sāsanassa pariyosānataṃ āgamena dassetuṃ ‘‘etadatthamida’’ntiādi āha. Idha desanāya ādimajjhapariyosānaṃ adhippetaṃ ‘‘sabyañjana’’ntiādi vacanato. Tasmiṃ tasmiṃ atthe katāvadhisaddappabandho gāthāvasena, suttavasena ca vavatthito pariyattidhammo, yo idha ‘‘desanā’’ti vutto, tassa pana attho visesato sīlādi evāti āha ‘‘bhagavā hi dhammaṃ desento…pe… dassetī’’ti. Tattha sīlaṃ dassetvāti sīlaggahaṇena sasambhāraṃ sīlaṃ gahitaṃ, tathā maggaggahaṇena sasambhāro maggoti tadubhayavasena anavasesato pariyatti atthaṃ pariyādiyati. Tenāti sīlādidassanena. Atthavasena hi idha desanāya ādikalyāṇādibhāvo adhippeto. Kathikasaṇṭhitīti kathikassa saṇṭhānaṃ kathanavasena samavaṭṭhānaṃ.
若其所说法缺乏导向出离的意义,那么他的说法便不算是开示了有真舍利益的教法。所谓「以一种音节等系属」,是指在松缓等不同类别的音节中,只用单一音节模式或两种音节模式来组织语言,如同达罗毗荼语那样;又或因开口度大、发音时不触唇部,所有音都成了无唇辅音,如同吉罗陀语那样;又或因每个音都带有明显的气流释放,一切音都成了释放音,如同娑婆罗语(或谓yavana语)那样;又或因每个音都带有浓重鼻音,一切音都成了带鼻辅音,如同波斯等蛮族语那样。此类语言皆仅依音节之一部分而运作,音节并不圆满,故称为「无音节」。显示巴利原文
Na so sātthaṃ deseti niyyānatthavirahato tassā desanāya. Ekabyañjanādiyuttā vāti sithilādibhedesu byañjanesu ekappakāremeva, dvipakāremeva vā byañjanena yuttā vā damiḷabhāsā viya . Vivaṭakaraṇatāya oṭṭhe aphusāpetvā uccāretabbato sabbaniroṭṭhabyañjanā vā kirātabhāsā viya. Sabbasseva [sabbattheva (sārattha. ṭī. 1.verañjakaṇḍavaṇṇanāyaṃ 1)] vissajjanīyayuttatāya sabbavissaṭṭhabyañjanā vā savarabhāsā [yavanabhāsā (sārattha. ṭī. 1.verañjakaṇḍavaṇṇanāyaṃ)] viya. Sabbasseva [sabbattheva (sārattha. ṭī. 1.verañjakaṇḍavaṇṇanāyaṃ)] sānusāratāya sabbaniggahitabyañjanā vā pārasikādimilakkhubhāsā viya. Sabbāpesā byañjanekadesavasena pavattiyā aparipuṇṇabyañjanāti katvā ‘‘abyañjanā’’ti vuttā.
「轻音」是指将发音部位放松后所出的音节,例如五组辅音中的第一、第三等音;「重音」是指那些部位不放松而发出的音节,例如辅音组中的第二、第四等音。以两个摩旦刹那的时量所发之音为「长音」;以一个摩旦刹那的时量所发之音为「短音」,这也称为「轻便音」。轻便音后随复合辅音时,即成为与复合辅音相连的轻便音;而长音则是「重音」。将发音部位抑制后发出的音是「鼻化音」。与后一音素结合而发出的音为「连声」;反之,不连声的音则是确定的。「开释音」是将发音部位放开后所发的音。如此,依轻音等十种方式,从文词之智能方面,能全部分别那发起音声的心。一切音声皆由心所生起;依于所欲表达的意义,通过文词而了知其指称之义,故称为「文词」。显示巴利原文
Ṭhānakaraṇāni sithilāni katvā uccāretabbaṃ akkharaṃ pañcasu vaggesu paṭhamatatiyanti evamādi sithilaṃ. Tāni asithilāni katvā uccāretabbaṃ akkharaṃ vaggesu dutiyacatutthanti evamādi dhanitaṃ. Dvimattakālaṃ dīghaṃ. Ekamattakālaṃ rassaṃ tadeva lahukaṃ. Lahukameva saṃyogaparaṃ, dīghañca garukaṃ. Ṭhānakaraṇāni niggahetvā uccāretabbaṃ niggahitaṃ. Parena sambandhaṃ katvā uccāretabbaṃ sambandhaṃ. Tathā nasambandhaṃ vavatthitaṃ. Ṭhānakaraṇāni nissaṭṭhāni katvā uccāretabbaṃ vimuttaṃ. Dasadhāti evaṃ sithilādivasena byañjanabuddhiyā akkharuppādakacittassa sabbākārena pabhedo. Sabbāni hi akkharāni cittasamuṭṭhānāni yathādhippetatthaṃ byañjanato byañjanāni cāti.
“不涂抹”(amakkhetvā)是指不玷污、不毁坏或不减损的意思。世尊为了使人明了某一义理,或说一首偈颂,或说一句话,对于所要阐明的义理,他皆以言辞与文句圆满具足的说法来宣说,因此称“令文句完全圆满之后而说法”。在这里,“唯”(kevala)这个词表示没有剩余,并非表示不混杂等意,故说“是‘全体’的同义词”。“圆满”(paripuṇṇa)即完全充满,不因任何缺失或多余而改变,故说“是‘无减无增’的同义词”。其中,对于所要宣说的义理,因其能够成就该义理,应知有此“无减”的特性;相反,对于不能成就与它相违的义理,则有“无增”的特性。“全”(sakala)即具备所有部分。“圆满”即各方面都完全圆满,因此说“即使宣说一部分法,也无不圆满”。不清净的说法,是被渴爱所染污的。“无求世间利”(lokāmisanirakkho)是指对衣服等资生之具这些世间利益没有贪著的心。他以慈心遍施利乐——也就是以修习慈心为依处,调柔自心——安住于能将众生从一切杂染与轮回之苦中拔济出来的心性,也就是以悲愍的显示巴利原文
Amakkhetvāti amilecchetvā, avināsetvā, ahāpetvāti vā attho. Bhagavā yamatthaṃ ñāpetuṃ ekaṃ gāthaṃ, ekaṃ vākyaṃ vā deseti, tamatthaṃ tāya desanāya parimaṇḍalapadabyañjanāya eva desetīti āha ‘‘paripuṇṇabyañjanameva katvā dhammaṃ desetī’’ti. Idha kevalasaddo anavasesavācako, na avomissakādivācakoti āha ‘‘sakalādhivacana’’nti. Paripuṇṇanti sabbaso puṇṇaṃ, taṃ pana kenaci ūnaṃ, adhikaṃ vā na hotīti ‘‘anūnādhikavacana’’nti vuttaṃ. Tattha yadatthaṃ desito, tassa sādhakattā anūnatā veditabbā, tabbidhurassa pana asādhakattā anadhikatā. Sakalanti sabbabhāgavantaṃ. Paripuṇṇanti sabbaso paripuṇṇameva, tenāha ‘‘ekadesanāpi aparipuṇṇā natthī’’ti. Aparisuddhā desanā hoti taṇhāya saṃkiliṭṭhattā. Lokāmisaṃ cīvarādayo paccayā tattha agadhitacittatāya lokāmisanirapekkho. Hitapharaṇenāti hitūpasaṃhārena. Mettābhāvanāya karaṇabhūtāya muduhadayo. Ullumpanasabhāvasaṇṭhitenāti sakalasaṃkilesato, vaṭṭadukkhato ca uddharaṇākārāvaṭṭhitena cittena, kāruṇādhippāyenāti attho.
“行”(vata),即应受持,意为“从今以后我将这样做、我将这样奉行”。因由智者所安立、具有殊胜的意义,而称为“梵”(brahma)或“梵行”(brahmacariya),因此“梵行——布施”也是一种梵行。这是通过调伏悭吝、贪等而善加修习的。成就“神力”(iddhi),即具有天神那样的成就。“光耀”(juti)是指光明或威德。“由大力与精进的生起”,就是指如此具足大势力与勤精进。“福德”(puñña)指福果。“服务”(veyyāvacca)也是梵行,因为它是殊胜的行持。此理对于其余的也可以同样类推。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ito paṭṭhāya dassāmeva, evañca dassāmī’’ti samādātabbaṭṭhena vataṃ. Paṇḍitapaññattatāya seṭṭhaṭṭhena brahmaṃ brahmānaṃ vā cariyanti brahmacariyaṃ dānaṃ. Macchariyalobhādiniggaṇhanena suciṇṇassa. Iddhīti deviddhi. Jutīti pabhā, ānubhāvo vā. Balavīriyūpapattīti evaṃ mahatā balena ca vīriyena ca samannāgamo. Puññanti puññaphalaṃ. Veyyāvaccaṃ brahmacariyaṃ seṭṭhā cariyāti katvā. Esa nayo sesepi.
“因此”(tasmā),因为在这里,“梵行”一词所指的,是包含三学的一切教法。所以,将那些与“梵行”同位的所有词句连接起来显示其义时,他说:“故‘他宣说法……乃至……开示’——应如此理解此处的意义。”显示巴利原文
Tasmāti yasmā sikkhattayasaṅgahaṃ sakalaṃ sāsanaṃ idha ‘‘brahmacariya’’nti adhippetaṃ tasmā. ‘‘Brahmacariya’’nti iminā samānādhikaraṇāni sabbapadāni yojetvā atthaṃ dassento ‘‘so dhammaṃ deseti…pe… pakāsetīti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo’’ti āha.
191 「具有如前所述的成就」,即具足经文最初所说的‘初善’等功德。唯有将慢心远远抛开后,才能在佛陀的教法中正确修行,慢心重者则不能,因此经文说「因为已摧破慢心」。所谓「由于多」,是因为它们数量众多。基于财富、健康等事物的骄慢较易断除,因为引发骄慢的相并不稳定;然而基于出身、学识的骄慢则不然。因此,那些从刹帝利与婆罗门种姓出家的人,依凭出身和学识所生的骄慢便难以断除,是故论师说「通常……他们会生起慢心」。「由于低劣的出身」,指出身卑微。「他们不能安住」,是说他们不能极圆满、极清净地守护戒律。因为在佛陀的教法中,‘安住’首先依戒律而安立;或者进一步说,‘安住’指通过证悟真理而安立于出世间的安住,那才是真正意义上的‘于教法中安住’。而通常,那些具足亲近善知识等资粮的人,都是出身良善者,而非出身低劣者。显示巴利原文
191.Vuttappakārasampadanti yathāvuttaṃ ādikalyāṇatādiguṇasampadaṃ, dūrasamussāritamānasseva sāsane sammāpaṭipatti sambhavati, na mānajātikassāti āha ‘‘nihatamānattā’’ti. Ussannattāti bahulabhāvato. Bhogārogyādivatthukā madā suppaheyyā honti nimittassa anavatthānato, na tathā kulavijjāmadā, tasmā khattiyabrāhmaṇakulānaṃ pabbajitānampi jātivijjā nissāya mānajappanaṃ duppajahanti āha ‘‘yebhuyyena hi…pe… mānaṃ karontī’’ti. Vijātitāyāti nihīnajātitāya. Patiṭṭhātuṃ na sakkontīti suvisuddhaṃ katvā sīlaṃ rakkhituṃ na sakkonti. Sīlavasena hi sāsane patiṭṭhā, patiṭṭhātunti vā saccapaṭivedhena lokuttarāya patiṭṭhāya patiṭṭhātuṃ. Sā hi nippariyāyato sāsane patiṭṭhā nāma, yebhuyyena ca upanissayasampannā sujātā eva honti, na dujjātā.
「清净」:由于开显了贪等烦恼的彻底断除,全无随烦恼,故为全然清净。「获得净信」:依凡夫的信心而生信。因为有智慧的人,其信心乃是在获得法的成就之后方才确立,是以法为准、对法清净信的缘故。他们会这样想:‘彼世尊,确实是正自觉者,他的法被如此善巧地宣说’,由此而获得净信。「夫妻」:即家中的女主人与男主人。虽说‘夫妻’通常被理解为仅指两人,即家主与主妇;然而,如果一个人有多位妻子,即便只与其中一位同住,生活也是拥挤逼仄的。为了说明此理,才特别说了「二」。无论从‘有贪染’的意义,还是从‘有田产等牵挂’的意义来解释,又或者从‘贪欲尘垢等烦恼的进入途径’、‘生起的处所’等角度来解释,这两种解释的道理是相通的,只是文字表述有别。「不黏著」:即不沾染、不被系缚的状态。这样,指出了居家是烦恼生起之地,出家是不善法不生之地,从而开示居家犹如‘拥挤’、出家犹如‘露天旷野’的道理之后,现在进一步说明:居家唯独不是善法的生起之处,而出家才是善法的生起之处。显示巴利原文
Parisuddhanti rāgādīnaṃ accantameva pahānadīpanato nirupakkilesatāya sabbaso parisuddhaṃ. Saddhaṃ paṭilabhatīti pothujjanikasaddhāvasena saddahati. Viññūjātikānañhi dhammasampattiggahaṇapubbikā saddhā siddhi dhammappamāṇadhammappasannabhāvato. ‘‘Sammāsambuddho vata so bhagavā, yo evaṃ svākkhātadhammo’’ti saddhaṃ paṭilabhati. Jāyampatikāti gharaṇīpatikā. Kāmaṃ ‘‘jāyampatikā’’ti vutte gharasāmikagharasāminīvasena dvinnaṃyeva gahaṇaṃ viññāyati. Yassa pana purisassa anekā pajāpatiyo, tattha kiṃ vattabbaṃ, ekāyāpi saṃvāso sambādhoti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘dve’’ti vuttaṃ. Rāgādinā sakiñcanaṭṭhena, khettavatthu ādinā sapalibodhaṭṭhena rāgarajādīnaṃ āgamanapathatāpi uṭṭhānaṭṭhānatā evāti dvepi vaṇṇanā ekatthā, byañjanameva nānaṃ. Alagganaṭṭhenāti assajjanaṭṭhena appaṭibaddhabhāvena. Evaṃ akusalakusalappavattīnaṃ ṭhānabhāvena gharāvāsapabbajjānaṃ sambādhabbhokāsataṃ dassetvā idāni kusalappavattiyā eva aṭṭhānaṭṭhānabhāvena tesaṃ taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘apicā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
「略释」:不逐一分别词句,而是总括其义。‘哪怕只有一天’:即哪怕仅仅一天。‘保持无缺’:乃至对极微小的罪过也不违犯,使戒行无有残缺。‘不为烦恼垢所染’:不被渴爱等烦恼所染污。由于‘极为清净’之义,即无垢性,犹如一只被洗净、雕刻过的贝壳那般洁白光亮,故形容为‘如同被洗净的贝壳一般’。‘居于’一词的用法,表明‘在家’于此是以处所义用作宾格,故解释为‘在家庭之中’。因为被黄褐色染料浸染过的衣服,称为‘黄褐衣’,所以说‘因为被黄褐色的染料浸染’。‘着’:指下身穿好下裳,并披覆上衣。‘家宅居住’一词,省略了后半部分的‘居住’,便称为‘家’;它能为家庭带来增益,即对家庭有利益。显示巴利原文
Saṅkhepakathāti visuṃ visuṃ paduddhāraṃ akatvā samāsato atthavaṇṇanā. Ekampi divasanti ekadivasamattampi. Akhaṇḍaṃ katvāti dukkaṭamattassapi anāpajjanena akhaṇḍitaṃ katvā. Kilesamalena amalīnanti taṇhāsaṃkilesādinā asaṃkiliṭṭhaṃ katvā. Pariyodātaṭṭhena nimmalabhāvena saṅkhaṃ viya likhitaṃ dhotanti saṅkhalikhitanti āha ‘‘dhotasaṅkhasappaṭibhāga’’nti. ‘‘Ajjhāvasatā’’ti padappayogena ‘‘agāra’’nti bhummatthe upayogavacananti āha ‘‘agāramajjhe’’ti. Kasāyena rattāni vatthāni kāsāyānīti āha ‘‘kasāyarasapītatāyā’’ti. Paridahitvāti nivāsetvā ceva pārupitvā ca. Agāravāso agāraṃ uttarapadalopena, tassa vaḍḍhiāvahaṃ agārassa hitaṃ.
192 “财富的蕴积”,即财富的集合。以系缚的意义来说,即通过“这是我的儿子、孙子”等爱著而生的、有分限的束缚之义。所谓“亲戚”,就是那些被认定为“这些人是我们的”的人们。以祖父、父亲、儿子等次第轮转的意义,称为“流转”。显示巴利原文
192.Bhogakkhandhoti bhogasamudāyo. Ābandhanaṭṭhenāti ‘‘putto nattā’’tiādinā pemavasena saparicchedaṃ bandhanaṭṭhena. ‘‘Amhākamete’’ti ñāyantīti ñātī. Pitāmahapituputtādivasena parivattanaṭṭhena parivaṭṭo.
193 “以巴帝摩卡律仪防护”,即由巴帝摩卡律仪防护而关闭了身、语之门;由于如此之人即名为具备该律仪,故说“具备巴帝摩卡律仪防护”。“行处与行境具足”等,正是为了显示成就巴帝摩卡律仪防护的资粮。关于“于微细罪”,是指对于无心中违犯的极其微细的过失,以及突然生起的不善心念。“能见其怖畏”,即具有见其怖畏的习惯。“善为受持”,即恭敬地、尽形寿不违犯地受持。“一一学处”,即一一戒条。此处的“这里”,指在“以巴帝摩卡律仪防护”等经文之中。以上是“略说”的解释,即简要的注释。详细的解释在《清净道论》中已经阐明,故应依止该论及其注释中所说的方式来理解。显示巴利原文
193.Pātimokkhasaṃvarasaṃvutoti pātimokkhasaṃvarena pihitakāyavacīdvāro, tathābhūto ca yasmā tena saṃvarena upeto nāma hoti , tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘pātimokkhasaṃvarena samannāgato’’ti. ‘‘Ācāragocarasampanno’’tiādi tasseva pātimokkhasaṃvarasamannāgamassa paccayadassanaṃ. Appamattakesūti asañcicca āpannaanukhuddakesu ceva sahasā uppannaakusalacittuppādesu ca. Bhayadassāvīti bhayadassanasīlo. Sammā ādiyitvāti sakkaccaṃ yāvajīvaṃ avītikkamavasena ādiyitvā. Taṃ taṃ sikkhāpadanti taṃ taṃ sikkhākoṭṭhāsaṃ. Etthāti etasmiṃ ‘‘pātimokkhasaṃvarasaṃvuto’’ti pāṭhe. Saṅkhepoti saṅkhepavaṇṇanā. Vitthāro visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.14) vutto, tasmā so tattha, taṃsaṃvaṇṇanāya (visuddhi. ṭī. 1.14) ca vuttanayena veditabbo.
仅仅通过“行处与行境具足”这句话,便已包含了善的身业和语业,因此说“即使在包含了善的身业、语业时”。额外的话语是为了显示其他的含义。为了显示活命遍净戒生起的途径……故说“善”,其意为完全断除邪命、无有过失。因为《木匠经》的开示中,在先行显示了作为戒的善身业、善语业之后,接着说“木匠!我也宣说活命遍净属于戒”,依此而展开教导——“具足善的身业、语业,拥有清净的活命”——这一教导与《木匠经》中统一两者的说法完全契合一致。为了显示这一点,论师说:“或者,是根据《木匠经》而这样说。”他又说“在戒中”,那意思是“我称之为戒”,或者说“我认为它包含、归属于戒中”的含义。“摄尽”,即总括、包含的意思。显示巴利原文
Ācāragocaraggahaṇenevāti ‘‘ācāragocarasampanno’’ti vacaneneva. Tenāha ‘‘kusale kāyakammavacīkamme gahitepī’’ti. Adhikavacanaṃ aññamatthaṃ bodhetīti katvā tassa ājīvapārisuddhisīlassa uppattidvāradassanatthaṃ…pe… kusalenāti vuttaṃ, sabbaso anesanappahānena anavajjenāti attho. Yasmā ‘‘katame ca thapati kusalā sīlā kusalaṃ kāyakammaṃ kusalaṃ vacīkamma’’nti (ma. ni. 2.265) sīlassa kusalakāyavacībhāvaṃ dassetvā ‘‘ājīvaparisuddhampi kho ahaṃ thapati sīlasmiṃ vadāmī’’ti (ma. ni. 2.265) evaṃ pavattāya muṇḍikasuttadesanāya ‘‘kāyakammavacīkammena samannāgato kusalena, parisuddhājīvo’’ti ayaṃ desanā ekasaṅgahā aññadatthu saṃsandati sametīti dassento āha ‘‘muṇḍikasuttavasena vā evaṃ vutta’’nti. Sīlasmiṃ vadāmīti ‘‘sīla’’nti vadāmi, ‘‘sīlasmiṃ antogadhaṃ pariyāpanna’’nti vadāmīti vā attho. Pariyādānatthanti pariggahatthaṃ.
以三种戒,即小戒、中戒、大戒。于六根中,意所摄,非前五根。以随所得、随力、随方宜三种方式而住知足。显示巴利原文
Tividhena sīlenāti cūḷasīlaṃ majjhimasīlaṃ mahāsīlanti evaṃ tividhena sīlena. Manacchaṭṭhesu indriyesu, na kāyapañcamesu. Yathālābhayathābalayathāsāruppappakāravasena tividhena santosena.
小戒、中戒、大戒的解释显示巴利原文
Cūḷamajjhimamahāsīlavaṇṇanā
194-211 此处“sīlasmiṃ”(在戒中)是简别处的位格,故说“意思是即有一种戒”。而这正是其主格的意义。如于《梵网经》注释中所说。显示巴利原文
194-211. ‘‘Sīlasmi’’nti idaṃ niddhāraṇe bhummanti āha ‘‘ekaṃ sīlaṃ hotīti attho’’ti. Ayameva atthoti paccattavacanattho eva. Brahmajāleti brahmajālavaṇṇanāyaṃ (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.7).
212 自谴、他谴、惩罚、怖畏等都是以无律仪为根本的。所谓「戒的无律仪」,即戒的不防护,意为没有戒律仪。「会生起」意思是会产生。「如法施设者」即以如法成就者。因为以无追悔等为相,由心生乐等殊胜色法所触之身,而有广大身乐生起,故说「感受无追悔……等」。显示巴利原文
212. Attānuvādaparānuvādadaṇḍabhayādīni asaṃvaramūlakāni. Sīlassāsaṃvaratoti sīlassa asaṃvaraṇato, sīlasaṃvarābhāvatoti attho. Bhaveyyāti uppajjeyya. Yathāvidhānavihitenāti yathāvidhānasampāditena. Avippaṭisārādinimittaṃ uppannacetasikasukhasamuṭṭhānehi paṇītarūpehi phuṭṭhasarīrassa uḷāraṃ kāyikaṃ sukhaṃ bhavatīti āha ‘‘avippaṭisāra…pe… paṭisaṃvedetī’’ti.
根律仪论的解释显示巴利原文
Indriyasaṃvarakathāvaṇṇanā
213 区别在于对业处的考量,通用的词并没有舍弃其本义,因此说“眼这个词有时用在佛眼上”。因为特殊词语是通过排除其他特殊意义,来显明现存对象的特殊意义,而非指涉不存在的事物。其他词句也是同样的道理。不共于他人、唯佛陀所独具的眼的观察,称为佛眼,即意乐随眠智和根上下智。由周遍、完全地观察的意义,称为一切眼,即一切知智。三道智慧指的是下三种圣道的智慧。在这里,是指“以眼见色”这句经文中之“眼”。此“眼”一词……依于所依而称呼,如同对所依者的称呼,例如“床铺们喧哗”那样。无混杂:指没有夹杂烦恼之苦。因此说“清净的”。当根律仪极为清净时,通过去除作为精勤基础的恶法,增上心的努力便已掌握在手,所以说“感受增上心乐”。显示巴利原文
213. Viseso kammatthāpekkhatāya sāmaññassa na tehi paricattoti āha ‘‘cakkhu-saddo katthaci buddhacakkhumhi vattatī’’ti. Vijjamānameva hi abhidheyye visesatthaṃ visesantaranivattanavasena visesasaddo vibhāveti, na avijjamānaṃ. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo. Aññehi asādhāraṇaṃ buddhānaṃyeva cakkhudassananti buddhacakkhu, āsayānusayañāṇaṃ, indriyaparopariyattañāṇañca. Samantato sabbaso dassanaṭṭhena samantacakkhu, sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ. Ariyamaggattayapaññāti heṭṭhime ariyamaggattaye paññā. Idhāti ‘‘cakkhunā rūpa’’nti imasmiṃ pāṭhe. Ayaṃ cakkhu-saddo pasāda…pe… vattati nissayavohāre nissitassa vattabbato yathā. ‘‘Mañcā ukkuṭṭhiṃ karontī’’ti. Asammissanti kilesadukkhena avomissaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘parisuddha’’nti . Sati hi suvisuddhe indriyasaṃvare, padhānabhūtapāpadhammavigamena adhicittānuyogo hatthagato evaṃ hotīti āha ‘‘adhicittasukhaṃ paṭisaṃvedetī’’ti.
念正知论的解释显示巴利原文
Satisampajaññakathāvaṇṇanā
214 正知者:周遍地或特别地以差别而了知,故称正知者;正知者的状态即是正知,也就是那样现起的智慧。对它进行分别名为正知分别,在这里就是关于这正知分别。前进称为趣向,所以说“向前是指行”。同样,后退称为返回,所以说“向后是指折返”。而折返仅指折回,折返后再前进仍是行。向前移动者,是指依行进方式将身体向前移动。为了显示在站立、坐下、躺卧中,身体向前的移动是“向前”,向后收回是“向后”,所以说“即使在站立中……”等。于座位,即凳等坐处。面向前分,即面向座位等的前部。“流转”就是移动。“相反流转”即反向移动。“同理”是用来说明躺卧者面向前移动和反向移动。显示巴利原文
214. Samantato, pakaṭṭhaṃ vā savisesaṃ jānātīti sampajāno, sampajānassa bhāvo sampajaññaṃ, tathāpavattañāṇaṃ. Tassa vibhajanaṃ sampajaññabhājanīyaṃ, tasmiṃ sampajaññabhājanīyamhi. Abhikkamanaṃ abhikkantanti āha ‘‘abhikkantaṃ vuccati gamana’’nti. Tathā paṭikkamanaṃ paṭikkantanti āha ‘‘paṭikkantaṃ nivattana’’nti. Nivattananti ca nivattimattaṃ. Nivattitvā pana gamanaṃ gamanameva. Abhiharantoti gamanavasena kāyaṃ upanento. Ṭhānanisajjāsayanesu yo gamanavidhuro kāyassa purato abhihāro, so abhikkamo, pacchato apaharaṇaṃ paṭikkamoti dassento ‘‘ṭhānepī’’tiādimāha. Āsanassāti pīṭhakādiāsanassa. Purimaaṅgābhimukhoti aṭanikādipurimāvayavābhimukho. Saṃsarantoti saṃsappanto. Paccāsaṃsarantoti paṭiāsappanto. ‘‘Eseva nayo’’ti iminā nipannasseva abhimukhasaṃsappanapaṭiāsappanāni nidasseti.
正确地了知即是“正知”,以此对自身应作之事的践行习惯,称为“正知而行者”,所以说“以正知作一切事”。“正知”一词与“正知”同义,前文已述。正知而作,就是在前进等当中生起不迷乱。或者,具有正知之行,故为“正知而行者”。以法增长之义而行,称为“有义”,即前进等。对有义的了解与了知,即是“有义正知”。对适合自己利益的了解与了知,即是“适宜正知”。在前进等活动中,于乞食行境内,以及于其他活动中都不舍弃业处所缘的正知,称为“行境正知”。在前进等活动中不迷乱的正知,称为“不迷乱正知”。摄持者,即衡量、抉择、审察的意思。见到僧伽,就包括了为布萨、自恣等目的而前往。为见不净等,“等”字应包括遍业处预备等。为了解释略说的意义,而说“即使见到塔庙或菩提树……”等。证得阿拉汉果,这是最高程度的说明,因为止与观的生起对比丘而言也是增长。一些人指无畏山住者。显示巴利原文
Sammā pajānanaṃ sampajānaṃ, tena attanā kātabbakiccassa karaṇasīlo sampajānakārīti āha ‘‘sampajaññena sabbakiccakārī’’ti. Sampajānasaddassa sampajaññapariyāyatā pubbe vuttā eva. Sampajaññaṃ karotevāti abhikkantādīsu asammohaṃ uppādeti eva. Sampajaññassa vā kāro etassa atthīti sampajānakārī. Dhammato vaḍḍhisaṅkhātena saha atthena vattatīti sātthakaṃ, abhikkantādi. Sātthakassa sampajānanaṃ sātthakasampajaññaṃ. Sappāyassa attano hitassa sampajānanaṃ sappāyasampajaññaṃ. Abhikkamādīsu bhikkhācāragocare, aññatthāpi ca pavattesu avijahite kammaṭṭhānasaṅkhāte gocare sampajaññaṃ gocarasampajaññaṃ. Abhikkamādīsu asammuyhanameva sampajaññaṃ asammohasampajaññaṃ. Pariggahetvāti tūletvā tīretvā paṭisaṅkhāyāti, attho. Saṅghadassaneneva uposathapavāraṇādiatthaṃ gamanaṃ saṅgahitaṃ. Asubhadassanādīti ādi-saddena kasiṇaparikammādīnaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo . Saṅkhepato vuttamatthaṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘cetiyaṃ vā bodhiṃ vā disvāpi hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Arahattaṃ pāpuṇātīti ukkaṭṭhaniddeso eso. Samathavipassanuppādanampi hi bhikkhuno vaḍḍhiyeva. Kecīti abhayagirivāsino.
然而,在通过「有义正知」所摄持的义理中,「义」是指以法增长,也就是「有义」之意。但或许有人会怀疑,这是否就是指「适宜」呢?为了排除这样的疑惑,所以才开始阐述「见塔庙等」的情形。如同彩绘的雕像一般,意指如同以彩绘作成的种种像,或是通过机械装置而成的精巧工艺像。不如理地观照,便是基于世俗的无记舍,不正确地执取所缘。关于此,世尊说:「以眼见色后,愚痴凡夫的舍心生起……」等(中部3.308)。由于象等拥挤而有生命危险;因见不适宜的颜色等而有梵行的障碍。显示巴利原文
Tasmiṃ panāti sātthakasampajaññavasena pariggahitaatthe. ‘‘Atthoti dhammato vaḍḍhī’’ti yaṃ sātthakanti adhippetaṃ, taṃ sappāyaṃ evāti siyā kassaci āsaṅkāti tannivattanatthaṃ ‘‘cetiyadassanaṃ tāvā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Cittakammarūpakāni viyāti cittakammakatā paṭimāyo viya, yantapayogena vā vicittakammā paṭimāyo viya. Asamapekkhanaṃ gehassita aññāṇupekkhāvasena ārammaṇassa ayoniso gahaṇaṃ. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. ‘‘Cakkhunā rūpaṃ disvā uppajjati upekkhā bālassa mūḷhassa puthujjanassā’’tiādi (ma. ni. 3.308). Hatthiādisammaddena jīvitantarāyo. Visabhāgarūpadassanādinā brahmacariyantarāyo.
从出家之日起,比丘们便习惯于讲述随顺的教导;不随顺的教导对他来说,犹如另一种从未讲过的事,因此他说:「两种说法,其实从来不曾说过。」这里所说的「如是」,是回顾前面「但是,如果……」等全部所述的情形,并非指正在讲说的「男子对女色的不净观」等内容。显示巴利原文
Pabbajitadivasatopaṭṭhāya bhikkhūnaṃ anuvattanakathā āciṇṇā, ananuvattanakathā pana tassā dutiyā nāma hotīti āha ‘‘dve kathā nāma na kathitapubbā’’ti. Evanti ‘‘sace panā’’tiādikaṃ sabbampi vuttākāraṃ paccāmasati, na ‘‘purisassa mātugāmāsubha’’ntiādikaṃ vuccamānaṃ.
由于是精勤修行业的现起之处,禅修的所缘便被称为「业处」,因此说:「名为业处的行境」。「受持」是指为了成就受持的善巧,而依令取相生起的方式,予以受持。显示巴利原文
Yogakammassa pavattiṭṭhānatāya bhāvanāya ārammaṇaṃ ‘‘kammaṭṭhāna’’nti vuccatīti āha ‘‘kammaṭṭhānasaṅkhātaṃ gocara’’nti. Uggahetvāti yathā uggahanimittaṃ uppajjati, evaṃ uggahakosallassa sampādanavasena uggahetvā .
“持去”的意思是令业处持续运作,即精勤修习,直至托钵返回之时。“不持回”是指从受用食物开始,直到前往日间住处为止,不再将业处带回。“身体作务”指洗脸等照料身体的清洁工作。“两三次结跏趺座”是指在坐禅期间,进行两到三次的暖座。因此他说“让身体产生暖气”。“即依业处之首”的意思是,始终以业处为核心而不离弃,由此显示后文“钵虽无心”等如何与业处结合,或说明对业处的守护从未暂舍。“即是”指三次。因为受用塔庙比舍利塔庙更尊贵,所以先说“礼敬塔庙”这一动作。正如注疏中所说:“若树枝妨碍塔庙,应除去树枝。”由于随念佛陀的功德,才会在菩提树下礼拜,因此他说“如同在佛陀世尊面前,毫无隐藏地展现恭敬之礼”。“在村边”是指在村落的近处。“为了摄受众人”是指怀着“若我不说法,谁能为这些众生说法”的悲悯,通过法义的提携来摄受大众。“因此”是说,基于注疏师们所言“佛法的讲说理应进行”,且任何佛法的讲说皆不离业处,所以。显示巴利原文
Haratīti kammaṭṭhānaṃ pavatteti, yāva piṇḍapātapaṭikkamā anuyuñjatīti attho. Na paccāharatīti āhārūpayogato yāva divāṭhānupasaṅkamanā kammaṭṭhānaṃ na paṭineti. Sarīraparikammanti mukhadhovanādisarīrapaṭijagganaṃ. Dve tayo pallaṅketi dve tayo nisajjāvāre dve tīṇi uṇhāsanāni. Tenāha ‘‘usumaṃ gāhāpento’’ti. Kammaṭṭhānasīsenevāti kammaṭṭhānamukheneva kammaṭṭhānaṃ avijahanto eva, tena ‘‘pattopi acetano’’tiādinā (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.214) vakkhamānaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ, yathāparihariyamānaṃ vā avijahitvāti dasseti. Tathevāti tikkhattumeva. Paribhogacetiyato sārīrikacetiyaṃ garutaranti katvā ‘‘cetiyaṃ vanditvā’’ti pubbakālakiriyāya vasena vuttaṃ. Tathā hi aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘cetiyaṃ bādhayamānā bodhisākhā haritabbā’’ti vuttā. Buddhaguṇānussaraṇavaseneva bodhiyaṃ paṇipātakaraṇanti āha ‘‘buddhassa bhagavato sammukhā viya nipaccakāraṃ dassetvā’’ti. Gāmasamīpeti gāmassa upacāraṭṭhāne. Janasaṅgahatthanti ‘‘mayi akathente etesaṃ ko kathessatī’’ti dhammānuggahena janasaṅgahatthaṃ. Tasmāti yasmā ‘‘dhammakathā nāma kathetabbā evā’’ti aṭṭhakathācariyā vadanti, yasmā ca dhammakathā kammaṭṭhānavinimuttā nāma natthi, tasmā. Kammaṭṭhānasīsenevāti attanā parihariyamānaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ avijahanto tadanuguṇaṃyeva dhammakathaṃ kathetvā. Anumodanaṃ vatvāti etthāpi ‘‘kammaṭṭhānasīsenevā’’ti ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ.
“仅以现前遇合为限”,即不区分“熟知或不熟知”等,仅以实际相遇为度,也就是只就相遇这件事而言。“怖畏”是指对敌方战车等危险的恐惧。显示巴利原文
Sampattaparicchedenevāti ‘‘paricito aparicito’’tiādi vibhāgaṃ akatvā sampattakoṭiyā eva, samāgamamattenevāti attho. Bhayeti paracakkādibhaye.
所谓“业生火”,是就消化之火而言。因为饥饿疲乏导致身体困倦,无法入定,所以说业处不入修习之道。“其余处”是指粥未被取用的地方。“接续相接”是显示业处现前无有间断,如同箭一支接一支射出那样没有间隙,此处也是如此。显示巴利原文
‘‘Kammajatejo’’ti gahaṇiṃ sandhāyāha. Kammaṭṭhānaṃ vīthiṃ nārohati khudāparissamena kilantakāyattā samādhānābhāvato. Avasesaṭṭhāneti yāguyā aggahitaṭṭhāne. Poṅkhānupoṅkhanti kammaṭṭhānupaṭṭhānassa avicchedadassanametaṃ, yathā poṅkhānupoṅkhaṃ pavattāya sarapaṭipātiyā anavicchedo, evametassapīti.
他完全舍弃了精勤修习禅定的责任。由于未能圆满地履行义务,他便毁犯了一切义务。他的心被五种心荒芜与结缚所系缚,如经中所说:“于诸欲尚未离贪,于身尚未离贪,于色尚未离贪,饱食足餐以致腹胀身满后,便沉溺于卧乐、侧卧乐、睡眠乐而住,为求生某一天众而修梵行。”所谓“行已”,即指如此活动之后。显示巴利原文
Nikkhittadhuro bhāvanānuyoge. Vattapaṭipattiyā apūraṇena sabbavattāni bhinditvā. ‘‘Kāmesu avītarāgo hoti, kāye avītarāgo, rūpe avītarāgo, yāvadatthaṃ udarāvadehakaṃ bhuñjitvā seyyasukhaṃ passasukhaṃ middhasukhaṃ anuyutto viharati, aññataraṃ devanikāyaṃ paṇidhāya brahmacariyaṃ caratī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.320; ma. ni. 1.186) evaṃ vuttapañcavidhacetokhilavinibandhacitto. Caritvāti pavattitvā.
“依凭具有往还的义务”:即伴随修行的托钵往还——出外与返回——这本身就是往还的义务,依凭于此。“自爱者”指希求自身利益与安乐者,也就是具有法欲的人。因为法即是利益,而法的因即是安乐。又或因为在智者看来二者无别,且法属于自身所摄,故法被称作“我”;爱乐此法者,便名为“自爱者”。显示巴利原文
Gatapaccāgatikavattavasenāti bhāvanāsahitaṃyeva bhikkhāya gatapaccāgataṃ gamanapaccāgamanaṃ etassa atthīti gatapaccāgatikaṃ, tadeva vattaṃ, tassa vasena. Attakāmāti attano hitasukhaṃ icchantā, dhammacchandavantoti attho. Dhammo hi hitaṃ tannimittakañca sukhanti. Atha vā viññūnaṃ nibbisesattā, attabhāvapariyāpannattā ca attā nāma dhammo, taṃ kāmenti icchantīti attakāmā.
“一雄牛”指二十竿的长度。“凭借彼想”,即依于那块岩石之想,意指他们知道“已来到这个地方”。那位即是规则:如前文于站立时所提到的“这位比丘”等道理,于安坐时也同样适用。即使出于担心后来者的食物会中断,他也会增长如理作意。“踏压者”指在打谷场上踏压稻穗的人。显示巴利原文
Usabhaṃ nāma vīsati yaṭṭhiyo. Tāya saññāyāti tāya pāsāṇasaññāya, ettakaṃ ṭhānaṃ āgatāti jānantāti adhippāyo. Soyeva nayoti ‘‘ayaṃ bhikkhū’’tiādiko yo ṭhāne vutto, so eva nisajjāyapi nayo. Pacchato āgacchantānaṃ chinnabhattabhāvabhayenapi yonisomanasikāraṃ paribrūheti. Maddantāti dhaññakaraṇaṭṭhāne sālisīsāni maddantā.
“我将供养大精进”:意为,世尊为利益我们而修六年苦行,我当尽己所能以此供养。因为以修行为供养,才是真正的供佛,而非以物质供养。“唯站立与经行”:这是就应当决意的威仪而说,并非否定用斋等时必要的坐姿。显示巴利原文
Mahāpadhānaṃ pūjessāmīti amhākaṃ atthāya lokanāthena chavassāni kataṃ dukkaracariyamevāhaṃ yathāsatti pūjessāmīti. Paṭipattipūjā hi satthupūjā, na āmisapūjāti. ‘‘Ṭhānacaṅkamamevā’’ti adhiṭṭhātabbairiyāpathavasena vuttaṃ, na bhojanādikālesu avassaṃ kattabbanisajjāya paṭikkhepavasena.
“观察街道后”:意为,走上街道后不应东张西望,首先应当辨清街道,故而如此说。“在那里……”等语,是为了说明所谓“以端庄威仪前行”之义。“于食物作不净想”等当说之内容,后文将述。“具足八支”:即依“唯为维持此身”等经中所说的八项条件而具足。“不为嬉戏”等,则是在说明应被禁止的心态。显示巴利原文
Vīthiṃ otaritvā ito cito ca anoloketvā paṭhamameva vīthiyo sallakkhetabbāti āha ‘‘vīthiyo sallakkhetvā’’ti. Yaṃ sandhāya vuccati ‘‘pāsādikena abhikkantenā’’ti, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha cā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Āhāre paṭikkūlasaññaṃ upaṭṭhapetvā’’tiādīsu yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ parato āgamissati. Aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgatanti ‘‘yāvadeva imassa kāyassa ṭhitiyā’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.23; a. ni. 6.58; mahāni. 206) vuttehi aṭṭhahi aṅgehi samannāgataṃ katvā. ‘‘Neva davāyā’’tiādi paṭikkhepadassanaṃ.
“若具足亲近依止资粮,他便证悟辟支菩提”——此句有此关联。此处及后文各处,亦同此理。其中,辟支菩提所需亲近依止资粮的圆满,为两阿僧祇劫与十万大劫,加上与此相应的福德与智慧资粮。声闻菩提之中,上首弟子需一阿僧祇劫与十万大劫;大弟子需十万大劫及相应福德智慧资粮;其余普通弟子,则指于过去生依止趋向解脱之修行而生起的抉择分善根。他被称为“跋希耶·达鲁吉利耶”,因于跋希耶之地生长,故名“跋希耶”;又因身着树皮衣,故名“达鲁吉利耶”。这位尊者,即由世尊如是开示:“跋希耶,汝当如是学:于所见唯为所见,于所闻唯为所闻,于所觉唯为所觉,于所识唯为所识……此即苦之尽头。”仅以此简短开示,便证得阿拉汉果。如是,诸如表明舍利弗尊者等大智慧特性的经文语句,当从广解中详细了知。显示巴利原文
Paccekabodhiṃ sacchikaroti, yadi upanissayasampanno hotīti sambandho. Evaṃ sabbattha ito paresupi. Tattha paccekabodhiyā upanissayasampadā kappānaṃ dve asaṅkhyeyyāni, satasahassañca tajjāpuññañāṇasambharaṇaṃ. Sāvakabodhiyā aggasāvakānaṃ asaṅkhyeyyaṃ, kappasatasahassañca, mahāsāvakānaṃ (theragā. aṭṭha. 2.1288) satasahassameva tajjāpuññañāṇasambharaṇaṃ. Itaresaṃ atītāsu jātīsu vivaṭṭasannissayavasena nibbattitaṃ nibbedhabhāgiyaṃ kusalaṃ. Bāhiyo dārucīriyoti bāhiyavisaye sañjātasaṃvaḍḍhatāya bāhiyo, dārucīrapariharaṇena dārucīriyoti ca samaññāto. So hi āyasmā ‘‘tasmātiha te, bāhiya, evaṃ sikkhitabbaṃ ‘diṭṭhe diṭṭhamattaṃ bhavissati, sute, mute, viññāte viññātamattaṃ bhavissatī’ti, evañhi te bāhiya sikkhitabbaṃ. Yato kho te bāhiya diṭṭhe diṭṭhamattaṃ bhavissati, sute, mute, viññāte viññātamattaṃ bhavissati, tato tvaṃ, bāhiya, na tena. Yato tvaṃ, bāhiya, na tena, tato tvaṃ, bāhiya, na tattha. Yato tvaṃ, bāhiya, na tattha, tato tvaṃ, bāhiya, nevidha na huraṃ na ubhayamantarena. Esevanto dukkhassā’’ti (udā. 10) ettakāya desanāya arahattaṃ sacchākāsi. Evaṃ sāriputtattherādīnaṃ mahāpaññatādidīpanāni suttapadāni vitthārato veditabbāni.
“这便是如实不迷惑的方式”,应依当下所释之方式来了知。通过“自我在前进”一语,显示了盲目的凡夫由于执取“我见”,于前进之际产生迷惑;而通过“我在前进”一语,则显示了由于执取“我慢”而产生的迷惑。然而,这两种执取皆不离渴爱,因而也一并显示了由执取渴爱所起的迷惑。在宣说“如此,不迷惑之人”之后,为揭示破除“密集”假象所见的不迷惑的真实状态,方才举出“我前进”等事例加以解说。其中,火界随顺风界,是抬脚动作的助缘,火界的特相为向上燃烧;而抬脚时风界又随顺火界,故此动作中火、风二界的作用力尤为强盛,其余地、水二界则较弱,因此说“于每一抬脚过程……是为强而有力”。同样,风界随顺火界,是向前跨步与横向挪移的助缘,风界的特相为横向移动;于向前跨步及横向挪移时,风界的作用力尤为强盛,火界则随顺风界,故此二动作中火、风二界的作用力亦特别强盛,其余二界作用较弱,因此说“同样,于向前跨步与横向挪移时……”。显示巴利原文
Tanti asammuyhanaṃ evanti idāni vuccamānamākāreneva veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Attā abhikkamatī’’ti iminā andhaputhujjanassa diṭṭhigāhavasena abhikkame sammuyhanaṃ dasseti, ‘‘ahaṃ abhikkamāmī’’ti pana iminā mānagāhavasena. Tadubhayaṃ pana taṇhāya vinā na hotīti taṇhagāhavasenapi sammuyhanaṃ dassitameva hoti. ‘‘Tathā asammuyhanto’’ti vatvā taṃ asammuyhanaṃ yena ghanavinibbhogena hoti, taṃ dassento ‘‘abhikkamāmī’’tiādimāha. Tattha yasmā vāyodhātuyā anugatā tejodhātu uddharaṇassa paccayo. Uddharaṇagatikā hi tejodhātūti. Uddharaṇe vāyodhātuyā tassā anugatabhāvo, tasmā imāsaṃ dvinnamettha sāmatthiyato adhimattatā, itarāsañca omattatāti dassento ‘‘ekekapāduddharaṇe…pe… balavatiyoti āha. Yasmā pana tejodhātuyā anugatā vāyodhātu atiharaṇavītiharaṇānaṃ paccayo. Tiriyagatikāya hi vāyodhātuyā atiharaṇavītiharaṇesu sātisayo byāpāroti. Tejodhātuyā tassā anugatabhāvo, tasmā imāsaṃ dvinnamettha sāmatthiyato adhimattatā, itarāsañca omattatāti dassento ‘‘tathā atiharaṇavītiharaṇesū’’ti āha. Satipi anugamakaanugantabbatāvisese tejodhātuvāyodhātubhāvamattaṃ sandhāya tathā-saddaggahaṇaṃ,. Tattha akkantaṭṭhānato pādassa ukkhipanaṃ uddharaṇaṃ. Ṭhitaṭṭhānaṃ atikkamitvā purato haraṇaṃ atiharaṇaṃ, khāṇuādipariharaṇatthaṃ, patiṭṭhitapādaghaṭṭanapariharaṇatthaṃ vā passena haraṇaṃ vītiharaṇaṃ. Yāva patiṭṭhitapādo, tāva āharaṇaṃ atiharaṇaṃ, tato paraṃ haraṇaṃ vītiharaṇanti ayaṃ vā etesaṃ viseso.
因为水界依随地界,是“放下”的缘,水界本身有沉重的特性;于放下时,地界是依随着水界的,所以这两界在此动作中的作用特别强,其余诸界的作用则微弱,故为了说明此理而说“于放下……是为强而有力”。又因为地界依随水界,是“踏下”的缘,正如站立时一般,在踏下中地界有特别的作用,故水界依随地界;同样,在挤压作用中,乃是依止地界而成就压制的,因此这里地界亦依随着水界,故而说“同样,在踏下与挤压等动作中……”。显示巴利原文
Yasmā pathavīdhātuyā anugatā āpodhātu vossajjanassa paccayo. Garutarasabhāvā hi āpodhātūti. Vossajjane pathavīdhātuyā tassā anugatabhāvo, tasmā tāsaṃ dvinnamettha sāmatthiyato adhimattatā, itarāsañca omattatāti dassento āha ‘‘vossajjane…pe… balavatiyo’’ti. Yasmā pana āpodhātuyā anugatā pathavīdhātu sannikkhepanassa paccayo, patiṭṭhābhāve viya patiṭṭhāpanepi tassā sātisayakiccattā āpodhātuyā tassā anugatabhāvo, tathā ghaṭṭanakiriyāya pathavīdhātuyā vasena sannirujjhanassa sijjhanato tatthāpi pathavīdhātuyā āpodhātuanugatabhāvo, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘tathā sannikkhepanasannirujjhanesū’’ti.
“那里”是指在那个前进的过程中,或是指在前述抬起等各个部分当中。“于抬脚之刹那”,色法与非色法:指以抬脚方式转起的色法,以及促使它们生起的非色法。它们并不会“达至向前移动”,仅仅安住于自己的刹那。“即于该处”:它们在何处生起,便在何处坏灭,因为诸法并无处所的迁移。“节节”等语,是针对抬脚等部分,依同类相续而说,应如此理解。实际上,色法的转起刹那极其短暂,比行走等动作、乃至比那些上下前后飞驰的天人头上与脚上绑着刀刃相碰触的刹那更为快速。如同芝麻受挤压时,通过咤咤作响而可知它的破裂;同样,为显示诸有为法以生起而破裂,故说“咤咤作响”。因为凡是生起的,必定会坏灭。“与色一同”指的是那些与各个心坏灭同时坏灭的色法,它们是依于第十七心的生时而生的。若非如此,假如色法与非色法在同一刹那,便会与“色是沉重转变、迟钝坏灭”等经典相违,也会与“诸比丘,我不见有其他一法如此快速转变,如同此心”(《增支部》1.48)等经典相违。心与心所法具有缘取对象(所缘)的自性,它们依自身之力,令那作为所缘缘的……显示巴利原文
Tatthāti tasmiṃ abhikkamane, tesu vā vuttesu uddaraṇādīsu koṭṭhāsesu. Uddharaṇeti uddharaṇakkhaṇe. Rūpārūpadhammāti uddharaṇākārena pavattā rūpadhammā, taṃsamuṭṭhāpakā arūpadhammā ca. Atiharaṇaṃna pāpuṇanti khaṇamattāvaṭṭhānato. Tattha tatthevāti yattha yattha uppannā, tattha tattheva. Na hi dhammānaṃ desantarasaṅkamanaṃ atthi. ‘‘Pabbaṃ pabba’’tiādi uddharaṇādikoṭṭhāse sandhāya sabhāgasantativasena vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Atiittaro hi rūpadhammānampi pavattikkhaṇo, gamanassādīnaṃ, devaputtānaṃ heṭṭhupariyena paṭimukhaṃ dhāvantānaṃ sirasi pāde ca bandhakhuradhārā samāgamatopi sīghataro. Yathā tilānaṃ bhajjiyamānānaṃ paṭapaṭāyanena bhedo lakkhīyati, evaṃ saṅkhatadhammānaṃ uppādenāti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘paṭapaṭāyantā’’ti vuttaṃ. Uppannā hi ekantato bhijjantīti. ‘‘Saddhiṃ rūpenā’’ti idaṃ tassa tassa cittassa nirodhena saddhiṃ nirujjhanakarūpadhammānaṃ vasena vuttaṃ, yaṃ tato sattarasamacittassa uppādakkhaṇe uppannaṃ. Aññathā yadi rūpārūpadhammā samānakkhaṇā siyuṃ, ‘‘rūpaṃ garupariṇāmaṃ dandhanirodha’’ntiādivacanehi virodho siyā, tathā ‘‘nāhaṃ bhikkhave aññaṃ ekadhammampi samanupassāmi, yaṃ evaṃ lahuparivattaṃ, yathayidaṃ citta’’nti (a. ni. 1.48) evaṃ ādipāḷiyā. Cittacetasikā hi sārammaṇasabhāvā yathābalaṃ attano ārammaṇapaccayabhūtamatthaṃ vibhāvento eva uppajjantīti tesaṃ taṃsabhāvanipphattianantaraṃ nirodho. Rūpadhammā pana anārammaṇā pakāsetabbā, evaṃ tesaṃ pakāsetabbabhāvanipphatti soḷasahi cittehi hotīti taṅkhaṇāyukatā tesaṃ icchitā, lahuviññāṇavisayasaṅgatimattappaccayatāya tiṇṇaṃ khandhānaṃ, visayasaṅgatimattatāya ca viññāṇassa lahuparivattitā, dandhamahābhūtappaccayatāya rūpadhammānaṃ dandhaparivattitā. Nānādhātuyā yathābhūtañāṇaṃ kho pana tathāgatasseva, tena ca purejātapaccayo rūpadhammova vutto, pacchājātapaccayo ca tathevāti rūpārūpadhammānaṃ samānakkhaṇatā na yujjateva. Tasmā vuttanayenevettha attho veditabbo.
「另一心生起,另一心消灭」:先前生起的心是另一心,当它消灭时,是以作为无间缘等缘的方式灭去的,由此获得彼缘的另一心便生起。若是这样,它们之间是否有间隔呢?答曰:并非如此,而是「无间相续」,犹如波浪之间并无间隔。那些不能了知差别的人会认为「就是那个心」,这样微细的心相续与色相续,就如河流中的水流一般,持续不断。显示巴利原文
Aññaṃuppajjate cittaṃ, aññaṃ cittaṃ nirujjhatīti yaṃ purimuppannaṃ cittaṃ, taṃ aññaṃ, taṃ pana nirujjhantaṃ aparassa anantarādipaccayabhāveneva nirujjhatīti tathāladdhapaccayaṃ aññaṃ uppajjate cittaṃ. Yadi evaṃ tesaṃ antaro labbheyyāti? Noti āha ‘‘avīci manuppabandho’’ti, yathā vīci antaro na labbhati, ‘‘tadeveta’’nti avisesavidū maññanti, evaṃ anu anu pabandho cittasantāno rūpasantāno ca nadīsotova nadiyaṃ udakappavāho viya vattati.
朝面前看即是「看前面」,故说「向前看」。由于不论他面向何方行走、站立或坐下,朝向那个方向看便称为「看前面」,所以顺着那个方向的侧方看便称为「侧视」,因此说「侧视名为向隅方看」。在扫地、装饰等时,有向下看;在从高处取物等时,有向上看;在躲避从后方而来的危险等时,有向后看。因此说「以此方式,这一切也都已含摄在内」。显示巴利原文
Abhimukhaṃ lokitaṃ ālokitanti āha ‘‘purato pekkhana’’nti. Yasmā yaṃdisābhimukho gacchati, tiṭṭhati, nisīdati vā tadabhimukhaṃ pekkhanaṃ ālokitaṃ, tasmā tadanugatavidisālokanaṃ vilokitanti āha ‘‘vilokitaṃ nāma anudisāpekkhana’’nti. Sammajjanaparibhaṇḍādikaraṇe olokitassa, ullokaharaṇādīsu ullokitassa, pacchato āgacchantaparissayassa parivajjanādīsu apalokitassa siyā sambhavoti āha ‘‘iminā vā mukhena sabbānipi tāni gahitānevā’’ti.
「身证者」即以身体证悟的人,意思就是亲自作证的人。这位尊者在修观时这样想:「我正是由于不守护诸根,才遭到了对教法的不满等过患,我要好好防护它。」于是他生起了猛厉的惭与愧,又因于此已多作修行,在根律仪上达到了最上的极致,因此世尊将他安立于最上的位置:「诸比丘!我弟子中,于守护根门者中,此难陀为第一。」(《增支部》1.235)显示巴利原文
Kāyasakkhinti kāyena sacchikatavantaṃ, paccakkhakārinanti attho. So hi āyasmā vipassanākāle ‘‘yamevāhaṃ indriyesu aguttadvārataṃ nissāya sāsane anabhiratiādivippakāraṃ patto, tameva suṭṭhu niggahessāmī’’ti ussāhajāto balavahirottappo, tattha ca katādhikārattā indriyasaṃvare ukkaṃsapāramippatto, teneva naṃ satthā ‘‘etadaggaṃ bhikkhave mama sāvakānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ indriyesu guttadvārānaṃ, yadidaṃ nando’’ti (a. ni. 1.235) etadagge ṭhapesi.
应当知道,看前面与侧视的“有义”和“适宜”,是通过联系上下文来理解的。其中的“故”字,是回溯前文所说“因不舍弃业处,故成就行处正知”这一原因。其用意是:只应依自己的业处而行看与视,不应寻求依于蕴等业处之外的其他方法。此外,“看前面”等名称,仅是就纯粹法之转起的特定状态而安立。因此,为了显示如实地了知该法即是不迷惑正知,而说“内部”等语。所谓“依于心行之风界的浮动”,是指由心等起所生的风界的动摇行相在转起。“向下沉”,指向下走去;“向上跃”,指如同跳跃般向上走去。显示巴利原文
Sātthakatā ca sappāyatā ca veditabbā ālokitavilokitassāti ānetvā sambandho. Tasmāti kammaṭṭhānāvijahanasseva gocarasampajaññabhāvatoti vuttamevatthaṃ hetubhāvena paccāmasati. Attanokammaṭṭhānavaseneva ālokanavilokanaṃ kātabbaṃ, khandhādikammaṭṭhānā añño upāyo na gavesitabboti adhippāyo. Ālokitādisamaññāpi yasmā dhammamattasseva pavattiviseso, tasmā tassa yāthāvato pajānanaṃ asammohasampajaññanti dassetuṃ ‘‘abbhantare’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Cittakiriyavāyodhātuvipphāravasenāti kiriyamayacittasamuṭṭhānāya vāyodhātuyā calanākārappavattivasena. Adho sīdatīti adho gacchati. Uddhaṃ laṅghetīti laṅghaṃ viya upari gacchati.
“成就诸支分的作用”,意指令精勤支分的作用得以完成。“即使在第一速行中……不会发生”,这是针对在五门心路中,不会生起如对“女人、男人”那样的贪染等而说。因为在五门心路中,由于转向与确定的非如理作意,对可意的女像等只会生起单纯的贪,对不可意的只会生起单纯的嗔;而在意门心路中,则会有“女人、男人”之类的贪染等生起。五门速行是它的根源,或者如前所述,连同有分等一切也都是。如是,依着意门速行之根源,故说了知根源。而“客性、暂时性”,则是针对五门速行的非前有状态和短暂状态而说。“依上下次序破裂而坠落”,是指下面者与上面者前前后后相续地达到坏灭。显示巴利原文
Aṅgakiccaṃ sādhayamānanti padhānabhūtaaṅgakiccaṃ nipphādentaṃ hutvāti attho. ‘‘Paṭhamajavanepi…pe… na hotī’’ti idaṃ pañcadvāravīthiyaṃ ‘‘itthī puriso’’ti rajjanādīnaṃ abhāvaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Tattha hi āvajjana voṭṭhabbapanānaṃ ayoniso āvajjanavoṭṭhabbanavasena iṭṭhe itthirūpādimhi lobhamattaṃ, aniṭṭhe ca paṭighamattaṃ uppajjati, manodvāre pana ‘‘itthī puriso’’ti rajjanādi hoti. Tassa pañcadvārajavanaṃ mūlaṃ, yathāvuttaṃ vā sabbaṃ bhavaṅgādi. Evaṃ manodvārajavanassa mūlavasena mūlapariññā vuttā. Āgantukatāvakālikatā pana pañcadvārajavanasseva apubbabhāvavasena, ittarabhāvavasena ca vuttā. ‘‘Heṭṭhupariyavasena bhijjitvā patitesū’’ti heṭṭhimassa uparimassa ca aparāparaṃ bhaṅgappattimāha.
“Tanti”指速行;“tassa ayuttanti”是关联句,意为“它与它不相应”。“Āgantuko”指外来者。显示巴利原文
Tanti javanaṃ, tassa ayuttanti sambandho. Āgantuko abbhāgato.
这些法的时间为生灭所限定,唯有那么一个时段属于它们,故称“暂时性的”。显示巴利原文
Udayabbayaparicchinno tāvatako kālo etesanti tāvakālikāni.
这就是不迷乱正知。“Samavāya”(和合)意指处于和合的状态。“在此”意为:当看与注视依五蕴而显现时,除这些蕴之外,谁是那个单独的看者?谁是单独的注视者?显示巴利原文
Etaṃ asammohasampajaññaṃ. Samavāyeti sāmaggiyaṃ . Tatthāti pañcakkhandhavasena ālokanavilokane paññāyamāne tabbinimutto ko eko āloketi, ko viloketi.
“亲依止缘”这一说法,是依经教方式,以异门而说。此处说“俱生缘”,仅为举例,因为还可获得相互缘、相应缘、有缘、不离去缘等诸缘。显示巴利原文
‘‘Upanissayapaccayo’’ti idaṃ suttantanayena pariyāyato vuttaṃ. Sahajātapaccayoti nidassanamattametaṃ aññamaññasampayuttaatthiavigatādipaccayānampi labbhanato.
在适宜时行观察的比丘,即是在恰当的时候进行观察。同样地,对伸展肢体者而言,此处也是如此。所谓“摩尼蛇”,据说是一种蛇的种类。“Laḷana”意为颤动,或作嬉戏之态。显示巴利原文
Kāle samañchituṃ yuttakāle samañchantassa. Tathā pasārentassāti etthāpi. Maṇisappo nāma ekā sappajātīti vadanti. Laḷananti kampanaṃ, līḷākaraṇaṃ vā.
“Uṇhapakatiko”指体质偏热、身体多受热恼。由邪命所生、以毁戒故而招致不利的,是为不适当。以“袈裟亦是无心”等语,如同袈裟无心一般,身体亦是无心,由此阐明身体的空无自性;再以“内部”等语,进一步说明已述之义,显示了于所得皆能知足的原因。因此他说“tasmā”等。显示巴利原文
Uṇhapakatiko pariḷāhabahulakāyo. Sīlavidūsanena ahitāvahattā micchājīvavasena uppannaṃ asappāyaṃ. ‘‘Cīvarampi acetana’’ntiādinā cīvarassa viya kāyopi acetanoti kāyassa attasuññatāvibhāvanena ‘‘abbhantare’’tiādinā vuttamevatthaṃ paridīpento itarītarasantosassa kāraṇaṃ dasseti, tenāha ‘‘tasmā’’tiādi.
“Catupañcagaṇṭhikāhato”:意为被四五道衣结缚束而成,或以四五道衣结如此缚束而成。显示巴利原文
Catupañcagaṇṭhikāhatoti āhatacatupañcagaṇṭhiko, catupañcagaṇṭhikāhi vā āhato tathā.
“八种义”:即八种具体的利益。依大西瓦长老之说,应依“为持此身”等所示之理趣而解。至于“非为嬉戏等”之说,则是于教法中通过显示遮止的部分而作的开示,应如是了知。显示巴利原文
Aṭṭhavidhopiatthoti aṭṭhavidhopi payojanaviseso mahāsivattheravādavasena ‘‘imassa kāyassa ṭhitiyā’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.23, 422; ma. ni. 2.387; a. ni. 2.341; 8.9; dha. sa. 1355; vibha. 518; mahāni. 206) nayena vutto daṭṭhabbo. Imasmiṃ pakkhe ‘‘neva davāyātiādinā (ma. ni. 1.23, 422; ma. ni. 2.387; a. ni. 8.9; dha. sa. 1355; vibha. 518; mahāni. 206) nayenā’’ti pana paṭikkhepaṅgadassanamukhena desanāya āgatattā vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
他说“唯依风界而住立”——譬如承载大地的水由承托水的风所持,受用的食物在住处中也唯依风界而安住。“atiharati”:指将食物运至口中。“vītiharatī”:指从口中混合后送入腹中。或者,“atiharati”指运过口腔;“vītiharatī”指将进入腹部的食物移向一侧,亦即来回翻转。于此,食物的保持、翻转、磨碎、干燥等,实由风界与地界共同完成,并非风界独力所为,故这些作用也被说为地界的作用。“并保持湿润”:谓因风界等故,食物不为他缘所干燥,从而得以保持湿润。“火界”:即名为消化之火的火界,能消化所入的食物。“añjaso hoti”:成为食物进入等的通道。“ābhujati”:以寻求的方式,以及感知吞咽、消化与否等方式而作意,即是了知。而能生起这些种种了知的缘,即称为‘正精进’。因为藉由此精进,寻求等得以成就,同时由于诸法不相离,亦成就对相应对象的了知。复次,依于正精进,依于正确的行道,而转向、作意,因显示巴利原文
Pathavisandhārakajalassa taṃsandhārakavāyunā viya paribhuttassa āhārassa vāyodhātuyāva āsaye avaṭṭhānanti āha ‘‘vāyodhātuvaseneva tiṭṭhatī’’ti. Atiharatīti yāva mukhā abhiharati. Vītiharatīti tato kucchiyaṃ vīmissaṃ karonto harati. Atiharatīti vā mukhadvāraṃ atikkāmento harati. Vītiharatīti kucchigataṃ passato harati, parivattetīti aparāparaṃ cāreti. Ettha ca āhārassa dhāraṇaparivattanasañcuṇṇanavisosanāni pathavīdhātusahitā eva vāyodhātu karoti, na kevalāti tāni pathavīdhātuyāpi kiccabhāvena vuttāni. Allattañca anupāletīti yathā vāyodhātu ādīhi aññehi visosanaṃ na hoti, tathā allattañca anupāleti. Tejodhātūti gahaṇīsaṅkhātā tejodhātu. Sā hi antopaviṭṭhaṃ āhāraṃ paripāceti. Añjaso hotīti āhārassa pavesanādīnaṃ maggo hoti. Ābhujatīti pariyesanavasena, ajjhoharaṇajiṇṇājiṇṇatādipaṭisaṃvedanavasena ca āvajjeti, vijānātīti attho. Taṃtaṃvijānanassa paccayabhūtoyeva hi payogo ‘‘sammāpayogo’’ti vutto. Yena hi payogena pariyesanādi nipphajjati, so tabbisayavijānanampi nipphādeti nāma tadavinābhāvato. Atha vā sammāpayogaṃ sammāpaṭipatti manvāya āgamma ābhujati samannāharati. Ābhogapubbako hi sabbopi viññāṇabyāpāroti tathā vuttaṃ.
“gamanato”(从行):以乞食故,前往行境村落,故名从行。“pariyesanato”(从寻求):于行境村落为乞食而巡行,故名从寻求。“paribhogato”(从受用):由受用食物故,名从受用。“āsayato”(从住处):由胆汁等之住处故,名从住处。其中,“āsaya”(住处):即使这些胆汁等共聚一处,然因业果的限定,各有界限而互不混杂,于彼处躺卧、安住、转起,故称住处,此指位于胃上方的胆汁等。此构词后缀含有‘界限’之意。“nidhāna”(储藏处):所食食物于此积聚、安住,故名储藏处,亦即胃。是故从储藏处。“apakka”(从未熟):因称为消化之火的业生火而未熟,故名从未熟。“pakka”(从熟):所食食物已经熟润的状态,故名从熟。“phala”(从果):从结果、成就之义。“nissanda”(从流出):向各处流出故。“sammakkhana”(从遍涂):完全涂布故。此处但举纲要,详释应取自《显示巴利原文
Gamanatoti bhikkhācāravasena gocaragāmaṃ uddissa gamanato. Pariyesanatoti gocaragāme bhikkhatthaṃ āhiṇḍanato. Paribhogatoti āhārassa paribhuñjanato. Āsayatoti pittādiāsayato. Āsayati ettha ekajjhaṃ pavattamānopi kammaphalavavatthito hutvā mariyādavasena aññamaññaṃ asaṅkarato sayati tiṭṭhati pavattatīti āsayo, āmāsayassa upari tiṭṭhanako pittādiko. Mariyādattho hi ayamākāro. Nidhānanti yathābhutto āhāro nicito hutvā tiṭṭhati etthāti nidhānaṃ, āmāsayo. Tato nidhānato. Aparipakkatoti gahaṇīsaṅkhātena kammajatejena avipakkato. Paripakkatoti yathābhuttassa āhārasa vipakkabhāvato. Phalatoti nipphattito. Nissandatoti ito cito ca nissandanato. Sammakkhanatoti sabbaso makkhanato. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthāro pana visuddhimaggasaṃvaṇṇanāya (visuddhi. ṭī. 1.294) gahetabbo.
“sarīrato sedā muccanti”:由于用力抑制所生起的热恼,汗从身体流出。还有其他疾病,如耳痛、痔瘘等。“aṭṭhāne”:指在被人与非人所占据的不适宜处,例如田地、天祠等。因为忿怒的非人,或人,可能令人丧命。既已被舍弃,它便不属于自己;由于未施予任何人,又令人厌恶,故也不属于他人。“udakatumbato”:即从竹筒等盛水容器中。此处的“taṃ”指被丢弃的水。显示巴利原文
Sarīrato sedā muccantīti vegasaṃdhāraṇena uppannapariḷāhato sarīrato sedā muccanti. Aññe ca rogā kaṇṇasūlabhagandarādayo. Aṭṭhāneti manussāmanussapariggahite ayuttaṭṭhāne khettadevāyatanādike. Kuddhā hi amanussā, manussāpi vā jīvitakkhayaṃ pāpenti. Nissaṭṭhattā neva attano, kassaci anissajjitattā, jigucchanīyattā ca na parassa. Udakatumbatoti veḷunāḷiādiudakabhājanato. Tanti chaḍḍitaudakaṃ.
“addhānairiyāpathā”(长时威仪):指延续较久、长时间的威仪。“majjhimā”(中等威仪):指因乞食等行持而表现出来的威仪。“cuṇṇiyairiyāpathā”(细碎威仪):指在精舍或其他地方,因来回经行、转身等而表现出来的威仪。以上是他们的解释。而对于“gate”一词,意为“在行走时”。先前因涵盖前进与后退,故以“行走”统摄身体向前与向后的移动;此处则有说法认为,仅取其“行走”之意。显示巴利原文
Addhānairiyāpathā ciratarappavattikā dīghakālikā iriyāpathā. Majjhimā bhikkhācaraṇādivasena pavattā. Cuṇṇiyairiyāpathā vihāre, aññatthāpi ito cito ca parivattanādivasena pavattāti vadanti. ‘‘Gateti gamane’’ti pubbe abhikkamapaṭikkamaggahaṇena gamanenapi purato pacchato ca kāyassa abhiharaṇaṃ vuttanti idha gamanameva gahitanti keci.
在大西瓦长老的主张中,是依于每一个相邻的威仪,观察当下生起的色法与非色法即于彼处灭尽,由此把握正知性。因此,这应理解为依正知与观的行持而了知。故说:“此即大西瓦长老所开示的无痴重任,为《大念处经》之意趣所在。”然而,在这部《沙门果经》中,只要是为了显示沙门果的殊胜,这段开示便包含了全部四种正知。“唯与念相应”此语,意在显示正知于功能上的重要性,及显示念的重要性,而不仅是表明有念存在。因为智慧的活动从未脱离过念。透过“对此句的详细解释”,显示了念与智慧均等的重任。“那些句子”指“于前进、后退时成为正知者”等句。“已分别”:即分开后加以分别说明,这亦表明,于此处的念,其殊胜性与正知同等。显示巴利原文
Yasmā mahāsivattheravāde anantare anantare iriyāpathe pavattarūpārūpadhammānaṃ tattha tattheva nirodhadassanavasena sampajānakāritā gahitāti taṃ sampajaññavipassanācāravasena veditabbaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘tayidaṃ mahāsivattherena vuttaṃ asammohadhuraṃ mahāsatipaṭṭhānasutte adhippeta’’nti. Imasmiṃ pana sāmaññaphale sabbampi catubbidhaṃ sampajaññaṃ labbhati yāvadeva sāmaññaphalavisesadassanaparattā imissā desanāya. ‘‘Satisampayuttassevā’’ti idaṃ yathā sampajaññassa kiccato padhānatā gahitā, evaṃ satiyā pīti dassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ, na satiyā sabbhāvamattadassanatthaṃ. Na hi kadāci satirahitā ñāṇappavatti atthi. ‘‘Etassa hi padassa ayaṃ vitthāro’’ti iminā satiyā ñāṇena samadhurataṃyeva vibhāveti. Etānipadānīti ‘‘abhikkante paṭikkante sampajānakārī hotī’’tiādīni padāni. Vibhattānevāti visuṃ katvā vibhattāniyeva, imināpi sampajaññassa viya satiyāpettha padhānatameva vibhāveti.
然而,中部诵者则这样说:一位比丘行走时,心里想着别的事、寻思着别的事而行;另一位则始终不舍离业处而行。同样,一位比丘站着时……乃至……坐着时……乃至……躺着时,心里想着别的事、寻思着别的事而躺卧;另一位则念念不离业处而躺卧。仅为如此尚不显著,故通过经行来阐明。当比丘进入经行道,站在经行道一端作如此把握:‘在东侧经行道末端生起的色法与非色法,未到西侧末端,便于彼处灭去;在西侧末端生起的,未到东侧末端,便于彼处灭去;在经行道中间生起的,未达两端,便于彼处灭去;在经行过程中生起的色法与非色法,未至站立之处,便于彼处灭去;站立时生起的,未至坐处,便于彼处灭去;坐下时生起的,未至躺卧处,便于彼处灭去。’当他如此把握时,心恰好沉入有分。起身时,他执持业处方起身。这样的比丘,即称为在行走等一切动作中保持正知的人。即便如此,躺卧时业处仍可能不明显,因此比丘当尽其所能,先经行、站立、坐下,作如此把握后方才躺下:‘身体没有……’显示巴利原文
Majjhimabhāṇakā pana bhaṇanti – eko bhikkhu gacchanto aññaṃ cintento aññaṃ vitakkento gacchati, eko kammaṭṭhānaṃ avissajjetvāva gacchati. Tathā eko tiṭṭhanto…pe… nisīdanto…pe… sayanto aññaṃ cintento aññaṃ vitakkento sayati, eko kammaṭṭhānaṃ avissajjetvāva sayati, ettakena pana na pākaṭaṃ hotīti caṅkamanena dīpenti. Yo hi bhikkhu caṅkamaṃ otaritvā ca caṅkamanakoṭiyaṃ ṭhito pariggaṇhāti ‘‘pācīnacaṅkamanakoṭiyaṃ pavattā rūpārūpadhammā pacchimacaṅkamanakoṭiṃ appatvā ettheva niruddhā, pacchimacaṅkamanakoṭiyaṃ pavattāpi pācīnacaṅkamanakoṭiṃ appatvā ettheva niruddhā, caṅkamanamajjhe pavattā ubho koṭiyo appatvā ettheva niruddhā, caṅkamane pavattā rūpārūpadhammā ṭhānaṃ appatvā ettheva niruddhā, ṭhāne pavattā nisajjaṃ appatvā ettheva niruddhā, nisajjāya pavattā sayanaṃ appatvā ettheva niruddhā’’ti evaṃ pariggaṇhanto pariggaṇhantoyeva bhavaṅgaṃ otarati. Uṭṭhahanto kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvāva uṭṭhahati, ayaṃ bhikkhu gatādīsu sampajānakārī nāma hotīti . Evampi na sotte kammaṭṭhānaṃ avibhūtaṃ hoti, tasmā bhikkhu yāva sakkoti, tāva caṅkamitvā ṭhatvā nisīditvā sayamāno evaṃ pariggahetvā sayati ‘‘kāyo acetano, mañco acetano, kāyo na jānāti ‘ahaṃ mañce sayito’ti, mañco na jānāti ‘mayi kāyo sayito’ti, acetano kāyo acetane mañce sayito’’ti evaṃ pariggaṇhanto eva cittaṃ bhavaṅge otāreti. Pabujjhanto kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvāva pabujjhati, ayaṃ sotte sampajānakārī nāma hoti. Kāyādīkiriyānibbattanena tammayattā, āvajjanakiriyā samuṭṭhitattā ca javanaṃ sabbampi vā chadvārappavattaṃ kiriyamayapavattaṃ nāma. Tasmiṃ sati jāgaritaṃ nāma hotīti pariggaṇhanto jāgarite sampajānakārī nāma. Api ca rattindivaṃ cha koṭṭhāse katvā pañca koṭṭhāse jaggantopi jāgarite sampajānakārī nāma hoti. Vimuttāyatanasīsena dhammaṃ desentopi battiṃsatiracchānakathaṃ pahāya dasakathāvatthunissitasappāyakathaṃ kathentopi bhāsite sampajānakārī nāma. Aṭṭhatiṃsāya ārammaṇesu cittaruciyaṃ manasikāraṃ pavattentopi dutiyaṃ jhānaṃ samāpannopi tuṇhībhāve sampajānakārī nāma. Dutiyañhi jhānaṃ vacīsaṅkhāravirahato visesato tuṇhībhāvo nāmāti. Evanti vuttappakārena, sattasupi ṭhānesu catudhāti attho.
知足论的解说显示巴利原文
Santosakathāvaṇṇanā
215 为说明比丘因自身具备知足而被称为‘知足者’,故说‘具足随得资具知足’。意谓:对于衣服等无论何种资具皆能知足,并具足此心态。或者,‘随得’即指低劣,以其异于殊胜故;同样,殊胜亦异于低劣,也可说为‘随得’。此差别依期望而成立。因此,无论是低劣还是殊胜的衣服等资具,皆能知足之法——即如此生起的无贪,便称为‘随得资具知足’;具足此法则为‘具足’。‘依所得知足’,即随自己实际所得,与所得相应而知足。其余两种亦同此理。又或者,‘所得’即指所获得的东西,于任何所得皆知足,便是‘依所得知足’。此中,‘力’指身体的力量;‘适宜’则指与天生羸弱等根器相适应。显示巴利原文
215. Yassa santosassa attani atthitāya bhikkhu ‘‘santuṭṭho’’ti vuccati, taṃ dassento ‘‘itarītarapaccayasantosena samannāgato’’ti āha. Cīvarādi yattha katthaci paccaye santussanena samaṅgībhūtoti attho. Atha vā itaraṃ vuccati hīnaṃ paṇītato aññattā, tathā paṇītaṃ itaraṃ hīnato aññattā. Apekkhāsiddhā hi itaratāti. Iti yena dhammena hīnena vā paṇītena vā cīvarādipaccayena santussati, so tathā pavatto alobho itarītarapaccayasantoso, tena samannāgato. Yathālābhaṃ attano lābhānurūpaṃ santoso yathālābhasantoso. Sesadvayepi eseva nayo. Labbhatīti vā lābho, yo yo lābho yathālābhaṃ, tena santoso yathālābhasantoso.Balanti kāyabalaṃ. Sāruppanti pakatidubbalādīnaṃ anucchavikatā.
为显示知足的本来面目,区别于少欲的表现形态——少欲有‘于已得之外更无所求’之行相——故转而从少欲区分开来,说‘虽有所得亦不取用’。此中‘将其转换’,是指对于天生羸弱者等,厚重的袈裟不能带来舒适,还会令身体疲劳,故出于实际需要而转换,并非由于多欲等原因。因此说‘即使仅以轻的过活,也仍是知足者’,表明受用轻的袈裟并不违背知足。而‘得到贵价的袈裟,或许多件后,舍弃它们而取用其他’,由于安住于随宜的道理中,同样不违背知足,故说‘持用那些……乃至……也仍是知足者’。对于其余资具,在依力、依适宜的解说中,结合‘亦’字,应知其义趣相同。显示巴利原文
Yathāladdhato aññassa apatthanā nāma siyā appicchatāyapi pavattiākāroti tato vinivattitameva santosassa sarūpaṃ dassento ‘‘labhantopi na gaṇhātī’’ti āha. Taṃ parivattetvāti pakatidubbalādīnaṃ garucīvaraṃ na phāsubhāvāvahaṃ, sarīrakhedāvahañca hotīti payojanavasena, na atricchatādivasena taṃ parivattetvā. Lahukacīvaraparibhogo na santosavirodhīti āha ‘‘lahukena yāpentopi santuṭṭhova hotī’’ti. Mahagghaṃ cīvaraṃ bahūni vā cīvarāni labhitvāpi tāni vissajjetvā tadaññassa gahaṇaṃ yathāsāruppanaye ṭhitattā na santosavirodhīti āha ‘‘tesaṃ…pe… dhārentopi santuṭṭhova hotī’’ti. Evaṃ sesapaccayepi yathābalayathāsāruppaniddesesu api-saddaggahaṇe adhippāyo veditabbo.
“浸过牛尿的诃子”,是指用牛尿处理过的,或因腐烂而被丢弃的诃子。它被佛陀等所称赞,正如“依腐尿药而出家”等句中所说,受到正自觉者等赞叹。如此,世尊教导那些少欲知足的比丘:“他是最上知足者”,因为成就了最为极致、最为殊胜的知足。显示巴利原文
Muttaharītakanti gomuttaparibhāvitaṃ, pūtibhāvena vā chaḍḍitaṃ harītakaṃ. Buddhādīhi vaṇṇitanti ‘‘pūtimuttabhesajjaṃ nissāya pabbajjā’’tiādinā (mahāva. 73, 128) sammāsambuddhādīhi pasatthaṃ. Appicchatāsantuṭṭhīsu bhikkhū niyojento paramasantuṭṭhova hoti paramena ukkaṃsagatena santosena samannāgatattā.
“维持身体者”,是养护身体的意思。“维持腹部者”也同理可知。维持腹部性,是由于吞咽食物而帮助身体续存,故为所需;因此,从外部辅助身体的,便应视为“维持身体性”。显示巴利原文
Kāyaṃ pariharanti posentīti kāyaparihārikā. Tathā kucchiparihārikā veditabbā. Kucchiparihārikatā ca ajjhoharaṇena sarīrassa ṭhitiyā upakārakatāvasena icchitāti bahiddhāva kāyassa upakārakatāvasena kāyaparihārikatā daṭṭhabbā.
“唯资具的量”,是指取用资具仅以所需为量。“就那样安放的敷具”,是指未加特别决意,便就地放置使用的敷具。此处敷具等的先后次第,应依前述顺序理解,并非因其有固定不变的规律。何以故?因为并非那样受持。犹如大象因其难以豢养的特性而被称为“大象”;同样,难道对于其他具足少欲等功德者,这种说法也是他们所希求的吗?并非如此,故说“然而世尊”等。“资具是为了维持身体”,即以维持身体为所需,因此名为“维持身体所需的资具”。所以接着说“仅仅是为了维持身体”。显示巴利原文
Parikkhāramattāti parikkhāraggahaṇaṃ. Tatraṭṭhakapaccattharaṇanti attanā anadhiṭṭhahitvā tattheva tiṭṭhanakapaccattharaṇaṃ . Paccattharaṇādīnañcettha navamādibhāvo yathāvuttapaṭipāṭiyā daṭṭhabbo, na tesaṃ tathā patiniyatabhāvato. Kasmā? Tathā nadhāraṇato. Dupposabhāvena mahāgajā viyāti mahāgajā. Yadi itarepi appicchatādisabhāvā, kiṃ tesampi vasena ayaṃ desanā icchitāti? Noti āha ‘‘bhagavā panā’’tiādi. Kāyaparihāro payojanaṃ etenāti kāyaparihārikaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘kāyaṃ pariharaṇamattakenā’’ti.
“向四方者”:由于在四方中安稳而住,四方皆为安稳住处,故称向四方者(catuddiso),catuddiso 即 cātuddiso。“无碍者”:对于其中的任何有情或行,既不因怖畏而排斥,亦不被其所排斥,故称无碍者(appaṭigho)。“满足于任何所得”:指对于或高或低的资具,无论自己已有还是寂静所得,都同样感到满足。那些完全压迫、制伏身心的,便是“危难”(parissayā),如狮子、老虎等,以及爱欲等烦恼。这位行者以安忍、调伏等方法为助伴,忍耐并征服了这些危难。“无惧者”:因为没有令心僵硬的怖畏,故称无惧者(achambhī)。“应独行”:指能独自一人而行。“如犀牛角者”:即以那种独住的状态,如同犀牛之角。显示巴利原文
Catūsu disāsu sukhavihāratāya sukhavihāraṭṭhānabhūtā catasso disā etassāti catuddiso catuddiso eva cātuddiso. Tāsu eva katthaci satte vā saṅkhāre vā bhayena na paṭihanati, sayaṃ vā tena na paṭihaññatīti appaṭigho. Santussamāno itarītarenāti uccāvacena paccayena sakena, santena, samameva ca tussanako. Paricca sayanti, kāyacittāni parisayanti abhibhavantīti parissayā, sīhabyagghādayo, kāmacchandādayo ca, te parissaye adhivāsanakhantiyā vinayādīhi ca sahitā khantā, abhibhavitā ca. Thaddhabhāvakarabhayābhāvena achambhī. Eko careti ekākī hutvā carituṃ sakkuṇeyya. Khaggavisāṇakappoti tāya eva ekavihāritāya khaggamigasiṅgasamo.
若未遭遇风击,鸟可能看似无翼,因此特别指明“有翼的鸟”(pakkhī sakuṇo)。显示巴利原文
Asañjātavātābhighātehi siyā sakuṇo apakkhakoti ‘‘pakkhī sakuṇo’’ti visesetvā vutto.
这是对断除诸盖论说的注释。显示巴利原文
Nīvaraṇappahānakathāvaṇṇanā
216 所谓“陷于可被指责的境地”(vattabbataṃ āpajjati),是指:有些比丘住在阿兰若中,却如同畜生道众生或林中行者,仅有一处居所,而无与阿兰若住相应的正行,由此背离正道,应受指责;或者与那些林居的畜生道众生、不相应的林中行者混迹一处,因错误的修行而应受指责。因其如墨点,故称“黑子”(kāḷakaṃ),指粗重过失;因其如芝麻点,故称“芝麻点”(tilakaṃ),指微细过失。显示巴利原文
216.Vattabbataṃ āpajjatīti ‘‘asukassa bhikkhuno araññe tiracchānagatānaṃ viya, vanacarakānaṃ viya ca nivāsamattameva, na pana araññavāsānucchavikā kāci sammāpaṭipattī’’ti apavādavasena vattabbataṃ, āraññakehi vā tiracchānagatehi, vanacaravisabhāgajanehi vā saddhiṃ vippaṭipattivasena vattabbataṃ āpajjati. Kāḷakasadisattā kāḷakaṃ, thullavajjaṃ. Tilakasadisattā tilakaṃ, aṇumattavajjaṃ.
“远离”(vivittaṃ)是指离人而居的远离,因此说“空”(suñña)。又因禅那以声为刺,应理解为无有人声喧哗,故说“意为少声、少喧哗”(appasaddaṃ appanigghosanti attho)。所谓“即此”(etadeva),即是无声之状态。“精舍”(vihāro)指以围墙划分的整座寺院。“半覆屋”(aḍḍhayogo)指纵长的楼阁,也有说是“金翅鸟形状的楼阁”。“楼阁”(pāsādo)指四方形的楼阁。“平顶殿”(hammiyaṃ)指无尖顶的殿堂。“望楼”(aṭṭo)指为防备敌患而修建的、利于防御的四五层高之特殊住所。“单顶阁”(māḷo)指单一屋顶所覆盖的多角形特殊住所。另有解释:“精舍”(vihāro)指入口纵长的楼阁;“半覆屋”(aḍḍhayogo)指仅一面有遮盖的坐卧处,据说因其一侧壁较高而另一侧较低,故成单面遮盖;“楼阁”(pāsādo)指宽大的四方形楼阁;“平顶殿”(hammiyaṃ)指无尖顶、带有月形庭院的殿堂;“山洞”(guhā)指纯天然的山洞。显示巴利原文
Vivittanti janavivittaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘suñña’’nti. Taṃ pana janasaddaghosābhāveneva veditabbaṃ saddakaṇṭakattā jhānassāti āha ‘‘appasaddaṃ appanigghosanti attho’’ti. Etadevāti nissaddataṃyeva. Vihāro pākāraparicchinno sakalo āvāso. Aḍḍhayogoti dīghapāsādo, ‘‘garuḷasaṇṭhānapāsādo’’tipi vadanti. Pāsādoti caturassapāsādo. Hammiyaṃ muṇḍacchadanapāsādo . Aṭṭo paṭirājūnaṃ paṭibāhanayoggo catupañcabhūmako patissayaviseso. Māḷo ekakūṭasaṅgahito anekakoṇavanto patissayaviseso. Aparo nayo vihāro nāma dīghamukhapāsādo. Aḍḍhayogo ekapassacchadanakasenāsanaṃ. Tassa kira ekapasse bhitti uccatarā hoti, itarapasse nīcā, tena taṃ ekapassachadanakaṃ hoti. Pāsādo nāma āyatacaturassapāsādo. Hammiyaṃ muṇḍacchadanakaṃ candikaṅgaṇayuttaṃ. Guhā nāma kevalā pabbataguhā. Leṇaṃ dvārabaddhaṃ pabbhāraṃ. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva. Maṇḍapoti sākhāmaṇḍapo.
“精舍坐卧具”(vihārasenāsanaṃ)是指作为依止处的卧坐之处。“床椅坐卧具”(mañcapīṭhasenāsanaṃ)指床、椅以及与床椅相关的卧坐之具。“敷具坐卧具”(santhatasenāsanaṃ)指如毛毡等应铺设的物品。“唯处所坐卧具”因其未作特别营造,仅为卧与坐的场所而得名。“远离的坐卧具”(vivittaṃ senāsanaṃ),以此方式摄取坐卧具时,此亦已被涵盖,因为它是泛称。显示巴利原文
Vihārasenāsananti patissayabhūtaṃ senāsanaṃ. Mañcapīṭhasenāsananti mañcapīṭhañceva mañcapīṭhasambandhasenāsanañca. Cimilikādi santharitabbato santhatasenāsanaṃ. Abhisaṅkharaṇābhāvato sayanassa nisajjāya ca kevalaṃ okāsabhūtaṃ senāsanaṃ. ‘‘Vivittaṃ senāsana’’nti iminā senāsanaggahaṇena saṅgahitameva sāmaññajotanābhāvato.
既然如此,为何还要说“阿兰若”等呢?答曰:“而此……”等等。“因比丘尼的因缘而来”之说,是针对律藏中如此传来的情况而言;然而在阿毗达摩中也有同样的说法:“阿兰若:出至户外,门槛之外,这一切皆为阿兰若。”在那里,凡不包含在村落范围之内的,都以非间接的方式称为“阿兰若”。在头陀支解说(《清净道论》1.31)中所说的是合理的,因此意思是应依照那里所说的方法来理解。“树下”(rukkhamūlaṃ)是指树的附近。正如所说:“凡于正午时分,树荫遮蔽四周,在无风之处落叶所能到达的范围,这便是树下的领域。”由于“山”(sela)字一般作为山的同义词,所以说“山即岩石”(pabbatanti selaṃ),但它并非仅指由岩石构成的山,也包括由土等构成的三类山。“谷”(vivaraṃ)是指两座相近山之间的裂口如同内室,或是单独一座山中的裂缝。“犹如隧道”是指类似难以通行的通道。“人迹罕至之处”是指按照正常行路规则,人们不应行走的地方。以“等”字摄取了律藏等中的其余经文:“林丛:此乃坐卧处之一”等。显示巴利原文
Yadi evaṃ kasmā ‘‘arañña’’ntiādi vuttanti āha ‘‘ima panā’’tiādi. ‘‘Bhikkhunīnaṃ vasena āgata’’nti idaṃ vinaye tathā āgatataṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, abhidhammepi pana ‘‘araññanti nikkhamitvā bahi indakhīlā, sabbametaṃ arañña’’nti (vibha. 529) āgatameva. Tattha hi yaṃ na gāmapadesantogadhaṃ, taṃ ‘‘arañña’’nti nippariyāyavasena tathā vuttaṃ. Dhutaṅganiddese (visuddhi. 1.31) yaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ yuttaṃ,tasmā tattha vuttanayena gahetabbanti adhippāyo. Rukkhamūlanti rukkhasamīpaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘yāvatā majjhanhike kāle samantā chāyā pharati, nivāte paṇṇāni nipatanti, ettāvatā rukkhamūla’’nti. Sela-saddo avisesato pabbatapariyāyoti katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘pabbatanti sela’’nti, na silāmayameva, paṃsumayādiko tividhopi pabbato evāti. Vivaranti dvinnaṃ pabbatānaṃ mitho āsannatare ṭhitānaṃ ovarakādisadisaṃ vivaraṃ, ekasmiṃyeva vā pabbate. Umaṅgasadisanti suduṅgāsadisaṃ. Manussānaṃ anupacāraṭṭhānanti pakatisañcāravasena manussehi na sañcaritabbaṭṭhānaṃ. Ādi-saddena ‘‘vanapatthanti vanasaṇṭhānametaṃ senāsanānaṃ adhivacanaṃ, vanapatthanti bhīsanakānametaṃ, vanapatthanti salomahaṃsānametaṃ, vanapatthanti pariyantānametaṃ, vanapatthanti na manussūpacārānametaṃ, vanapatthanti durabhisambhavānametaṃ senāsanānaṃ adhivacana’’nti (vibha. 531) imaṃ pāḷisesaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Acchannanti kenaci chadanena antamaso rukkhasākhāyapi na chāditaṃ. Nikkaḍḍhitvāti nīharitvā. Pabbhāraleṇasadiseti pabbhārasadise leṇasadise ca.
「乞食」(piṇḍapātapariyesanaṃ)是省略后词而指称团食;因此说「从乞食而返」。「结跏趺座」(pallaṅkaṃ)中,pari一词有「周遍」之意,故将左大腿与右大腿平齐安放,两脚彼此交叠而坐,便称为「周遍绑腿座」(samantato ūrubaddhāsanaṃ),即结跏趺座。「弯曲后」(ābhujitvā),是为了成就结跏趺座,将两脚向内弯折;由此使双脚如此交叠相连,所以说「交绑后」(bandhitvā)。显示巴利原文
Piṇḍapātapariyesanaṃ piṇḍapāto uttarapadalopenāti āha ‘‘piṇḍapātapariyesanato paṭikkanto’’ti . Pallaṅkanti ettha parisaddo ‘‘samantato’’ti etassa atthe, tasmā vāmoruñca dakkhiṇoruñca samaṃ ṭhapetvā ubho pāde aññamaññaṃ sambandhitvā nisajjā pallaṅkanti āha ‘‘samantato ūrubaddhāsana’’nti. Ūrūnaṃ bandhanavasena nisajjā pallaṅkaṃ. Ābhujitvāti ca yathā pallaṅkavasena nisajjā hoti, evaṃ ubho pāde ābhugge bhañjite katvā, taṃ pana ubhinnaṃ pādānaṃ tathā sambandhatākaraṇanti āha ‘‘bandhitvā’’ti.
因为「坐」这个词本身已经表明下身是不弯曲、端直的,所以「上身端直」(ujuṃ kāyaṃ)中的「身」字是指上半身,从而说「将上半身端直安放」。为显示这样端直安放的形态及目的,又说到「十八」等。不向前倾,是指不俯身。不外散,是指心不离业处、不跨越其行境。由此,能相续不断地证得殊胜,业处便得以增长、增广与扩大。「置念面前」(parimukhaṃ):pari一词有「朝向」(abhi)之意,所以解释为「面向业处」(kammaṭṭhānābhimukhaṃ),意思是心从外在种种所缘回转,唯以业处为首要。或者,pari表示「近处」,故又解释为「或作于口的近处」(mukhasamīpe vā katvā)。在此之中,如同「亲近远离的坐卧处」等显示与修习相应的坐卧处一样,「坐」显示了不萎缩、不掉举的寂静威仪;「结跏趺座」显示了坐姿的稳固;「置念面前」表示把握所缘的方法。pari是摄持之义,如「摄持引导者」等词中所用;mukha是出离之义,如「空解脱门」等词中所用,即从对立面脱离之义。显示巴利原文
Heṭṭhimakāyassa ca anujukaṃ ṭhapanaṃ nisajjāvacaneneva bodhitanti ‘‘ujuṃ kāya’’nti ettha kāya-saddo uparimakāyavisayoti āha ‘‘uparimaṃ sarīraṃ ujuṃ ṭhapetvā’’ti. Taṃ pana ujukaṭhapanaṃ sarūpato, payojanato ca dassetuṃ ‘‘aṭṭhārasā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Na paṇamantīti na onamanti. Na paripatatīti na vigacchati vīthiṃ na laṅgheti. Tato eva pubbenāparaṃ visesappattiyā kammaṭṭhānaṃ vuḍḍhiṃ phātiṃ vepullaṃ upagacchati. Parimukhanti ettha parisaddo abhi-saddena samānatthoti āha ‘‘kammaṭṭhānābhimukha’’nti, bahiddhā puthuttārammaṇato nivāretvā kammaṭṭhānaṃyeva purakkhatvāti attho. Samīpattho vā parisaddoti dassento ‘‘mukhasamīpe vā katvā’’ti āha. Ettha ca yathā ‘‘vivittaṃ senāsanaṃ bhajatī’’tiādinā bhāvanānurūpaṃ senāsanaṃ dassitaṃ, evaṃ ‘‘nisīdatī’’ti iminā alīnānuddhaccapakkhiyo santo iriyāpatho dassito. ‘‘Pallaṅkaṃ ābhujitvā’’ti iminā nisajjāya daḷhabhāvo, ‘‘parimukhaṃ satiṃ upaṭṭhapetvā’’ti iminā ārammaṇapariggahūpāyo. Parīti pariggahaṭṭho ‘‘pariṇāyikā’’tiādīsu viya. Mukhanti niyyānaṭṭho ‘‘suññatavimokkhamukha’’ntiādīsu viya. Paṭipakkhato niggamanaṭṭho hi niyyānaṭṭho, tasmā pariggahitaniyyānanti sabbathā gahitāsammosaṃ paricattasammosaṃ satiṃ katvā, paramaṃ satinepakkaṃ upaṭṭhapetvāti attho.
217 「贪欲」(abhijjhā):依此而贪求、执取、渴望,所以称为贪欲,即贪。以坏灭为义,即是刹那刹那坏灭之义。此处所说「以镇伏为手段」的镇伏,是指令其不生起、不现行,并非指以敌对法作了彻底的断除。所谓「已断除」,是就相似于已断除的状态而说,因为尚未证得禅那。即便如此,这并不像眼识那样于自性上即无贪欲,而是依于修习而成,所以说「不像眼识那样」。同理,此心依修习而成为已离贪欲,同样也成为无嗔、离昏沉睡眠、离掉举、无疑的状态。「前本性」是指其清净洁白的本性。在阿毗达摩中说:「诸心的不轻快性……」称为昏沉;又说:「诸身的不轻快性……」称为睡眠,因此这里说「昏沉是心的疾病,睡眠是心所法的疾病」。虽然它们彼此不分离,如同心轻快性与身轻快性那样,在心与心所法中生起时分有其差别,但它们各自所导致的不轻快性等特殊缘相,应当了知为它们的自性。「有光明想者」(ālokasaññī):词中的长音ī表示殊胜之义,彰显了明了觉知的意义,所以解释为「像睁眼而行的人一样,既殊胜又明了地觉知」。显示巴利原文
217. Abhijjhāyati gijjhati abhikaṅkhati etāyāti abhijjhā, lobho. Lujjanaṭṭhenāti bhijjanaṭṭhena, khaṇe khaṇe bhijjanaṭṭhenāti attho. Vikkhambhanavasenāti ettha vikkhambhanaṃ anuppādanaṃ appavattanaṃ, na paṭipakkhānaṃ suppahīnatā. ‘‘Pahīnattā’’ti ca pahīnasadisataṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ jhānassa anadhigatattā. Tathāpi nayidaṃ cakkhuviññāṇaṃ viya sabhāvato vigatābhijjhaṃ, atha kho bhāvanāvasena, tenāha ‘‘na cakkhuviññāṇasadisenā’’ti. Eseva nayoti yathā imassa cittassa bhāvanāya paribhāvitattā vigatābhijjhatā, evaṃ abyāpannaṃ vigatathinamiddhaṃ anuddhataṃ nibbicikicchañcāti attho. Purimapakatinti parisuddhapaṇḍarasabhāvaṃ. ‘‘Yā cittassa akalyatāti’’ādinā (dha. sa. 1162; vibha. 546) thinassa, ‘‘yā kāyassa akalyatā’’tiādinā (dha. sa. 1163; vibha. 546) ca middhassa abhidhamme niddiṭṭhattā vuttaṃ ‘‘thinaṃ cittagelaññaṃ, middhaṃ cetasikagelañña’’nti. Satipi aññamaññaṃ avippayoge cittakāyalahutādīnaṃ viya cittacetasikānaṃ yathākammaṃ taṃ taṃ visesassa yā tesaṃ akalyatādīnaṃ visesappaccayatā, ayametesaṃ sabhāvoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Ālokasaññīti ettha atisayatthavisiṭṭhaatthi atthāvabodhako ayamīkāroti dassento āha ‘‘rattimpi…pe… samannāgato’’ti. Idaṃ ubhayanti satisampajaññamāha. Atikkamitvā vikkhambhanavasena pajahitvā. ‘‘Kathamida’’nti pavattiyā kathaṅkathā, vicikicchā. Sā etassa atthīti kathaṅkathī, na kathaṅkathīti akathaṃkathī, nibbicikiccho. Lakkhaṇādibhedatoti ettha ādi-saddena paccayapahānapahāyakādīnampi saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Tepi hi bhedato vattabbāti.
218 「他们」指因债务而借取财物者。「边际」指尚待偿还的余额。他得大欢喜:‘我已从债务的障碍中解脱。’他获得喜悦:‘有了维持生计的凭借。’显示巴利原文
218.Tesanti iṇavasena gahitadhanānaṃ. Pariyantoti dātabbaseso. So balavapāmojjaṃ labhati ‘‘iṇapalibodhato muttomhī’’ti. Somanassaṃ adhigacchati ‘‘jīvikānimittaṃ atthī’’ti.
219 「不相应的受生起」指苦受的生起。苦受与乐受的善果报相续相违,故称不相应。「切断四种威仪」即中断四种威仪的活动。正如病人在站立、行走时无力,在坐等姿态中也同样无力。「压迫」即折磨。风等的不平衡状态称为「病」,因此说‘由彼所起的苦而受苦’。当苦受为病时,以根本的病而说‘受折磨’,因为最初即受折磨;以随后的病而说‘受苦’,因为痛苦不断生起。「病者」指因界衰减而耗损身体者。仅有微小的力量称为「微小力量」。「那两者」指欢悦与喜悦。在此,他获得欢悦:‘我已从病中解脱’;获得喜悦:‘我的身体有力量’。显示巴利原文
219.Visabhāgavedanuppattiyāti dukkhavedanuppattiyā. Dukkhavedanā hi sukhavedanāya kusalavipākasantānassa virodhitāya visabhāgā. Catuiriyāpathaṃ chindantoti catubbidhampi iriyāpathappavattiṃ pacchindanto. Byādhiko hi yathā ṭhānagamanesu asamattho, evaṃ nisajjādīsupi asamattho hoti. Ābādhetīti pīḷeti. Vātādīnaṃ vikāro visamāvatthā byādhīti āha ‘‘taṃsamuṭṭhānena dukkhena dukkhito’’ti. Dukkhavedanāya pana byādhibhāve mūlabyādhinā ābādhiko ādito bādhatīti katvā. Anubandhabyādhinā dukkhito aparāparaṃ sañjātadukkhoti katvā. Gilānoti dhātusaṅkhayena parikkhīṇasarīro. Appamattakaṃ vā balaṃ balamattā. Tadubhayanti pāmojjaṃ, somanassañca. Tattha labhetha pāmojjaṃ ‘‘rogato muttomhī’’ti. Adhigaccheyya somanassaṃ ‘‘atthi me kāye bala’’nti.
220 「其余的」指这样的内容:‘因为他作意“我已从束缚中解脱”,那两者便生起。因此这样说’等等。「以已说的方法」即如前两句所示的方法。「于所有句中」指其余的第三等分句。显示巴利原文
220.Sesanti ‘‘tassa hi ‘bandhanā muttomhī’ti āvajjayato tadubhayaṃ hoti. Tena vutta’’nti evamādi. Vuttanayenevāti paṭhamadutiyapadesu vuttanayeneva. Sabbapadesūti avasiṭṭhapadesu tatiyādīsu koṭṭhāsesu.
221-222 “不自主”即不由自己支配。“他主”即由他人支配。因不依属于他人,如同仆人那样在自己的事务上可受差遣,故称“自由者”。“自有”即说“属于自己的”。由于无水,人们在此处渴望水、凭水方能渡过,故称“荒野”,解释说“无水的长途”。显示巴利原文
221-222.Na attani adhīnoti na attāyatto. Parādhīnoti parāyatto. Aparādhīnatāya bhujo viya attano kicce esitabboti bhujisso. Savasoti āha ‘‘attano santako’’ti. Anudakatāya kaṃ pānīyaṃ tārenti etthāti kantāroti āha ‘‘nirudakaṃ dīghamagga’’nti.
223 “于彼处”:在那所见之中。“此”:即现在所说的相似性。正是凭借这种相似性,债务等成为能喻,而欲贪等成为所喻——它们之间的这种能喻与所喻的关联即是相似性,应当如此理解。“若有人于任何处因欲贪而染著”:即任何一个人,对于任何一个成为欲贪事处的人,以欲贪之力而染著。“执取彼事处”:即执取那渴爱的事处,视为“这是我的”。显示巴利原文
223.Tatrāti tasmiṃ dassane. Ayanti idāni vuccamānā sadisatā. Yena iṇādīnaṃ upamābhāvo, kāmacchandādīnañca upameyyabhāvo hoti, so nesaṃ upamopameyyasambandho sadisatāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yo yamhi kāmacchandena rajjatīti yo puggalo yamhi kāmarāgassa vatthubhūte puggale kāmacchandavasena ratto hoti. Taṃ vatthuṃ gaṇhātīti taṃ taṇhāvatthuṃ ‘‘mameta’’nti gaṇhāti.
“你们伤害”指制造伤害。显示巴利原文
Upaddavethāti upaddavaṃ karotha.
「星宿」:指节日(大集会)。「解脱者」:指从束缚中解脱者。显示巴利原文
Nakkhattassāti mahassa. Muttoti bandhanato mutto.
「于律中不知所作」:指不善巧于律藏的次第。因为他不能如实了知何者适宜、何者不适宜。所以经文说:「在任何微小的事上……」等。显示巴利原文
Vinaye apakataññunāti vinayakkame akusalena. So hi kappiyākappiyaṃ yāthāvato na jānāti. Tenāha ‘‘kismiñcidevā’’tiādi.
「他走」:意为他一点点地行走。然而,当他行走时,又因那种疑惧、猜疑的状态,在各处停住。在如此的荒野中,他心想:‘谁知道会发生什么事呢?’,于是也会折返回去。因此,他未曾走到的地方远比已经走到的地方多。他无法以信心执取所应信之事,而确信‘正是如此’。所谓「有还是无?」,即是‘这到底是有,还是没有?’对于进入阿兰若的人来说,最初即有此类爬行,称为「近爬」;向周围爬,或再向上爬,则称为「遍爬」。此二者皆指原地打转、徘徊不前。因此经文说「不深入」。「惊悚」:指由‘阿兰若’这一想而生的惊悚状态,即恐惧之意。显示巴利原文
Gacchatipīti thokaṃ thokaṃ gacchatipi. Gacchanto pana tāya eva ussaṅkitaparisaṅkitatāya tattha tattha tiṭṭhatipi. Īdise kantāre gato ‘‘ko jānāti kiṃ bhavissatī’’ti nivattatipi, tasmā gataṭṭhānato agataṭṭhānameva bahutaraṃ hoti. Saddhāya gaṇhituṃ saddheyyaṃ vatthuṃ ‘‘idameva’’nti saddahituṃ na sakkoti. Atthi natthīti ‘‘atthi nu kho, natthi nu kho’’ti. Araññaṃ paviṭṭhassa ādimhi eva sappanaṃ āsappanaṃ. Pari parito, uparūpari vā sappanaṃ parisappanaṃ. Ubhayenapi tattheva paribbhamanaṃ vadati. Tenāha ‘‘apariyogāhana’’nti. Chambhitattanti araññasaññāya uppannaṃ chambhitabhāvaṃ, utrāsanti attho.
224 “此处所说的相似性”:此中,也应当依照前文所述的道理来理解这相似性。因为从贪欲等如同债务等时起,他们之断除便如同无债等的不存在状态。“六法”:即学习不净相、修习不净、守护诸根门、饮食知量、亲近善知识、作有利益的谈论这六种法。“修习”:即增广、培育。我们将在《大念处》中详细解说,因为在那里,经文依阐明未生起的令生起、已生起的令断除等方式,特予说明。此解说之理也同样适用于断除嗔恚等的情况。“于外事”:指于成为所缘的外在事物上。显示巴利原文
224.Tatrāyaṃ sadisatāti etthāpi vuttanayānusārena sadisatā veditabbā. Yadaggena hi kāmacchandādayo iṇādisadisā, tadaggena tesaṃ pahānaṃ āṇaṇyādisadisaṃ abhāvoti katvā. Cha dhammeti asubhanimittassa uggaho, asubhabhāvanānuyogo, indriyesu guttadvāratā, bhojane mattaññutā, kalyāṇamittatā, sappāyakathāti ime cha dhamme. Bhāvetvāti brūhetvā. Mahāsatipaṭṭhāne (dī. ni. 2.372-374) vaṇṇayissāma tatthassa anuppannānuppādanauppannapahānādivibhāvanavasena savisesaṃ pāḷiyā āgatattā. Esa nayo byāpādādippahānakabhāvepi. Paravatthumhīti ārammaṇabhūte parasmiṃ vatthusmiṃ.
“作无义”:指给自己和他人带来无义。“六法”:即学习慈心相、修习慈心、思维业自作性、多作省察、亲近善知识、作有利益的谈论这六种法。“即于彼处”:指在《大念处》中。为行持戒律而制定的学处,称为“行制”。显示巴利原文
Anatthakaroti attano parassa ca anatthāvaho. Cha dhammeti mettānimittassa uggaho, mettābhāvanānuyogo , kammassakatā, paṭisaṅkhānabahulatā, kalyāṇamittatā, sappāyakathāti ime cha dhamme. Tatthevāti mahāsatipaṭṭhāneyeva (dī. ni. 2.372-374). Cārittasīlaṃ uddissa paññattasikkhāpadaṃ ācārapaṇṇatti.
因被投入牢狱而未能享受星宿节之乐的人,被称为“于星宿节日被投入牢狱者”;或者,正是在星宿节那天,为了不令他享受而如此处置。“大无义之作者”:谓以破坏现世利益等为门径,而造作巨大无义的人。“六法”:即饮食过量时取相、转换威仪、作意光明想、露天而住、亲近善知识、作有利益的谈论这六种法。显示巴利原文
Bandhanāgāraṃ pavesitattā aladdhanakkhattānubhavo puriso ‘‘nakkhattadivase bandhanāgāraṃ pavesito puriso’’ti vutto, nakkhattadivase eva vā tadananubhavanatthaṃ tathā kato. Mahāanatthakaranti diṭṭhadhammikādiatthahāpanamukhena mahato anatthassa kārakaṃ. Cha dhammeti atibhojane nanimittaggāho, iriyāpathasamparivattanatā, ālokasaññāmanasikāro, abbhokāsavāso, kalyāṇamittatā, sappāyakathāti ime cha dhamme.
「于掉举与悔恨中,是大无义之作者」:意为由于它为依止而生起,依前文所说的道理,是大无义的制造者。此处「义」指「六法」,即多闻、遍问、精通律学、亲近长老、有善知识、作有益交谈这六种法。显示巴利原文
Uddhaccakukkucce mahāanatthakaranti parāyattatāpādanato vuttanayena mahato anatthassa kārakanti. Attho cha dhammeti bahussutatā, paripucchakatā, vinaye pakataññutā, vuḍḍhasevitā, kalyāṇamittatā, sappāyakathāti ime cha dhamme.
「有力量」:即具足能摧破敌对者的力量,故称有力量者。「善持武器」:即已备好弓箭等武器。由于有勇士和随从勇士等众人,故称「有眷属」。「彼」:指如上所述的那人。因有力量、善持武器、有眷属这三者,盗贼从远处望见便会逃走。「作无义者」:因障碍正确的行道方式,依前文所说之理,是作无义者。「六法」:即多闻、遍问、精通律学、增广胜解、有善知识、作有益交谈这六种法。正如多闻等有助于断除掉举与悔恨,在此处,多闻等同样被用来断除疑。如同善知识等五法能对治,故应知当随顺每一种烦恼的对治方法来亲近。由于疑是以不行正道的相状为门,只会助长邪行道,因此断除疑即是度脱恶行的方法,所以经文说‘度脱了恶行旷野’等。显示巴利原文
Balavāti paccatthikavidhamanasamatthena balena balavā. Sajjāvudhoti sannaddhadhanuādiāvudho. Sūravīrasevakajanavasena saparivāro. Tanti yathāvuttaṃ purisaṃ. Balavantatāya, sajjāvudhatāya, saparivāratāya ca corā dūratova disvā palāyeyyuṃ. Anatthakārikāti sammāpaṭipattiyā vibandhakaraṇato vuttanayena anatthakārikā. Cha dhammeti bahussutatā, paripucchakatā, vinaye pakataññutā, adhimokkhabahulatā, kalyāṇamittatā, sappāyakathāti ime cha dhamme. Yathā bāhusaccādīni uddhaccakukkuccassa pahānāya saṃvattanti, evaṃ vicikicchāya pīti idhāpi bahussutatādayo gahitā. Kalyāṇamittatā sappāyakathā viya pañcannaṃ, tasmā tassa tassa anucchavikasevanatā veditabbā. Sammāpaṭipattiyā appaṭipattinimittatāmukhena vicikicchā micchāpaṭipattimeva paribrūhetīti tassā pahānaṃ duccaritavidhūnanūpāyoti āha ‘‘duccaritakantāraṃ nittharitvā’’tiādi.
225 「欢悦」,名为初生的喜,它也就是某种程度的欢喜状态,故说「欢悦生起,即欢喜的样子生起」。所谓「喜悦者」:指依达到遍满状态的喜而成为喜悦的人。这种喜,由于自身具有向外扩展的特性,以及能生起由它为因的殊胜色法,便震动全身,以遍满为特征,这便是喜的生起。「与喜俱」:此处省略了后面的词,即喜;那是什么呢?是‘意’。其意为喜之意,故称「喜意」,指这位喜意者。为显明这仅是那个意思,故说「喜相应心者」。这里的「身」,指名身,而非仅指受等三蕴,故说「名身轻安」,意即此处的两种轻安都因喜的力量而得宁静。「远尘恼」:意为已断除掉举等烦恼尘垢。通过前述的前分修习,当他领受心所法之乐时,由这种乐所生的殊胜色法触身,也感受身乐,故说「感受身乐及心所法乐」。通过这句,即显示巴利原文
225.Pāmojjaṃ nāma taruṇapīti, sā kathañcipi tuṭṭhāvatthāti āha ‘‘pāmojjaṃ jāyatīti tuṭṭhākāro jāyatī’’ti. Tuṭṭhassāti okkantikabhāvappattāya pītiyā vasena tuṭṭhassa. Attano savipphārikatāya, attasamuṭṭhānapaṇītarūpuppattiyā ca sakalasarīraṃ khobhayamānā pharaṇalakkhaṇā pīti jāyati. Pītisahitaṃ pīti uttarapadalopena, kiṃ pana taṃ ? Mano. Pīti mano etassāti pītimano, tassa pītimanassa. Tayidaṃ atthamattameva dassento ‘‘pītisampayuttacittassā’’ti āha. Kāyoti idha arūpakalāpo adhippeto, na vedanādikkhandhattayamevāti āha ‘‘nāmakāyo passambhatī’’ti, passaddhidvayassa pītivasenettha passambhanaṃ adhippetaṃ. Vigatadarathoti pahīnauddhaccādikilesadaratho. Vuttappakārāya pubbabhāgabhāvanāya vasena cetasikasukhaṃ paṭisaṃvedentoyeva taṃsamuṭṭhānapaṇītarūpaphuṭṭhasarīratāya kāyikampi sukhaṃ vedetīti āha ‘‘kāyikampi cetasikampi sukhaṃ vedayatī’’ti. Imināti ‘‘sukhaṃ paṭisaṃvedetī’’ti evaṃ vuttena. Saṃkilesapakkhato nikkhantattā, paṭhamajjhānapakkhikattā ca nekkhammasukhena. Sukhitassāti sukhino.
初禅论的解释显示巴利原文
Paṭhamajjhānakathāvaṇṇanā
226 “心入定”这一句,既从近行定也从安止定的角度,说明心的定。既然如此,“已离诸欲……乃至……已说”等开示,又有何用意?因此(注疏)说“已离诸欲……等已经说过了”。其中的“为示上分殊胜”,是为了显示应超越初禅等而证入更上层次的殊胜。因为若未证得近行定,便无法证得初禅等殊胜。从欢悦生起等因果相续来看,第二禅等的证得也是如此,如同“行道智见清净”对于第二道等的证得一样,应如此理解。“彼定”:根据“乐者,心入定”这一普遍之说,是指具有安止定特征的那个定。“为示差别”:是为了显示第二禅等之间的差别,以及神通等之间的差别。“所作”:如同花从母胎中被制造出来,故称为“所作”。从“所作”生起的身体即是“所作身”,它所依止的是四种相续的色聚。虽然名身也同样因远离所生的喜乐而得到滋润,但由于此处提到“遍满”等词,故指的是色身,因此说“此所作身”。“遍满”:即令喜乐遍满全身。由禅那所生的喜乐,使所作身变得湿润,遍及一切处,除去粗涩,故用“湿润”等词。这里的“遍满”显示巴利原文
226. ‘‘Cittaṃ samādhiyatī’’ti etena upacāravasenapi appanāvasenapi cittassa samādhānaṃ kathitaṃ. Evaṃ sante ‘‘so vivicceva kāmehī’’tiādikā desanā kimatthiyāti āha ‘‘so vivicceva kāmehi…pe… vutta’’nti. Tattha uparivisesadassanatthanti paṭhamajjhānādiuparivattabbavisesadassanatthaṃ. Na hi upacārasamādhisamadhigamena vinā paṭhamajjhānādiviseso samadhigantuṃ sakkā. Pāmojjuppādādīhi kāraṇaparamparā dutiyajjhānādisamadhigamepi icchitabbāva paṭipadāñāṇadassanavisuddhi viya dutiyamaggādisamadhigameti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tassa samādhinoti ‘‘sukhino cittaṃ samādhiyatī’’ti evaṃ sādhāraṇavasena vutto yo appanālakkhaṇo, tassa samādhino. Pabhedadassanatthanti dutiyajjhānādivibhāgassa ceva abhiññādivibhāgassa ca pabhedadassanatthaṃ. Karo vuccati pupphasambhavaṃ gabbhāsaye karīyatīti katvā, karato jāto kāyo karajakāyo, tadupasanissayo catusantatirūpasamudāyo. Kāmaṃ nāmakāyopi vivekajena pītisukhena tathāladdhupakāro, ‘‘abhisandetī’’tiādivacanato pana rūpakāyo idhādhippetoti āha ‘‘imaṃ karajakāya’’nti. Abhisandetīti abhisandanaṃ karoti. Taṃ pana jhānamayena pītisukhena karajakāyassa tintabhāvāpādanaṃ, sabbatthakameva lūkhabhāvāpanayananti āha ‘‘temetī’’tiādi, tayidaṃ abhisandanaṃ atthato yathāvuttapītisukhasamuṭṭhānehi paṇītarūpehi kāyassa parippharaṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Parisandetī’’tiādīsupi eseva nayo. Sabbaṃ etassa atthīti sabbavā, tassa sabbāvato. Avayavāvayavisambandhe avayavini sāmivacananti avayavīvisayo sabba-saddo, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘sabbakoṭṭhāsavato’’ti. Aphuṭaṃnāma na hoti yattha yattha kammajarūpaṃ, tattha tattha cittajarūpassa abhibyāpanato. Tenāha ‘‘upādinnakasantatī’’tiādi.
227 “善巧”:即善巧。此处善巧,应理解为能够调和沐浴粉末并捏之成团的能力,故说“能……”等。“kaṃsa”一词,在“以大金钵”等经文中指金子。显示巴利原文
227.Chekoti kusalo. Taṃ panassa kosallaṃ nhāniyacuṇṇānaṃ sannane piṇḍīkaraṇe ca samatthatāvasena veditabbanti āha ‘‘paṭibalo’’tiādi. Kaṃsa-saddo ‘‘mahatiyā kaṃsapātiyā’’tiādīsu suvaṇṇe āgato.
“犹如被击打的金属”等经文中,是指人工金属;某些处仅为假名施设,如“名优波堪萨王亦为大堪萨之子”等。而此处则泛指一切金属,故说“以任何金属所制之器皿”。“随滋润”:即依于水的润泽,以渗透的方式遍入。“被滋润所遍”:因水润泽而遍及,一切处皆被触及,故内外全为滋润所触,这便说明了彻底湿透的状态。“而不漏泄”:此句是说虽已湿透,却仍坚固密实,故说“非一滴一滴地……”等。显示巴利原文
‘‘Kaṃso upahato yathā’’tiādīsu (dha. pa. 134) kittimalohe, katthaci paṇṇattimatte ‘‘upakaṃso nāma rājāpi mahākaṃsassa atrajo’’tiādi, [jā. aṭṭha. 4.10 ghaṭapaṇḍitajātakavaṇṇanāyaṃ (atthato samānaṃ)] idha pana yattha katthaci loheti āha ‘‘yena kenaci lohena katabhājane’’ti. Snehānugatāti udakasinehena anupavisanavasena gatā upagatā. Snehaparetāti udakasinehena parito gatā samantato phuṭṭhā, tato eva santarabāhirā phuṭṭhā sinehena, etena sabbaso udakena temitabhāvamāha. ‘‘Na ca paggharaṇī’’ti etena tintassapi tassa ghanathaddhabhāvaṃ vadati. Tenāha ‘‘na ca binduṃ bindu’’ntiādi.
第二禅论的解释显示巴利原文
Dutiyajjhānakathāvaṇṇanā
229 「涌出」:因为水从各处水脉在此处或彼处涌出,故称‘涌出’。拥有涌出之水的地方,便名为「有涌出之水」。「涌出水」:如同于河岸挖掘的井一般,是涌生出的水。「上涌之水」:指依靠持续水流而向上涌出的水。为何此处只采纳有涌出之水的湖,而不取其他呢?因此解释说:「因为从下方上涌之水……」等。由于水势下落与泡沫的作用,且应论及水沫层。「善静止」:因无扰动而静止,意即极为清澈。其余文义,如前面所说「遍满」等。显示巴利原文
229. Tāhi tāhi udakasirāhi ubbhijjatīti ubbhidaṃ, ubbhidaṃ udakaṃ etassāti ubbhidodako. Ubbhinnaudakoti nadītīre khatakūpako viya ubbhijjanakaudako. Uggacchanakaudakoti dhārāvasena uṭṭhahanaudako. Kasmā panettha ubbhidodakova rahado gahito, na itaroti āha ‘‘heṭṭhā uggacchanaudakañhī’’tiādi. Dhārānipātapubbuḷakehīti dhārānipātehi udakapubbuḷakehi ca, ‘‘pheṇapaṭalehi cā’’ti vattabbaṃ. Sannisinnamevāti aparikkhobhatāya niccalameva, suppasannamevāti adhippāyo. Sesanti ‘‘abhisandetī’’tiādikaṃ.
第三禅论的解释显示巴利原文
Tatiyajjhānakathāvaṇṇanā
231 「青莲花」:指青莲花丛。于白、红、青之中:即在青莲花中,谓白青莲、红青莲、青青莲。因总称之词,无论哪种青莲花,均统摄为青莲花。「百叶」:此处的「百」字含有多义,如「价值百金」等用法,故也包含数百瓣的莲花。然而,世间将红莲花称为paduma,将白莲花称为puṇḍarīka。为显示从顶端到根部皆由水滋润而生起等,故说「水生」。此处,青莲花等是业生身的比喻,水是第三禅之乐的比喻。显示巴利原文
231.Uppalānīti uppalagacchāni. Setarattanīlesūti uppalesu, setuppalarattuppalanīluppalesūti attho. Yaṃ kiñci uppalaṃ uppalameva sāmaññagahaṇato . Satapattanti ettha sata-saddo bahupariyāyo ‘‘satagghī’’tiādīsu viya, tena anekasatapattassapi saṅgaho siddho hoti. Loke pana ‘‘rattaṃ padumaṃ, setaṃ puṇḍarīka’’ntipi vuccati. Yāva aggā, yāva ca mūlā udakena abhisandanādisambhavadassanatthaṃ udakānuggataggahaṇaṃ. Idha uppalādīni viya karajakāyo, udakaṃ viya tatiyajjhānasukhaṃ.
第四禅那的论释显示巴利原文
Catutthajjhānakathāvaṇṇanā
233 因为「以清净的心」指的是第四禅心,而此心由于远离贪等随烦恼,无随烦恼、无垢染,故说「清净」即无随烦恼之义。然而,正是以这种清净为殊胜缘,才有了殊胜的活动状态——遍净,犹如黄金因打磨而焕发光辉,所以说「遍净」应理解为光洁之义。这「遍净」也就是洁净。为了显示温的遍满,即显示温暖遍满之义。意思是:如果没有殊胜的温的遍满,则不可能生起,因此说「在那一刹那……变得强盛」。禅修者的业生身如同衣服,应视为被类似温敷的第四禅乐所遍满,因为业生身被其所浸润。第四禅则当视为如同男人的身体,因为它是温敷处之乐的所依,所以有「因此」等说。此处应知,「以清净的心」句中,是以「心」这一词而说禅那之乐,从而说「如温敷之第四禅乐」。难道第四禅中没有乐吗?确实没有,但由于此处的舍具有寂静的自性,所以称为「乐」。因而《破迷论》中说:「然而,舍因为寂静,故被称为乐。」显示巴利原文
233. Yasmā ‘‘parisuddhena cetasā’’ti catutthajjhānacittamāha, tañca rāgādiupakkilesāpagamanato nirupakkilesaṃ nimmalaṃ, tasmā āha ‘‘nirupakkilesaṭṭhena parisuddha’’nti. Yasmā pana pārisuddhiyā eva paccayavisesena pavattiviseso pariyodātatā suvaṇṇassa nighaṃsanena pabhassaratā viya, tasmā āha ‘‘pabhassaraṭṭhena pariyodātanti veditabba’’nti. Idanti odātavacanaṃ. Utupharaṇatthanti uṇhautuno pharaṇadassanatthaṃ. Utupharaṇaṃ na hoti savisesanti adhippāyo, tenāha ‘‘taṅkhaṇa…pe… balavaṃ hotī’’ti. Vatthaṃ viya karajakāyoti yogino karajakāyo vatthaṃ viya daṭṭhabbo utupharaṇasadisena catutthajjhānasukhena pharitabbattā. Purisassa sarīraṃ viya catutthajjhānaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ utupharaṇaṭṭhāniyassa sukhassa nissayabhāvato, tenāha ‘‘tasmā’’tiādi. Ettha ca ‘‘parisuddhena cetasā’’ti ceto gahaṇena jhānasukhaṃ vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ, tenāha ‘‘utupharaṇaṃ viya catutthajjhānasukha’’nti. Nanu ca catutthajjhāne sukhameva natthīti? Saccaṃ natthi sātalakkhaṇasantasabhāvattā panettha upekkhā ‘‘sukha’’nti adhippetā. Tena vuttaṃ sammohavinodaniyaṃ ‘‘upekkhā pana santattā, sukhamicceva bhāsitā’’ti. (Vibha. aṭṭha. 232; visuddhi. 2.644; paṭi. ma. 105, mahāni. aṭṭha. 27)
不应将“非无色禅那获得者”理解为没有获得无色禅那,因为二者不相离故,所以论中说“不”等。其中,以十四种方式——即遍顺、遍逆、遍顺逆、禅那顺、禅那逆、禅那顺逆、禅那跳跃、遍跳跃、禅那遍跳跃、支跳跃、所缘跳跃、支所缘跳跃、支确立、所缘确立——来说明。即便在诸禅那中已有转向等自在,但为显示引发神通时必定需要这种自在,因此说“因为不由……不能获得”。其道理便是:若不依无色定则不能成就,故当知于此,它们是不相离的。若如此,为何经中未列出无色禅呢?因特别以属于色界的第四禅作为一切神通的基础,便将无色禅含摄于一切神通中而说,并非因为无色界禅在此处没有作用,所以论中说“应当引出无色禅那来讲述”。显示巴利原文
Na arūpajjhānalābhīti na veditabbo avinābhāvato, tenāha ‘‘na hī’’tiādi. Tattha cuddasahākārehīti kasiṇānulomato, kasiṇapaṭilomato, kasiṇānulomapaṭilomato, jhānānulomato, jhānapaṭilomato, jhānānulomapaṭilomato, jhānukkantikato, kasiṇukkantikato, jhānakasiṇukkantikato, aṅgasaṅkantito, ārammaṇasaṅkantito, aṅgārammaṇasaṅkantito, aṅgavavatthānato , ārammaṇavavatthānatoti imehi cuddasahākārehi. Satipi jhānesu āvajjanādivasībhāve ayaṃ vasībhāvo abhiññānibbattane ekantena icchitabboti dassento āha ‘‘na hi…pe… hotī’’ti. Svāyaṃ nayo arūpasamāpattīhi vinā na ijjhatīti tāyapettha avinābhāvo veditabbo. Yadi evaṃ kasmā pāḷiyaṃ na āruppajjhānāni āgatānīti? Visesato ca rūpāvacaracatutthajjhānapādakattā sabbābhiññānaṃ tadantogadhā katvā tāya desitā, na arūpāvacarajjhānānaṃ idha anupayogato, tenāha ‘‘arūpajjhānāni āharitvā kathetabbānī’’ti.
观智的论释显示巴利原文
Vipassanāñāṇakathāvaṇṇanā
234 “其余的”是指像“如这些持之心”等经文中应当述及的内容。能了知所应知的,称为“智”;而对于这所应知,当下亲见此所应知,则称为“见”。智即是见,故称“智见”。此“智见”一词,在教法中其他地方通常用于特胜之智。为以提取义理的方式显示所有这些,所以说“智见者亦称道智”等。由于观智对三界诸行以无常等方式了知,从坏灭随观开始,现前地亲见它们,因此在这里说:“但此处……称作智见”。显示巴利原文
234.Sesanti ‘‘evaṃ samāhite citte’’tiādīsu vattabbaṃ. Ñeyyaṃ jānātīti ñāṇaṃ, taṃ pana ñeyyaṃ paccakkhaṃ katvā passatīti dassanaṃ, ñāṇameva dassananti ñāṇadassanaṃ. Tayidaṃ ñāṇadassanapadaṃ sāsane aññattha ñāṇavisese nirūḷhaṃ, taṃ sabbaṃ atthuddhāravasena dassento ‘‘ñāṇadassananti maggañāṇampi vuccatī’’tiādimāha. Yasmā vipassanāñāṇaṃ tebhūmakasaṅkhāre aniccādito jānāti, bhaṅgānupassanato paṭṭhāya paccakkhato ca te passati tasmā āha ‘‘idha pana…pe… ñāṇadassananti vutta’’nti.
“引导”:按照前面所说的方法,在具足八支的心中,依观的次第生起后,将心推向观,所以说“让……作观”。这种面向观,即是心的倾向观等,这在《梵网》中已经说过。以饭团和豆羹积聚,故称“饭团豆羹积聚”。“无常法”是因为会坏灭而具有不恒常的自性。“为了除去臭秽”是为了除去身体上的臭秽。“应涂身之法”是指需要被涂抹的性质。通过涂抹,身体中由汗垢、胆汁、痰等诸界的激荡、沉重与臭秽便得以消失。“大按摩”为增益力士等的手臂等而有利益,所以此处说“以小按摩”。“应揉按之法”是指需要被揉按的性质。“破坏并离散”:是说因无常而破坏,已破坏之物不能达成任何用处而离散。“有色”:此指那些以时节和食物为缘而生起的色法,这是这里想要表达的意思,因此论中说“以六句说集”。这是由于亲近才有这种作用。而形色的成就,也是由生起那样的色所造成的,所以涂身、揉按这些句子也说是“集”。如此,通过九句恰当地显示了于身体随观集与灭之法。而且,观智依止于第六处,故称为“所依”。“被结缚”:因为如果没有这个就不能生起,并且被称为“身”的色法所结缚。显示巴利原文
Abhinīharatīti vuttanayena aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgate tasmiṃ citte vipassanākkamena jāte vipassanābhimukhaṃ peseti, tenāha ‘‘vipassanā…pe… karotī’’ti. Tadabhimukhabhāvo eva hissa tanninnatādikaratā. Vuttoyeva brahmajāle. Odanakummāsehi upacīyatīti odanakummāsūpacayo. Aniccadhammoti pabhaṅgutāya addhuvasabhāvo. Duggandhavighātatthāyāti sarīre duggandhassa vigamāya. Ucchādanadhammoti ucchādetabbatāsabhāvo. Ucchādanena hi sarīre sedagūthapittasemhādidhātukkhobhagarubhāvaduggandhānaṃ apagamo hoti. Mahāsambāhanaṃ mallādīnaṃ bāhuvaḍḍhanādiatthaṃ hotīti ‘‘khuddakasambāhanenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Parimaddanadhammoti parimadditabbatāsabhāvo. Bhijjati ceva vikirati cāti aniccatāvasena bhijjati ca bhinnañca kiñci payojanaṃ asādhentaṃ vippakiṇṇañca hoti. Rūpīti attano paccayabhūtena utuāhāralakkhaṇena rūpavāti ayamettha attho icchitoti āha ‘‘chahi padehi samudayo kathito’’ti. Saṃsagge hi ayamīkāro. Saṇṭhānasampādanampi tathārūparūpuppādaneneva hotīti ucchādanaparimaddanapadehipi samudayo kathitoti vuttaṃ. Evaṃ navahi yathārahaṃ kāye samudayavayadhammānupassitā dassitā. Nissitañca chaṭṭhavatthunissitattā vipassanāñāṇassa. Paṭibaddhañca tena vinā appavattanato, kāyasaññitānaṃ rūpadhammānaṃ ārammaṇakaraṇato ca.
235 “善照耀”(Suṭṭhu bhāti obhāsatī)意为很好地照耀、发光,故称为“清净”(subho)。因宝石即使仅凭光泽的成就也是美好的,所以说“清净即美妙”。“出自库鲁温达”等:即使宝石有种类上的差别,也以矿藏的清净为根本,所以说“从清净的矿藏所生起”。通过去除瑕疵而完成加工,所以说“善作加工,已除去石块和砂砾”。因其表面的细腻而透明,并非指聚集体,所以说“透明即薄皮”,由此说“极清净”。“由洗涤、穿孔等”:对于四种宝石,是通过洗涤,以及为了去除黑斑等和为了穿线而进行的穿孔。加热、使其柔滑等则包含在“等”字中。“色泽成就”指线的色泽成就。宝石比喻业生身,应当如此观察。穿入的线比喻观智,因为它安住于其中而不进入。有眼之人比喻获得观智的比丘,因为他正确地看见。“以它们为所缘”即以色法为所缘。要知道,通过“触第五心及心所法”的摄取而执取的法,也包含在观的心生起之中。如此,由于它们以观智为归趣,“穿入的线如观智”的说法才没有矛盾。然而,这些法是对智显现,还是对个人显现呢?是对智显现。但因为对智显现,所以对个人来说也就称为已显现。而所谓“对显示巴利原文
235. Suṭṭhu bhāti obhāsatīti subho, pabhāsampattiyāpi maṇino bhaddatāti āha ‘‘subhoti sundaro’’ti. Kuruvindajāti ādijātivisesopi maṇino ākaraparisuddhimūlako evāti āha ‘‘parisuddhākarasamuṭṭhito’’ti dosanīharaṇavasena parikammanipphattīti āha ‘‘suṭṭhu kataparikammo apanītapāsāṇasakkharo’’ti. Chaviyā saṇhabhāvenassa acchatā, na saṅghātassāti āha ‘‘acchoti tanucchavī’’ti, tenāha ‘‘vippasanno’’ti. Dhovanavedhanādīhīti catūsu pāsāṇesu dhovanena ceva kāḷakādiapaharaṇatthāya suttena āvunanatthāya ca vijjhanena. Tāpasaṇhakaraṇādīnaṃ saṅgaho ādi-saddena. Vaṇṇasampattinti suttassa vaṇṇasampattiṃ. Maṇi viya karajakāyo paccavekkhitabbato. Āvutasuttaṃ viya vipassanāñāṇaṃ anupavisitvā ṭhitattā. Cakkhumā puriso viya vipassanālābhī bhikkhu sammadeva dassanato. Tadārammaṇānanti rūpadhammārammaṇānaṃ. Phassapañcamakacittacetasikaggahaṇena gahitadhammāpi vipassanācittuppādapariyāpannā evāti veditabbaṃ. Evañhi tesaṃ vipassanāñāṇagatikattā ‘‘āvutasuttaṃ viya vipassanāñāṇa’’nti vacanaṃ avirodhitaṃ hoti. Kiṃ panete ñāṇassa āvi bhavanti, udāhu puggalassāti? Ñāṇassa. Tassa pana āvibhāvattā puggalassa āvibhūtā nāma honti. Ñāṇassāti ca paccavekkhaṇāñāṇassa.
观智紧接在道智之后,因此,依五种世间神通之后、第六神通之前的顺序,观智应当被讲述。即使如此,即令按照诸智的次第是这样,它在此处也并无间隔:在讲述五种世间神通时,如同在《希望经》等经中那样,第六神通应当被讲述,但观智并不具有神通的特相,因此在那些世间神通中间没有它的间隔。所以,由于在那里没有机会,就在此处,紧接在色界第四禅之后,便显示了观智。而且,“而”字是合集的意思,由此表明不仅是那个原因,还有这个原因:观智在此处被显示。“用天眼看见可怖之色”:这里也可以说“用神通变化出可怖之色后,用眼睛看见”,这样,对于得到了神通却没有遍知事相的人,会产生恐惧和害怕,就像住在高沙弥村的大象战士长老那样。各自证得的沙门果。因此,世尊说:显示巴利原文
Maggañāṇassa anantaraṃ, tasmā lokiyābhiññānaṃ parato chaṭṭhābhiññāya purato vattabbaṃ vipassanāñāṇaṃ. Evaṃ santepīti yadipāyaṃ ñāṇānupubbī, evaṃ santepi. Etassa antarāvāro natthīti pañcasu lokiyābhiññāsu kathitāsu ākaṅkheyyasuttādīsu (ma. ni. 1.65) viya chaṭṭhābhiññā kathetabbāti etassa anabhiññālakkhaṇassa vipassanāñāṇassa tāsaṃ antarāvāro na hoti. Tasmā tattha avasarābhāvato idheva rūpāvacaracatutthajjhānānantarameva dassitaṃ vipassanāñāṇaṃ. Yasmā cāti ca-saddo samuccayattho, tena na kevalaṃ tadeva, atha kho idampi kāraṇaṃ vipassanāñāṇassa idheva dassaneti imamatthaṃ dīpeti. Dibbena cakkhunā bheravampi rūpaṃ passatoti ettha ‘‘iddhividhañāṇena bheravaṃ rūpaṃ nimminitvā cakkhunā passato’’tipi vattabbaṃ, evampi abhiññālābhino apariññātavatthukassa bhayaṃ santāso uppajjati. Uccāvālikavāsi mahānāgattherassa viya. Pāṭiyekkaṃ sandiṭṭhikaṃ sāmaññaphalaṃ. Tenāha bhagavā –
每当以正思惟(sammasati)观照诸蕴(khandhānaṃ)的生灭(udayabbayaṃ),
他便获得喜与欢悦,那便是不死,为知者所了知。’等。(《法句经》374)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yato yato sammasati, khandhānaṃ udayabbayaṃ; Labhatī pītipāmojjaṃ, amataṃ taṃ vijānata’’ntiādi. (dha. pa. 374);
意所成神变智(manomayiddhiñāṇa)论之注释显示巴利原文
Manomayiddhiñāṇakathāvaṇṇanā
236-7 “由心所生成”是由神通心所生成的产物,包括手、脚等主要肢节,以及肘、膝等细部。“依形状”仅是依与莲瓣等相似的形状,而不是依能承受色法冲击的大种净色根。“于一切相状”指颜色、形状、部分特征等一切方面。这是就具足神通者而言。“唯为显示相似的体相”就是为了显示在形状、颜色、部分特征上都相似的体相。它“住于同类”,并非依靠神通而转成异类的形色。显示巴利原文
236-7.Manena nibbattitanti abhiññāmanena nibbattitaṃ. Hatthapādādi aṅgehi ca kapparajaṇṇuādi paccaṅgehi ca. Saṇṭhānavasenāti kamaladalādisadisasaṇṭhānamattavasena, na rūpābhighātārahabhūtappasādiindriyavasena. Sabbākārehīti vaṇṇasaṇṭhānaavayavavisesādisabbākārehi. Tena iddhimatā. Sadisabhāvadassanatthamevāti saṇṭhānatopi vaṇṇatopi avayavavisesatopi sadisabhāvadassanatthameva. Sajātiyaṃ ṭhito, na nāgiddhiyā aññajātirūpo.
神变智等论之注释显示巴利原文
Iddhividhañāṇādikakathāvaṇṇanā
239 正如善加揉捏的黏土等,神变智是变化作用的所依。显示巴利原文
239.Suparikammakatamattikādayoviya iddhividhañāṇaṃ vikubbanakiriyāya nissayabhāvato.
241 “乐”(sukha):即无困难、无辛苦之义。显示巴利原文
241.Sukhanti akicchena, akasirenāti attho.
243 “迟钝的、躺着仰卧的男孩”也被称为“年少”,故为简别而说“青年”。青年中也有不喜打扮、不爱装饰者,故再作简别而说“爱打扮者”等,因此才说“青年”等。如黑芝麻大小的点,称为黑芝麻痣,或黑斑;如芝麻大小的点,称为芝麻痣。所谓“残缺”,即指畸形。青春痘等,即是令面容不悦的痘。脸上存在的缺陷,称为“面过”,这也是表示相状之词,因为即使面部没有缺陷,也意在表示其显露出的相貌;或者,如同面部有缺陷时那样,面部无缺陷时,也依省略语而说为面过。而且,这里应依单数列举之理来理解,即面过、面过与面过(合而为一)。如此,“他人的十六种心变得明显”这句话才讲得通。显示巴利原文
243. Mando uttānaseyyakadārakopi ‘‘daharo’’ti vuccatīti tato visesanatthaṃ ‘‘yuvā’’ti vuttaṃ. Yuvāpi koci anicchanako amaṇḍanajātiko hotīti tato visesanatthaṃ ‘‘maṇḍanakajātiko’’tiādi vuttaṃ, tenāha ‘‘yuvāpīti’’ādi. Kāḷatilappamāṇā bindavo kāḷatilakāni kāḷā vā kammāsā, tilappamāṇā bindavo tilakāni. Vaṅgaṃ nāma viyaṅgaṃ. Yobbanapīḷakādayo mukhadūsipīḷakā. Mukhagato doso mukhadoso, lakkhaṇavacanañcetaṃ mukhe adosassāpi pākaṭabhāvassa adhippetattā. Yathā vā mukhe doso, evaṃ mukhe adosopi mukhadoso saralopena. Mukhadoso ca mukhadoso ca mukhadosoti ekasesanayenapettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Evañhi ‘‘paresaṃ soḷasavidhaṃ cittaṃ pākaṭaṃ hotī’’ti vacanaṃ samatthitaṃ hoti.
245 “以此宿住智之譬喻”:指在宿住智所显示的譬喻中。为了说明“当天所做的那些事”即使对于普通有情也大多清楚,所以特别提到“当天”。应当了知,通过提及当天他所到达的三个村庄,便已暗示:对于具有大愿等其他获得宿住智的人,他们在三有中所做的那些事,大多也是明显的。显示巴利原文
245.Pubbenivāsañāṇūpamāyanti pubbenivāsañāṇassa dassitaupamāyaṃ. Taṃ divasaṃ katakiriyā nāma pākatikasattassapi yebhuyyena pākaṭā hotīti dassanatthaṃ taṃdivasa-ggahaṇaṃ kataṃ. Taṃdivasagatagāmattaya-ggahaṇeneva mahābhinīhārehi aññesampi pubbenivāsañāṇalābhīnaṃ tīsu bhavesu katakiriyā yebhuyyena pākaṭā hotīti dīpitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
247 「辗转往来」:指因种种事务而从此处至彼处奔走的人。正如前面所说的宫殿譬喻,比丘的业生身也应当这样看待,因为安住于其中的人能看见应见的对象,这一成就源于有眼者证得了天眼。正如经中所说:「肉眼生起,是天眼的道路。」(《如是语》61)如同一个有眼的人,这位证得天眼而安住的比丘,由于能看见应见的对象,故如此说。如同进入房屋一般,进入这个有身之屋,这是指结生;如同从房屋出来一般,离开这个有身之屋,这是指死没。或者,在这里应当这样理解其含义。然而,「辗转往来之有情」,是指屡屡在轮回中流转的有情。而「在那里那里结生的有情」,则是指在那种生存状态中已出生、已成长的有情。这难道不是天眼智的论述吗?为什么此处说「于三有」,却把四蕴有也包含进来了呢?于是解释说「此……」等。其中,「此」指的是「于三有中结生之有情」这句话。这纯粹是教说的方便,完全是为了教说的方便,并不是因为天眼对在四蕴有中结生的有情不能显现。因为,如果说「除去无色有」或者「于二有」,教说就不容易让人明白、不易理解。显示巴利原文
247.Aparāparaṃ sañcaranteti taṃtaṃkiccavasena ito cito ca sañcarante. Yathāvuttapāsādoviya bhikkhuno karajakāyo daṭṭhabbo tattha patiṭṭhitassa daṭṭhabbadassanasiddhito. Cakkhumato hi dibbacakkhusamadhigamo. Yathāha ‘‘maṃsacakkhussa uppādo, maggo dibbassa cakkhuno’’ti (itivu. 61). Cakkhumā puriso viya ayameva dibbacakkhuṃ patvā ṭhito bhikkhu daṭṭhabbassa dassanato. Gehaṃ pavisantā viya etaṃ attabhāvagehaṃ okkamantā, upapajjantāti attho. Gehā nikkhamantā viya etasmā attabhāvagehato pakkantā, cavantāti attho. Evaṃ vā ettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Aparāparaṃ sañcaraṇakasattāti pana punappunaṃ saṃsāre paribbhamantā sattā. ‘‘Tattha tattha nibbattasattā’’ti pana iminā tasmiṃ bhave jātasaṃvaddhe satte vadati. Nanu cāyaṃ dibbacakkhuñāṇakathā, ettha kasmā ‘‘tīsu bhavesū’’ti catuvokārabhavassāpi saṅgaho katoti āha ‘‘idañcā’’tiādi. Tattha idanti ‘‘tīsu bhavesu nibbattasattāna’’nti idaṃ vacanaṃ. Desanāsukhatthamevāti kevalaṃ desanāsukhatthaṃ, na catuvokārabhave nibbattasattānaṃ dibbacakkhuno āvibhāvasabbhāvato. Na hi ‘‘ṭhapetvā arūpabhava’’nti vā ‘‘dvīsu bhavesū’’ti vā vuccamāne desanā sukhāvabodhā ca hotīti.
漏尽智的解说显示巴利原文
Āsavakkhayañāṇakathāvaṇṇanā
248 「以观为足处」:指作为观的近因、基础的事物。而观,也依观行者的差别分为三种。因为,大菩萨与辟支菩萨的观,是由思所成慧所增长,成为自生智;其余声闻的观,是由闻所成慧所增长,称为依他人教导而生。这种观,「除了非想非非想处,从其余色界或无色界禅那的某一种出定之后」等等,以许多种方式展开;或者依无色界为门,如于四界分别中所说的那样,依于那些界摄持之门中的某一种门,以许多种方式展开,这在《清净道论》中,是由种种理趣所阐明的。然而,对于大菩萨们来说,以二十四万亿十万为门而分别行相,用种种理趣去摄持那作为一切知智之所依止的圣道智立足处、作为前分智胎藏、达于圆熟的、极其深奥、极其微细、最为微细、不共于他人的观智,这种观智在注疏中被称为「大金刚智」。以它的生起作为分别,作为这二十四万亿十万分类之立足处而入定的、每日以二十四万亿十万为其数量的世尊所受用的等至,这些诸佛的观行,在《胜义宝函》对《清净道论》的注释中,已经简略地显示了出来。求义者应当从那里去了解,而这里,则是以声闻弟子显示巴利原文
248.Vipassanāpādakanti vipassanāya padaṭṭhānabhūtaṃ. Vipassanā ca tividhā vipassakapuggalabhedena. Mahābodhisattānañhi paccekabodhisattānañca vipassanā cintāmayañāṇasaṃvaddhitā sayambhuñāṇabhūtā, itaresaṃ sutamayañāṇasaṃvaddhitā paropadesasambhūtā nāma. Sā ‘‘ṭhapetvā nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ avasesarūpārūpajjhānānaṃ aññatarato vuṭṭhāyā’’tiādinā anekadhā, arūpamukhavasena catudhātuvavatthāne vuttānaṃ tesaṃ tesaṃ dhātupariggahamukhānañca aññataramukhavasena anekadhā ca visuddhimagge nānānayato vibhāvitā. Mahābodhisattānaṃ pana catuvīsatikoṭisatasahassamukhena pabhedagamanato nānānayaṃ sabbaññutañāṇasannissayassa ariyamaggañāṇassa adhiṭṭhānabhūtaṃ pubbabhāgañāṇagabbhaṃ gaṇhāpentaṃ pariṇataṃ gacchantaṃ paramagambhīraṃ saṇhasukhumataraṃ anaññasādhāraṇaṃ vipassanāñāṇaṃ hoti, yaṃ aṭṭhakathāsu ‘‘mahāvajirañāṇa’’nti vuccati. Yassa ca pavattivibhāgena catuvīsatikoṭisatasahassappabhedassa pādakabhāvena samāpajjiyamānā catuvīsatikoṭisatasahassasaṅkhyā devasikaṃ satthu vaḷañjanakasamāpattiyo vuccanti, svāyaṃ buddhānaṃ vipassanācāro paramatthamañjusāyaṃ visuddhimaggasaṃvaṇṇanāyaṃ (visuddhi. ṭī. 1.216) uddesato dassito. Atthikehi tato gahetabbo, idha pana sāvakānaṃ vipassanā adhippetā.
「为漏尽智」:以断除、灭尽诸漏故,漏尽即是圣道;于彼圣道之智,即是漏尽智;为令此智生起,故说「为了生起漏尽智」。此处诸漏灭尽,因此漏尽是指涅槃。「令尽」是指令恶法灭尽,所以「尽」是指道。然而,恶法灭尽若没有漏尽就不可能存在,因此在「于尽之智」这句话中,用「尽」这个词表达了漏尽,故说「于尽之智」等。已平息了诸恶,故称为沙门;因此,由漏尽而成为沙门,故又说「由漏尽而为沙门,此处指果」。由于漏的增长会令诸行增长,所以它离无为法极其遥远,因此在「远彼漏尽」这句话中,「漏尽」一词便是无为法的同义词,于是说「在漏尽中,此处说的是涅槃」。已破坏,也就是诸漏的刹那灭,这被称为「诸漏之尽」,这是义理上的连接。显示巴利原文
Āsavānaṃ khayañāṇāyāti āsavānaṃ khepanato samucchindanato āsavakkhayo, ariyamaggo, tattha ñāṇaṃ āsavānaṃ khayañāṇaṃ, tadatthaṃ tenāha ‘‘āsavānaṃ khayañāṇanibbattanatthāyā’’ti. Āsavā ettha khīyantīti āsavānaṃ khayo nibbānaṃ. Khepeti pāpadhammeti khayo, maggo. So pana pāpakkhayo āsavakkhayena vinā natthīti ‘‘khaye ñāṇa’’nti ettha khayaggahaṇena āsavakkhayo vuttoti āha ‘‘khaye ñāṇa’’ntiādi. Samitapāpo samaṇoti katvā āsavānaṃ khīṇattā samaṇo nāma hotīti āha ‘‘āsavānaṃ khayā samaṇo hotīti ettha phala’’nti. Āsavavaḍḍhiyā saṅkhāre vaḍḍhento visaṅkhārato suvidūravidūroti ‘‘ārā so āsavakkhayā’’ti ettha āsavakkhayapadaṃ visaṅkhārādhivacananti āha ‘‘āsavakkhayāti ettha nibbānaṃ vutta’’nti. Bhaṅgoti āsavānaṃ khaṇanirodho ‘‘āsavānaṃ khayo’’ti vuttoti yojanā.
「此是苦」:这是为了显示那时比丘亲证而把握了苦圣谛的状态。「仅此是苦」:是为了显示他有限度而把握的状态。「至此更无多余」:是为了显示他无余把握的状态。因此,说「一切苦谛」等。透过自性相通达:即通过对所谓自性之相的不痴而通达,也就是不痴通达。如是,当该智生起之后,对于苦谛的自相、分限等的分别便不再有痴,其生起即是如此,所以说「如实了知」。苦是从这里集起的,所以称为苦集,也就是渴爱,因此说「及彼」等。到达彼处:以那涅槃作为道所缘缘意义上的因,依它而「到达」,这是将具有此两者的到达,视为此两者的到达而说。或者,「到达」就是到达之因。「不转起」:是不转起之因相,或者说,它们在这里不再生起,故名不转起,也就是涅槃。彼,指苦的灭。「令完全到达」:就是以作证的方式,完全地到达。显示巴利原文
‘‘Idaṃ dukkha’’nti dukkhassa ariyasaccassa tadā bhikkhuno paccakkhato gahitabhāvadassanaṃ. ‘‘Ettakaṃ dukkha’’nti tassa paricchijjaggahitabhāvadassanaṃ. ‘‘Na ito bhiyyo’’ti tassa anavasesetvā gahitabhāvadassanaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘sabbampi dukkhasacca’’ntiādi. Sarasalakkhaṇapaṭivedhenāti sabhāvasaṅkhātassa lakkhaṇassa asammohato paṭivijjhanena, asammohapaṭivedhoti ca. Yathā tasmiṃ ñāṇe pavatte pacchā dukkhasaccassa sarūpādiparicchede sammoho na hoti, tathā pavatti, tenāha ‘‘yathābhūtaṃ pajānātī’’ti. Dukkhaṃ samudeti etasmāti dukkhasamudayo, taṇhāti āha ‘‘tassa cā’’tiādi. Yaṃ ṭhānaṃ patvāti yaṃ nibbānaṃ maggassa ārammaṇapaccayaṭṭhena kāraṇabhūtaṃ āgamma, ‘‘patvā’’ti ca tadubhayavato puggalassa patti tadubhayassa patti viyāti katvā vuttaṃ. Patvāti vā pāpuṇanahetu. Appavattīti appavattinimittaṃ, te vā nappavattanti etthāti appavatti, nibbānaṃ. Tassāti dukkhanirodhassa. Sampāpakanti sacchikaraṇavasena sammadeva pāpakaṃ.
「依烦恼之力」:即依于称为漏的烦恼之力。因为诸漏是苦圣谛的同义语,被包含在苦圣谛中,而其余诸谛也有苦集等同义语,所以宣说了「依于同义」。「显示诸谛」:这是义理上的连接。而这里只取诸漏,是因为一开始所说的即是「为漏尽智」。诚然,如「心从欲漏而解脱」等,是以漏解脱为首,来说明一切烦恼的解脱。这里讲解了「如实了知此是苦」等混合之道,所以说「结合观,宣说了达到顶点的道」。「于知者、见者」,以此宣说了遍知、作证、修习的现观。「解脱」,以此宣说了断的现观,所以又说「以此显示道的刹那」。或者,「于知者、见者」是在宣说原因。以知为因、以见为因,心便从欲漏解脱,这是义理上的连接。因为诸法虽是俱生的,但缘与缘所生的性质,可藉由俱生这一角度而获得。这里,通过取「有漏」,如同对有贪一样,对有见也同样被完全止灭,所以见漏也被包含在内,应当这样理解。「以生已尽等语句」:彼,即省察智。「地」:即生起之处。显示巴利原文
Kilesavasenāti āsavasaṅkhātakilesavasena. Yasmā āsavānaṃ dukkhasaccapariyāyo tappariyāpannattā, sesasaccānañca taṃsamudayādipariyāyo atthi, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘pariyāyato’’ti. Dassento saccānīti yojanā. Āsavānaṃyeva cettha gahaṇaṃ ‘‘āsavānaṃ khayañāṇāyā’’ti āraddhattā. Tathā hi ‘‘kāmāsavāpi cittaṃ vimuccatī’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.248; ma. ni. 1.433; ma. ni. 3.19) āsavavimuttisīseneva sabbakilesavimutti vuttā. ‘‘Idaṃ dukkhanti yathābhūtaṃ pajanātī’’tiādinā missakamaggo idha kathitoti ‘‘saha vipassanāya koṭippattaṃ maggaṃ kathesī’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Jānato passato’’ti iminā pariññāsacchikiriyābhāvanābhisamayā vuttā. ‘‘Vimuccatī’’ti iminā pahānābhisamayo vuttoti āha ‘‘iminā maggakkhaṇaṃ dassetī’’ti. ‘‘Jānato passato’’ti vā hetuniddesoyaṃ. Jānanahetu dassanahetu kāmāsavāpi cittaṃ vimuccatīti yojanā. Dhammānañhi samānakālikānampi paccayappaccayuppannatā sahajātakoṭiyā labbhatīti. Bhavāsavaggahaṇena cettha bhavarāgassa viya bhavadiṭṭhiyāpi samavarodhoti diṭṭhāsavassāpi saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Khīṇā jātītiādīhi padehi. Tassāti paccavekkhaṇāñāṇassa. Bhūminti pavattiṭṭhānaṃ.
基于什么意图而提出「然彼之何者」等的问难呢?为开示其意,而说了「非彼过去之生」等。其中,「并非他过去之生经由道修习而尽」才是意思所在。之所以这样说,是因为「它先前就已经尽了」。也不是他未来的生已经尽了,这是义理上的连接。而说「非未来」,是通过取「未来」的共相,以巧说来问难,因此又说「于未来中并无努力」。然而,这里所指的其实是未来中那一特定的部分,而对于它的灭尽,努力也是可以有的,所以又说「而凡属于道……」等。说「于一分有、四分有、五分有」——也就是三有,是以先前所说的道理,来显示生已完全灭尽、无有余的状态。「彼」指如前所说的生。「彼」即漏尽比丘。显示巴利原文
Yenādhippāyena ‘‘katamā panassā’’tiādinā codanā katā, taṃ vivaranto ‘‘na tāvassā’’tiādimāha . Tattha na tāvassa atītā jāti khīṇā maggabhāvanāyāti adhippāyo. Tattha kāraṇamāha ‘‘pubbeva khīṇattā’’ti. Na anāgatā assa jāti khīṇāti yojanā. Na anāgatāti ca anāgatabhāvasāmaññaṃ gahetvā lesena codeti, tenāha ‘‘anāgate vāyāmābhāvato’’ti. Anāgataviseso panettha adhippeto, tassa ca khepane vāyāmopi labbhateva, tenāha ‘‘yā pana maggassā’’tiādi. Ekacatupañcavokārabhavesūti bhavattayaggahaṇaṃ vuttanayena anavasesato jātiyā khīṇabhāvadassanatthaṃ. Tanti yathāvuttaṃ jātiṃ. Soti khīṇāsavo bhikkhu.
「梵行住」:若依增上义解释,即指圣道梵行的产生,故说「已住」。关于「正见于四谛中,依遍知等作用成就而转起时,正思惟等亦于苦谛中转起,随顺遍知现观;于其余诸谛,其断现观等转起,实为明显」:当正见在四谛中,以遍知等作用成就的方式转起时,正思惟等也在苦谛中转起,并随顺遍知现观;而在其他谛中,它们的断现观等转起则十分明显。因此说「于四谛中以四道,依遍知、断、作证、修习而行」。又「于苦灭、苦灭之道中,遍知、作证、修习,正是为遍断苦集」,故说「以彼彼道,所应断之烦恼已断」,意即:以各各之道,该断的烦恼已断除。关于「至如此状态者」:所谓「至如此」,是指「这些行相如此」、「彼之自性为如此状态」,为表此义而说。而「这些行相」,此中正是以圣道作用为体的遍知等,故说「如是,成办十六种作用之状态」。因为修行者省察圣道时,那些遍知等由于圣道的威力而变得明显,现前安立。在遍知等当中,断正是最主要的,因为显示巴利原文
Brahmacariyavāso nāma ukkaṭṭhaniddesena maggabrahmacariyassa nibbattanaṃ evāti āha ‘‘parivuttha’’nti. Sammādiṭṭhiyā catūsu saccesu pariññādikiccasādhanavasena pavattamānāya sammāsaṅkappādīnampi dukkhasacce pariññābhisamayānuguṇā pavatti, itarasaccesu ca nesaṃ pahānābhisamayādipavatti pākaṭā eva, tena vuttaṃ ‘‘catūsu saccesu catūhi maggehi pariññāpahānasacchikiriyābhāvanāvasenā’’ti. Dukkhanirodhamaggesu pariññāsacchikiriyābhāvanā yāvadeva samudayappahānatthāyāti āha ‘‘tena tena maggena pahātabbakilesā pahīnā’’ti. Itthattāyāti ime pakārā itthaṃ, tabbhāvo itthattaṃ, tadatthanti vuttaṃ hoti. Te pana pakārā ariyamaggabyāpārabhūtā pariññādayo idhādhippetāti āha ‘‘evaṃ soḷasakiccabhāvāyā’’ti. Te hi maggaṃ paccavekkhato maggānubhāvena pākaṭā hutvā upaṭṭhahanti, pariññādīsu ca pahānameva padhānaṃ tadatthattā itaresanti āha ‘‘kilesakkhayabhāvāya vā’’ti. Pahīnakilesapaccavekkhaṇavasena vā evaṃ vuttaṃ. Dutiyavikappe itthattāyāti nissakke sampadānavacananti āha ‘‘itthabhāvato’’ti. Aparanti anāgataṃ. Ime pana carimakattabhāvasaṅkhātā pañcakkhandhā pariññātā tiṭṭhanti, etena tesaṃ appatiṭṭhataṃ dasseti. Apariññāmūlikā hi patiṭṭhā. Yathāha ‘‘kabaḷīkāre ce bhikkhave āhāre atthi rāgo atthi nandī atthi taṇhā, patiṭṭhitaṃ tattha viññāṇaṃ virūḷha’’ntiādi. (Saṃ. ni. 2.64; kathā. 296; mahāni. 7) tenevāha ‘‘chinnamūlakā rukkhā viyā’’tiādi.
249 「山顶」:即山峰之顶。由于山顶大多是狭窄、收束之处,故圣典中称「山胁」。或者,系属于山的一部分区域,也叫作「山胁」。「无浊」:指没有混浊;其无浊性因没有淤泥而存在,故说「无泥」。「贝类」:就是蚌类。「螺贝」:就是螺贝类。关于「于站立或卧下的牛群」及「于可得者」:若可得时,那些站立、卧下的牛,依「共同行走」的措辞,便称为「行走」。这里是指那样站立着的牛,而不是某时行走的牛。关于「二者」及「其余二者」:此中「二者」是指贝与螺贝,加上鱼群,这两类事物。「站立」是就其状貌而言,意在于「行走」。「其余二者」,正是指前面所说的贝、螺贝等两类,因为它们也是行走的。又何必拘泥于「共同存在」的标准呢?此处实应视所取而观。显示巴利原文
249.Pabbatamatthaketi pabbatasikhare. Tañhi yebhuyyena saṅkhittaṃ saṅkucitaṃ hotīti pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘pabbatasaṅkhepe’’ti vuttaṃ. Pabbatapariyāpanno vā padeso pabbatasaṅkhepo. Anāviloti akālusiyo, sā cassa anāvilatā kaddamābhāvena hotīti āha ‘‘nikkaddamo’’ti. Sippiyoti suttiyo. Sambukāti saṅkhalikā. Ṭhitāsupi nisinnāsupi gāvīsu. Vijjamānāsūti labbhamānāsu, itarā ṭhitāpi nisinnāpi ‘‘carantī’’ti vuccanti sahacaraṇanayena. Tiṭṭhantameva, na pana kadācipi carantaṃ. Dvayanti sippisambukaṃ, macchagumbanti idaṃ ubhayaṃ. Tiṭṭhantanti vuttaṃ carantaṃ pīti adhippāyo. ‘‘Itarañca dvaya’’nti ca yathāvuttameva sippisambukādidvayaṃ vadati. Tañhi caratīti. Kiṃ vā imāya sahacariyāya, yathālābhaggahaṇaṃ panettha daṭṭhabbaṃ. Sakkharakathalassa hi vasena tiṭṭhantanti. Sippisambukassa macchagumbassa ca vasena tiṭṭhantampi carantaṃ pīti yojanā kātabbā.
那十种智中,「于彼处」:指在所缘的分别中,或在那些智中。观智有七种所缘:依地差别、依时差别、依相续差别等。「唯色处而已」:此语因那种智在化现的意所成身中,唯缘取色处而转起,故如是说,并非说那里没有香处等;因为色聚不可能离开香处等而存在。所变化的色法是圆成实法,故说它是「小所缘、现在所缘、外所缘」。漏尽智唯以涅槃为所缘,但依「小大心」三分法,则属无量所缘;依「内外心」三分法,属外所缘;依「过去、未来、现在心」三分法,属不可说所缘,故说「无量所缘、外所缘、不可说所缘」。如同尖顶屋的顶,于世尊的说法中,阿拉汉果是其最顶端,故说「以阿拉汉果之尖顶」。「令说法完满」:指令说法圆满——能摧破外道师之邪见,摧毁种种诡诈、骗取等邪命,以三种戒庄严,明示最极头陀行,以禅那、神通等超人法而为严饰,以十四种大沙门果作为庄严,不为外道所共。显示巴利原文
Tesaṃ dasannaṃ ñāṇānaṃ. Tatthāti tasmiṃ ārammaṇavibhāge, tesu vā ñāṇesu. Bhūmibhedato, kālabhedato, santānabhedato cāti sattavidhārammaṇaṃ vipassanāñāṇaṃ. ‘‘Rūpāyatanamattamevā’’ti idaṃ tassa ñāṇassa abhinimmiyamāne manomaye kāye rūpāyatanamevārabbha pavattanato vuttaṃ, na tattha gandhāyataṃ ādīnaṃ abhāvato. Na hi rūpakalāpo gandhāyataṃ ādirahito atthi. Parinipphannameva nimmitarūpaṃ, tenāha ‘‘parittapaccuppannabahiddhārammaṇa’’nti. Āsavakkhayañāṇaṃ nibbānārammaṇameva samānaṃ parittattikavasena appamāṇārammaṇaṃ, ajjhattattikavasena bahiddhārammaṇaṃ, atītattikavasena navattabbārammaṇañca hotīti āha ‘‘appamāṇabahiddhānavattabbārammaṇa’’nti. Kūṭo viya kūṭāgārassa bhagavato desanāya arahattaṃ uttamaṅgabhūtanti āha ‘‘arahattanikūṭenā’’ti. Desanaṃ niṭṭhāpesīti titthakaramataharavibhāviniṃ nānāvidhakuhanalapanādimicchājīvaviddhaṃsiniṃ tividhasīlālaṅkataṃ paramasallekhapaṭipattidīpaniṃ jhānābhiññādiuttarimanussadhammavibhūsitaṃ cuddasavidhamahāsāmaññaphalapaṭimaṇḍitaṃ anaññasādhāraṇaṃ desanaṃ niṭṭhāpesi.
【阿阇世(未生怨)证知为优婆塞之说】的解释。显示巴利原文
Ajātasattuupāsakattapaṭivedanākathāvaṇṇanā
250 “初、中、后”(Ādimajjhapariyosāna):指开始、中间和结尾。“恭敬地”(sakkaccaṃ sagāravaṃ):即恭敬尊重。此乃结集法者所发起。显示巴利原文
250.Ādimajjhapariyosānanti ādiñca majjhañca pariyosānañca. Sakkaccaṃ sagāravaṃ. Āraddhaṃ dhammasaṅgāhakehi.
“已逝去、已离去”(Abhikkantā vigatāti)的意思是灭尽而见,所以说“于灭尽中见”(khaye dissatīti)。正如后文所说“初夜分已过”(nikkhanto paṭhamo yāmo)。“更胜可意”(Abhikkantataroti)即极其可意、令人愉悦,而那样的殊妙即称为善好,所以说“于殊妙中见”(sundare dissatīti)。“谁”(Koti)是在诸天、龙、夜叉、乾闼婆等之中是哪一位。“我的”(Meti)即我的。“双足”(Pādānīti)即脚。“以威神力”(Iddhiyāti)即以这些、如此的天威神力。“以称誉”(Yasasāti)即以这些随从、眷属。“照耀”(Jalanti)即正在放光。“以极可意”(Abhikkantenāti)即极其可意、可爱、美妙。“以色”(Vaṇṇenāti)即肤色,身色之光辉。“遍照一切方”(Sabbā obhāsayaṃ disāti):如月、如日般照亮十方,作一光明、一大光,这是偈颂的意义。“于端严色”(Abhirūpeti)即广大妙色,具足妙色。显示巴利原文
Abhikkantā vigatāti atthoti āha ‘‘khaye dissatī’’ti. Tathā hi ‘‘nikkhanto paṭhamo yāmo’’ti upari vuttaṃ. Abhikkantataroti ativiya kantataro manoramo, tādiso ca sundaro bhaddako nāma hotīti āha ‘‘sundare dissatī’’ti. Koti devanāgayakkhagandhabbādīsu ko katamo. Meti mama. Pādānīti pāde. Iddhiyāti imāya evarūpāya deviddhiyā. Yasasāti iminā edisena parivārena, parijanena ca. Jalanti vijjotamāno. Abhikkantenāti ativiya kantena kamanīyena abhirūpena. Vaṇṇenāti chavivaṇṇena sarīravaṇṇanibhāya . Sabbā obhāsayaṃ disāti dasapi disā pabhāsento cando viya, sūriyo viya ca ekobhāsaṃ ekālokaṃ karontoti gāthāya attho. Abhirūpeti uḷārarūpe sampannarūpe.
“贼、贼”、“蛇、蛇”等语,是恐惧时的重复语;“射、射”、“打、打”等语,是愤怒时的重复语;“善哉、善哉”等语,是赞叹时的重复语;“去、去”、“割、割”等语,是催促时的重复语;“来、来”等语,是好奇时的重复语;忆念“佛、佛”等,是惊异时的重复语;“前进吧,尊者!前进吧,尊者!”等语,是喜悦时的重复语;“独子在哪里?独子在哪里?”等语,是悲伤时的重复语;“安乐啊!安乐啊!”等语,是明净信时的重复语。“Ca”字代表未说之事的集合义,由此应知,其中也包含了呵责与不尊敬等。其中,“恶、恶”等语,应见于呵责;“貌美、貌美”等语,应见于不尊敬。显示巴利原文
‘‘Coro coro, sappo sappo’’tiādīsu bhaye āmeḍitaṃ, ‘‘vijjha vijjha, pahara paharā’’tiādīsu kodhe, ‘‘sādhu sādhūtiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.327; saṃ. ni. 2.127; 3.35; 5.1005) pasaṃsāyaṃ, ‘‘gaccha gaccha, lunāhi lunāhī’’tiādīsu turite, ‘‘āgaccha āgacchā’’tiādīsu kotūhale, ‘‘buddho buddhoti cintento’’tiādīsu (bu. vaṃ. 44) acchare, ‘‘abhikkamathāyasmanto abhikkamathāyasmanto’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 3.20; a. ni. 9.11) hāse, ‘‘kahaṃ ekaputtaka kahaṃ ekaputtakā’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 2.63) soke, ‘‘aho sukhaṃ aho sukha’’ntiādīsu (udā. 20; dī. ni. 3.305; cūḷava. 332) pasāde. Ca-saddo avuttasamuccayattho, tena garahāasammānādīnaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Tattha ‘‘pāpo pāpo’’tiādīsu garahāyaṃ, ‘‘abhirūpaka abhirūpakā’’tiādīsu asammāne daṭṭhabbaṃ.
这并非为了强调而重复说两次,而是为了显示两种义理,因此他说:“或者……”等语。其中,“殊妙”(abhikkantaṃ)一词,是配合“殊妙”这一词语而以中性词性来说的。而世尊所说的话,由于是对法的开示,所以如此表述。或者,这仅仅是为了显示义理,因此,性、格、数等语法形式在此处应随义理的需要来理解。第二句也是如此。因为摧破了贪等烦恼,所以称为“摧破烦恼”。因为成就了戒等功德,所以称为“成就功德”。在开示所增进的功德时,应当阐明那些首要的功德。为了显示这些首要的功德,因此说“由生信,由生慧”,因为世间功德以信为首,而出世间功德以慧为首。由于成就了戒等义利,被称为“有义”。由于自性与词源音韵的圆满成就,被称为“有文”。由于运用了极易理解的语言,被称为“显了句”。由于义理柔和微细、难以解了,被称为“甚深义”。由于语言滑润柔和、甜美悦耳,被称为“沁心之语”。由于义理广大清净、令人喜爱、引人入心,被称为“动心之语”。由于摧破了骄慢与过慢,被称为“不赞己”。由于折服了固执与忿怒,被称为“不毁他”。由于以饶益之心显示巴利原文
Nayidaṃ āmeḍitavasena dvikkhattuṃ vuttaṃ, atha kho atthadvayavasenāti dassento ‘‘atha vā’’tiādimāha ‘‘abhikkanta’’nti vacanaṃ apekkhitvā napuṃsakaliṅgavasena vuttaṃ. Taṃ pana bhagavato vacanaṃ dhammassa desanāti katvā tathā vuttaṃ. Atthamattadassanaṃ vā etaṃ, tasmā atthavasenettha liṅgavibhattipariṇāmo veditabbo. Dutiyapadepi eseva nayo. Dosanāsanatoti rāgādikilesavidhamanato. Guṇādhigamanatoti sīlādiguṇānaṃ sampādanato. Ye guṇe desanā adhigameti, tesu padhānabhūtā dassetabbāti te padhānabhūte tāva dassetuṃ ‘‘saddhājananato paññājananato’’ti vuttaṃ. Saddhāpamukhā hi lokiyā guṇā paññāpamukhā lokuttarā. Sīlādiatthasampattiyā sātthato. Sabhāvaniruttisampattiyā sabyañjanato. Suviññeyyasaddapayogatāya uttānapadato. Saṇhasukhumabhāvena dubbiññeyyatthatāya gambhīratthato. Siniddhamudumadhurasaddapayogatāya kaṇṇasukhato. Vipulavisuddhapemanīyatthatāya hadayaṅgamato. Mānātimānavidhamanena anattukkaṃsanato. Thambhasārambhanimmaddanena aparavambhanato. Hitādhippāyappavattiyā, paresaṃ rāgapariḷāhādivūpagamanena ca karuṇāsītalato. Kilesandhakāravidhamanena paññāvadātato. Karavīkarutamañjutāya āpātharamaṇīyato. Pubbāparāviruddhasuvisuddhatāya vimaddakkhamato. Āpātharamaṇīyatāya eva suyyamānasukhato. Vimaddakkhamatāya, hitajjhāsayappavattitāya ca vīmaṃsiyamānahitato. Evamādīhīti ādi-saddena saṃsāracakkanivattanato saddhammacakkappavattanato, micchāvādaviddhaṃsanato sammāvādapatiṭṭhāpanato, akusalamūlasamuddharaṇato kusalamūlasaṃropanato, apāyadvārapidhānato saggamaggadvāravivaraṇato, pariyuṭṭhānavūpasamanato anusayasamugghāṭanatoti evamādīnaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo.
“被倒置向下”(Adhomukhaṭṭhapitanti):指被某人倒转过来,向下放置。“本性面朝下者”(Heṭṭhāmukhajātanti):指天生就是面朝下的。“应揭开”(Ugghāṭeyyāti):指应当打开、揭开。他拉着那人的手,却不说“你面朝东走”或“面朝北走”之类的话,而是拉着手为他除疑,直接指示说:“这就是路,应当这样走。”“黑分十四日”(kāḷapakkhacātuddasī):即黑半月的第十四日。如同把一个底朝上、无法装物的器皿,为了让它能装东西而翻正过来。它因朝向无明、本性向下而背离正法,又因被倒置而堕入非正法。这两句话不应按字面顺序生搬硬套,而应依照合适的情形来理解。爱欲等烦恼虽然都能遮蔽人心,但邪见尤其能覆盖众生,因为他们会执取邪见。因此经中说“被邪见密林所覆盖”。所以世尊说:“比丘们,我说邪见是极重的罪过。”一切堕入恶趣的道路,都被视为邪道、劣道。邪见等八种邪行,是正见等正行的对立面,因此被称为邪道。正是基于这两者的对立关系显示巴利原文
Adhomukhaṭṭhapitanti kenaci adhomukhaṃ ṭhapitaṃ. Heṭṭhāmukhajātanti sabhāveneva heṭṭhāmukhaṃ jātaṃ. Ugghāṭeyyāti vivaṭaṃ kareyya. Hatthe gahetvā ‘‘puratthābhimukho, uttarābhimukho vā gacchā’’tiādīni avatvā hatthe gahetvā nissandehaṃ katvā. ‘‘Esa maggo, evaṃ gacchā’’ti dasseyya. Kāḷapakkhacātuddasīti kāḷapakkhe cātuddasī. Nikkujjitaṃ ādheyyassa anādhārabhūtaṃ bhājanaṃ ādhārabhāvāpādanavasena ukkujjeyya. Aññāṇassa abhimukhattā heṭṭhāmukhajātatāya saddhammavimukhaṃ adhomukhaṭṭhapitatāya asaddhamme patitanti evaṃ padadvayaṃ yathārahaṃ yojetabbaṃ, na yathāsaṅkhyaṃ. Kāmaṃ kāmacchandādayo paṭicchādakā nīvaraṇabhāvato, micchādiṭṭhi pana savisesaṃ paṭicchādikā satte micchābhinivesanavasenāti āha ‘‘micchādiṭṭhigahanapaṭicchanna’’nti. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘micchādiṭṭhiparamāhaṃ bhikkhave vajjaṃ vadāmī’’ti. Sabbo apāyagāmimaggo kummaggo kucchito maggoti katvā. Sammādiṭṭhiādīnaṃ ujupaṭipakkhatāya micchādiṭṭhiādayo aṭṭha micchattadhammā micchāmaggā. Teneva hi tadubhayapaṭipakkhataṃ sandhāya ‘‘saggamokkhamaggaṃ āvikarontenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Sappiādisannissayo padīpo na tathā ujjalo, yathā telasannissayoti telapajjota-ggahaṇaṃ. Etehi pariyāyehīti etehi nikkujjitukkujjanapaṭicchannavivaraṇādiupamopamitabbappakārehi, etehi vā yathāvuttehi nānāvidhakuhanalapanādimicchājīvavividhamanādivibhāvanapariyāyehi. Tenāha ‘‘anekapariyāyena dhammo pakāsito’’ti.
“净信者所应作的恭敬”(Pasannakāranti):指净信的人应该做的恭敬行为。“皈依”(Saraṇanti):就是依止,所以称为“归趣”(parāyaṇaṃ)。归趣的意思是,通过遮止没有意义的事、达成有意义的事,所以被称为“罪恶的救护者,利益的施作者”。所谓“罪恶”(Aghassāti):有人说它的意思是从苦,但更合理的是从恶,这里是用属格表示宾语。在这里,“行”(gamu)这个词根不像“领”(nī)等词根那样可以带两个宾语。所以,不能像说“把山羊领到村子”(ajaṃ gāmaṃ netī)那样说“我皈依世尊”(bhagavantaṃ saraṇaṃ gacchāmīti),而应该说“我前往皈依”(saraṇanti gacchāmīti)。这里的“iti”是省略的用法,它表达的就是这个意思。而“前往”,根据意图不同,可以是亲近,也可以是了知。为了说明这一点,疏中说“以此意趣”(iminā adhippāyenāti)等等。在这些解释中,“我亲奉”(bhajāmīti)等这些词语,前面的词是用来说明后面的词的意思。“亲近”是指怀着皈依的意图前去拜见,“侍奉”是指在他身边照顾,“承事”是指通过履行义务来侍奉。所有这些方式都表达了“除了他别无皈依”这层意思。“我往”(Gacchāmīti)这个词的意思是“我觉了”。这个意思是怎么得出来的呢?所以才说“对他们……”(yesañhīti)等等。显示巴利原文
Pasannakāranti pasannehi kātabbaṃ sakkāraṃ. Saraṇanti paṭisaraṇaṃ, tenāha ‘‘parāyaṇa’’nti. Parāyaṇabhāvo ca anatthanisedhanena, atthasampaṭipādanena ca hotīti āha ‘‘aghassa tātā, hitassa ca vidhātā’’ti. Aghassāti dukkhatoti vadanti, pāpatoti pana attho yutto, nissakke cetaṃ sāmivacanaṃ. Ettha ca nāyaṃ gamu-saddo nī-saddādayo viya dvikammako, tasmā yathā ‘‘ajaṃ gāmaṃ netī’’ti vuccati, evaṃ ‘‘bhagavantaṃ saraṇaṃ gacchāmī’’ti vattuṃ na sakkā, ‘‘saraṇanti gacchāmī’’ti pana vattabbaṃ. Iti-saddo cettha luttaniddiṭṭho. Tassa cāyamattho. Gamanañca tadadhippāyena bhajanaṃ jānanaṃ vāti dassento ‘‘iminā adhippāyenā’’tiādimāha. Tattha ‘‘bhajāmī’’tiādīsu purimassa purimassa pacchimaṃ pacchimaṃ atthavacanaṃ, bhajanaṃ vā saraṇādhippāyena upasaṅkamanaṃ, sevanaṃ santikāvacaratā, payirupāsanaṃ vattapaṭivattakaraṇena upaṭṭhānanti evaṃ sabbathāpi anaññasaraṇataṃyeva dīpeti. ‘‘Gacchāmī’’ti padassa bujjhāmīti ayamattho kathaṃ labbhatīti āha ‘‘yesañhī’’tiādi.
“Adhigatamagge sacchikatanirodhe”(已证道者、已证灭者)这两个词,所指的也仅是住于果位者,并非住于道位者。为了说明这一点,才说“yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipajjamāne cāti(于随教奉行者……)”等。难道善凡夫不也可称为“随教奉行”吗?虽可如此说,但严格而言,唯有住于道位者才应这般称呼,其他则不然,因为他们尚未进入决定的正性。正如经中恰恰将那些人表述为“令其不堕恶趣而护持”。因为正是藉由进入正性决定,才有解脱恶趣的可能。“Akkhāyatīti(被称为)”:此处的“iti”字,表示开头或种类等义,由此包含了“诸比丘,凡是有为法或无为法,于这些法中,离染被说为最上”(《小部·如是语》90;《增支部》4.34)这一经文,或以此包含了“广说(vitthāro)”。在此,圣道由于能导出生死,涅槃由于是圣道达成其目标的因,所以两者从严格意义上都被称为“法”。因为涅槃作为所缘缘,圣道才得以达成其目标。然而,由于圣果根据“当……显示巴利原文
‘‘Adhigatamagge sacchikatanirodhe’’ti padadvayenāpi phalaṭṭhā eva dassitā, na maggaṭṭhāti te dassento ‘‘yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipajjamāne cā’’tiādimāha. Nanu ca kalyāṇaputhujjanopi ‘‘yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipajjatī’’ti vuccatīti? Kiñcāpi vuccati, nippariyāyena pana maggaṭṭhā eva tathā vattabbā, na itaro niyāmokkamanābhāvato. Tathā hi te eva vuttā ‘‘apāyesu apatamāne dhāretī’’ti. Sammattaniyāmokkamanena hi apāyavinimuttasambhavo . Akkhāyatīti ettha iti-saddo ādiattho, pakārattho vā, tena ‘‘yāvatā bhikkhave dhammā saṅkhatā vā asaṅkhatā vā, virāgo tesaṃ aggaṃ akkhāyatī’’ti (itivu. 90; a. ni. 4.34) suttapadaṃ saṅgaṇhāti, ‘‘vitthāro’’ti vā iminā. Ettha ca ariyamaggo niyyānikatāya, nibbānaṃ tassa tadatthasiddhihetutāyāti ubhayameva nippariyāyena ‘‘dhammo’’ti vutto. Nibbānañhi ārammaṇapaccayabhūtaṃ labhitvā ariyamaggassa tadatthasiddhi. Tathāpi yasmā ariyaphalānaṃ ‘‘tāya saddhāya avūpasantāyā’’tiādi vacanato maggena samucchinnānaṃ kilesānaṃ paṭipassaddhippahānakiccatāya, niyyānānuguṇatāya, niyyānapariyosānatāya ca, pariyattidhammassa pana ‘‘niyyānadhammassa samadhigamanahetutāyā’’ti iminā pariyāyena vuttanayena dhammabhāvo labbhati eva. Svāyamattho pāṭhārūḷho evāti dassento ‘‘na kevala’’ntiādimāha.
“欲贪、有贪”等一切种类的贪,都藉由它而离除,故称为“rāgavirāgo(离贪的离染)”,这是指道。被称为“ejā(动)”的渴爱,以及具有内在焦灼特征的忧,由于它们在生起之处都已彻底灭尽,故说“anejaṃ asokaṃ(无动无忧)”,这是指果。“Appaṭikūlanti(不违逆)”表示不违逆,即不与任何事物相冲突;亦可解为可爱、殊胜。由于处于熟练的状态而转起,或为显示殊胜的功德,故称为“paguṇaṃ(熟练)”。正如经中所说:“我并非因为熟练而说不害之法,而是对人中的婆罗门说殊胜之法。”(《中部》1.283;《中部》2.339;《大品》9)“一切法蕴”已讲完,这是连接。显示巴利原文
‘‘Kāmarāgo bhavarāgo’’ti evamādi bhedo sabbopi rāgo virajjati etenāti rāgavirāgoti maggo kathito. Ejāsaṅkhātāya taṇhāya, antonijjhānalakkhaṇassa sokassa ca taduppattiyaṃ sabbaso parikkhīṇattā anejaṃ asokanti phalaṃ kathitaṃ. Appaṭikūlanti avirodhadīpanato kenaci aviruddhaṃ, iṭṭhaṃ paṇītanti vā attho. Paguṇarūpena pavattitattā, pakaṭṭhaguṇavibhāvanato vā paguṇaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘vihiṃsasaññī paguṇaṃ na bhāsiṃ, dhammaṃ paṇītaṃ manujesu brahme’’ti. (Ma. ni. 1.283; ma. ni. 2.339; mahāva. 9) sabbadhammakkhandhā kathitāti yojanā.
“由见与戒的聚合”:即依“他住于与那种能导出、能出离的圣见相应的见和合”(《长部》3.324;《中部》4.92;3.54)所说的见,以及“他住于与那些无破损、无穿孔、无斑点、无杂色、自在、为智者所称赞、不取着、能导向定的戒相应的戒和合”(《长部》3.323;《中部》1.492;3.54;《增支部》6.11;《附随》274)所说的戒,以和合的状态,即见和合与戒和合的意思。“Saṃhato(和合)”即聚合,亦即同类相聚。圣者即使身处遥远之处,也因自身全部功德的聚集,而如同和合在一起。所说的八种法眼,若成对而言,即四对;若就个人而言,则为八种。因为他们亲见圣法,故称为法眼。三事:通过转向“皈依”,以及通过三遍转向,而构成三种皈依。“Paṭivedesīti(表露)”,指用语言表露出自己内心的想法。显示巴利原文
Diṭṭhisīlasaṅghātenāti ‘‘yāyaṃ diṭṭhi ariyā niyyānikā niyyāti takkarassa sammā dukkhakkhayāya, tathārūpāya diṭṭhiyā diṭṭhisāmaññagato viharatī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.324; ma. ni. 4.92; 3.54) evaṃ vuttāya diṭṭhiyā, ‘‘yāni tāni sīlāni akhaṇḍāni acchiddāni asabalāni akammāsāni bhujissāni viññuppasatthāni aparāmaṭṭhāni samādhisaṃvattanikāni , tathārūpehi sīlehi sīlasāmaññagato viharatī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.323; ma. ni. 1.492; 3.54; a. ni. 6.11; pari. 274) evaṃ vuttānaṃ sīlānañca saṃhatabhāvena, diṭṭhisīlasāmaññenāti attho. Saṃhatoti ghaṭito, sametoti attho. Ariyapuggalā hi yattha katthaci dūre ṭhitāpi attano guṇasāmaggiyā saṃhatā eva . Aṭṭha ca puggaladhammadasā teti te purisayugavasena cattāropi puggalavasena aṭṭheva ariyadhammassa paccakkhadassāvitāya dhammadasā. Tīṇi vatthūni ‘‘saraṇa’’nti gamanena, tikkhattuṃ gamanena ca tīṇi saraṇagamanāni. Paṭivedesīti attano hadayagataṃ vācāya pavedesi.
皈依讲述的解释。显示巴利原文
Saraṇagamanakathāvaṇṇanā
为了阐明皈依的所缘、分类、果报和杂染的种种差别,如同阐明作者一样,能于此中令得善巧,所以说“为于皈依得善巧,皈依……应当了知”,因为若离于此,皈依本身便无法成立。那么,为何此处未单独列出“清净”?难道阐明清净不也能带来善巧吗?确实如此。然而,由于杂染这一项中已从义理上包含了清净,所以没有另行列出。因为那些杂染之因——如无明等,令其未生的完全不再生起,已生的彻底断除,这便是清净。根据具有杀害意义的词根“sara”,此词应如是理解,所以说“它杀害,故称皈依”。接着,为了回应“它杀害谁?如何杀害?对谁杀害?”的质疑,注疏继续说道“对于皈依者”等等。其中,“怖畏”是指轮回的怖畏。“战栗”是指内心的惊恐,此处指心所层面的苦。“苦”是指身体的苦。“恶趣杂染”是指属于恶趣的一切苦,这些将在后面说明果报的部分详细阐述。此处的“此”,即指“皈依”一词。显示巴利原文
Saraṇagamanassa visayappabhedaphalasaṃkilesabhedānaṃ viya kattu ca vibhāvanā tattha kosallāya hotīti ‘‘saraṇagamanesu kosallatthaṃ saraṇaṃ…pe… veditabbo’’ti vuttaṃ tena vinā saraṇagamanasseva asambhavato. Kasmā panettha vodānaṃ na gahitaṃ, nanu vodānavibhāvanāpi tattha kosallāvahāti? Saccametaṃ, taṃ pana saṃkilesaggahaṇeneva atthato dīpitaṃ hotīti na gahitaṃ. Yāni hi nesaṃ saṃkilesakāraṇāni aññāṇādīni, tesaṃ sabbena sabbaṃ anuppannānaṃ anuppādanena, uppannānañca pahānena vodānaṃ hotīti. Hiṃsatthassa sara-saddassa vasenetaṃ padaṃ daṭṭhabbanti ‘‘hiṃsatīti saraṇa’’nti vatvā taṃ pana hiṃsanaṃ kesaṃ kathaṃ kassa vāti codanaṃ sodhento ‘‘saraṇagatāna’’ntiādimāha. Tattha bhayanti vaṭṭabhayaṃ. Santāsanti cittutrāsaṃ teneva cetasikadukkhassa gahitattā. Dukkhanti kāyikadukkhaṃ. Duggatiparikilesanti duggatipariyāpannaṃ sabbampi dukkhaṃ, tayidaṃ sabbaṃ parato phalakathāyaṃ āvibhavissati. Etanti ‘‘saraṇa’’nti padaṃ.
如此从总体意义上解释了“皈依”一词之后,现在为了从特殊的角度予以显示,便说了“再者”等语。在利益方面加以策励,如说“诸比丘,你们要具足戒而安住……”等,便是鼓励行善;在不利方面予以遮止,如说“杀生则有恶的果报,有恶的来世……”等,通过开示过患等方式令人远离无益之事。所谓“杀害怖畏”,是指在利益与不利两方面,通过不让导致灾难的因缘生起而消灭灾难,亦即防止灾难。由度脱轮回旷野的道法,以及(僧团)通过给予安心,来杀害众生的怖畏,应当如是理解。所谓“供物”,是指以布施和供养的方式献上的尊敬。通过获得广大的果报来杀害众生的怖畏,应当如是理解,也就是指成为无上的应供者这一身份。这也是通过这些种种分别所说的缘由。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ avisesato saraṇa-saddassa atthaṃ dassetvā idāni visesato dassetuṃ ‘‘atha vā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Hite pavattanenāti ‘‘sampannasīlā bhikkhave viharathā’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.64, 69) atthe niyojanena. Ahitā ca nivattanenāti. ‘‘Pāṇātipātassa kho pāpako vipāko, pāpakaṃ abhisamparāya’’ntiādinā ādīnavadassanādimukhena anatthato nivattanena. Bhayaṃ hiṃsatīti hitāhitesu appavattipavattihetukaṃ byasanaṃ appavattikaraṇena vināseti. Bhavakantārā uttāraṇena maggasaṅkhāto dhammo, itaro assāsadānena sattānaṃ bhayaṃ hiṃsatīti yojanā. Kārānanti dānavasena pūjāvasena ca upanītānaṃ sakkārānaṃ. Vipulaphalapaṭilābhakaraṇena sattānaṃ bhayaṃ hiṃsatīti yojanā, anuttaradakkhiṇeyyabhāvatoti adhippāyo. Imināpi pariyāyenāti imināpi vibhajitvā vuttena kāraṇena.
“世尊是正自觉者,法是善说的,僧团是善行的”——像这样对三宝生起的净信,称为“于彼净信”;将三宝视为尊重的对象,称为“重彼”,这种状态即是“重彼性”。“于彼净信”与“重彼性”合在一起,便是“于彼净信与重彼性”。藉由这“于彼净信与重彼性”,已消除了邪见、疑、愚痴、不信等,故而烦恼得以破坏。以彼三宝为皈依所、归趣、救护与避难处,以如是行相生起的、以彼为皈依处的心念,便是“皈依的行为”,依此而行皈依。“具有彼者”是指具足上述心生起的人。“如此亲近”是指侍奉、随侍、恭敬,或者指如此了知、觉悟,应当这样理解其意义。在此,把握“净信”说的是世间皈依,因为那是以净信为主的;把握“重彼性”说的是出世间皈依,因为圣者们由于通达功德,看待三宝如同对待石伞一般尊重。因此,借助那净信,以镇伏的方式远离烦恼;借助那重彼性,以断除的方式远离烦恼,应当如此连结,因为它断除了不恭敬的因。此处的“以彼为归趣”即是归向彼之性,由此,即将要说的四种皈依都被含摄在内,应当了知。或者,不作区分地彰显净信与尊重,由把握净信便摄取了。显示巴利原文
‘‘Sammāsambuddho bhagavā, svākkhāto dhammo, suppaṭipanno saṅgho’’ti evaṃ pavatto tattha ratanattaye pasādo tappasādo, tadeva ratanattayaṃ garu etassāti taggaru tabbhāvo taggarutā, tappasādo ca taggarutā ca tappasādataggarutā, tāhi tappasādataggarutāhi. Vidhūtadiṭṭhivicikicchāsammohaassaddhiyāditāya vihatakileso. Tadeva ratanattayaṃ parāyaṇaṃ parāgati tāṇaṃ leṇanti evaṃ pavattiyā tapparāyaṇatākārappavatto cittuppādo saraṇagamanaṃ saraṇaṃ gacchati etenāti. Taṃsamaṅgīti tena yathāvuttacittuppādena samannāgato. Evaṃ upetīti bhajati sevati payirupāsati, evaṃ vā jānāti bujjhatīti evamattho veditabbo. Ettha ca pasāda-ggahaṇena lokiyasaraṇagamanamāha. Tañhi pasādappadhānaṃ. Garutāgahaṇena lokuttaraṃ. Ariyā hi ratanattayaṃ guṇābhiññatāya pāsāṇacchattaṃ viya garuṃ katvā passanti. Tasmā tappasādena vikkhambhanavasena vigatakileso, taggarutāya samucchedavasenāti yojetabbaṃ agāravakaraṇahetūnaṃ samucchindanato. Tapparāyaṇatā panettha taggatikatāti tāya catubbidhampi vakkhamānaṃ saraṇagamanaṃ gahitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Avisesena vā pasādagarutā jotitāti pasādaggahaṇena aveccappasādassa itarassa ca gahaṇaṃ, tathā garutāgahaṇenāti ubhayenāpi ubhayaṃ saraṇagamanaṃ yojetabbaṃ.
“在道刹那成就”,如此连结。“以涅槃为所缘之后”:此从义理上显示,四圣谛的证得即是出世间皈依。因为在那时,涅槃法正以作证现观而被通达,道法正以修习现观而被通达,当它们被通达时,便已成就了皈依的意义。而佛功德是声闻所行境的境界,通过遍知现观;圣僧功德亦复如是。因此说“由作用而于全三宝中成就”。而且这种成就是同时成就的,不像世间皈依那样有次第,因为这是通过无痴通达而通达的,这是意旨所在。然而,有些人说:“皈依并非以涅槃为所缘而生起,只是由于证得了道,就如某些证得三明者的世间明等一样,仅仅是被证得罢了。”若如此说,皈依便仅仅是世间的,而不是出世间的了。那并不合理,因为两种皈依都应存在。显示巴利原文
Maggakkhaṇe ijjhatīti yojanā. ‘‘Nibbānārammaṇaṃ hutvā’’ti etena atthato catusaccādhigamo eva lokuttarasaraṇagamananti dasseti. Tattha hi nibbānadhammo sacchikiriyābhisamayavasena, maggadhammo bhāvanābhisamayavasena paṭivijjhiyamānoyeva saraṇagamanatthaṃ sādheti. Buddhaguṇā pana sāvakagocarabhūtā pariññābhisamayavasena, tathā ariyasaṅghaguṇā, tenāha ‘‘kiccato sakalepi ratanattaye ijjhatī’’ti. Ijjhantañca saheva ijjhati, na lokiyaṃ viya patipāṭiyā asammohapaṭivedhena paṭividdhattāti adhippāyo. Ye pana vadanti ‘‘na saraṇagamanaṃ nibbānārammaṇaṃ hutvā pavattati. Maggassa adhigatattā pana adhigatameva hoti ekaccānaṃ tevijjādīnaṃ lokiyavijjādayo viyā’’ti, tesaṃ lokiyameva saraṇagamanaṃ siyā, na lokuttaraṃ, tañca ayuttaṃ duvidhassāpi icchitabbattā.
那是指世间皈依。“净信之获得”:通过“世尊是正自觉者”等语而获得。“以信为根本”:即前面所说的以信为前导的正见,它依世间性的觉悟,以正理如实照见佛陀的善觉性、法的善法性、僧团的善行性。“以信为根本的正见”,以此显示仰赖于信而生起的、具前述特征的智慧,这就是世间皈依,因此说“这称为见正直业”。见自身因自己的因缘而变得正直,或者以这种业令见得正直,故称“见正直业”,也就是如此生起的心念。这样,“以彼为归趣之行相而转起的心念”这话便得以成立。取以信为前导的正见而说,是因为心念以此为主。以“净信之获得”显示那种不与智相应的皈依,如同被母亲等鼓励的孩童等;以“正见”显示与智相应的皈依。这就是世间皈依。通过它,自我被交付、被归属、被舍弃,故称“自我交付”,也就是前面所说的见正直业。将以三宝为皈依处、为归趣之人或心的这种状态,称为“以彼为归处性”,也就是见正直业。以“皈依”为意图,通过它而进入弟子身份、学童身份,故称“入弟子状态”。以皈依的意图,通过它而行礼敬,故称“礼敬”。在这一切之中,显示巴利原文
Tanti lokiyaṃ saraṇagamanaṃ. Saddhāpaṭilābho ‘‘sammāsambuddho bhagavā’’tiādinā. Saddhāmūlikāti yathāvuttasaddhāpubbaṅgamā sammādiṭṭhiti buddhasubuddhataṃ, dhammasudhammataṃ, saṅghasuppaṭipattiñca lokiyāvabodhavaseneva sammā ñāyena dassanato. ‘‘Saddhāmūlikā sammādiṭṭhī’’ti etena saddhūpanissayā yathāvuttalakkhaṇā paññā lokiyasaraṇagamananti dasseti, tenāha ‘‘diṭṭhijukammanti vuccatī’’ti. Diṭṭhi eva attano paccayehi uju karīyatīti katvā diṭṭhi vā uju karīyati etenāti diṭṭhijukammaṃ, tathā pavatto cittuppādo. Evañca katvā ‘‘tapparāyaṇatākārappavatto cittuppādo’’ti idaṃ vacanaṃ samatthitaṃ hoti. Saddhāpubbaṅgamasammādiṭṭhiggahaṇaṃ pana cittuppādassa tappadhānatāyāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Saddhāpaṭilābho’’ti iminā mātādīhi ussāhitadārakādīnaṃ viya ñāṇavippayuttaṃ saraṇagamanaṃ dasseti, ‘‘sammādiṭṭhī’’ti iminā ñāṇasampayuttaṃ saraṇagamanaṃ. Tayidaṃ lokiyaṃ saraṇagamanaṃ. Attā sanniyyātīyati appīyati pariccajīyati etenāti attasanniyyātanaṃ, yathāvuttaṃ diṭṭhijukammaṃ. Taṃ ratanattayaṃ parāyaṇaṃ paṭisaraṇaṃ etassāti tapparāyaṇo, puggalo, cittuppādo vā. Tassa bhāvo tapparāyaṇatā, yathāvuttaṃ diṭṭhijukammameva. ‘‘Saraṇa’’nti adhippāyena sissabhāvaṃ antevāsikabhāvaṃ upagacchati etenāti sissabhāvūpagamanaṃ. Saraṇagamanādhippāyeneva paṇipatati etenāti paṇipāto. Sabbattha yathāvuttadiṭṭhijukammavaseneva attho veditabbo.
“自我施舍”:是指为度脱轮回之苦,而施舍自己的有身。其余诸项,理亦同此。“唯对佛等”:这一限定在自我交付等处亦当加以说明。如此,便已完成对其他对象的排除。显示巴利原文
Attapariccajananti saṃsāradukkhanittharaṇatthaṃ attano attabhāvassa pariccajanaṃ. Eseva nayo sesesupi. Buddhādīnaṃ yevāti avadhāraṇaṃ attasanniyyātanādīsupi tattha tattha vattabbaṃ. Evañhi tadaññanivattanaṃ kataṃ hoti.
像这样,以一种方式展示了自我交付等之后,现在为以其他方式展示,而开始“再者”等。这是为了表明:即便以其他方式,自我交付等也照样完成,因为其含义并无差别。阿罗婆迦等——“等”字应理解为包含了萨多耆利、雪山夜叉等。然而,这些阿罗婆迦等,岂非早已藉由圣道而进入皈依吗?为何又说他们的皈依是“以彼为归处”呢?纵使是已藉由道而进入皈依者,也称作以彼为归处,因其曾宣说如此的行相:“我将游行……善法性”及“我们当游行,从村至村,从山至山……善法性”。故如此说。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ attasanniyyātanādīni ekena pakārena dassetvā idāni aparehipi pakārehi dassetuṃ ‘‘apicā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ, tena pariyāyantarehipi attasanniyyātanādi katameva hoti atthassa abhinnattāti dasseti. Āḷavakādīnanti ādi-saddena sātāgirahemavatādīnaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Nanu cete āḷavakādayo maggeneva āgatasaraṇagamanā, kathaṃ tesaṃ tapparāyaṇatāsaraṇagamanaṃ vuttanti? Maggenāgatasaraṇagamanehipi. ‘‘So ahaṃ vicarissāmi…pe… sudhammataṃ’’ (saṃ. ni. 1.246; su. ni. 194) ‘‘te mayaṃ vicarissāma , gāmā gāmaṃ nagā nagaṃ…pe… sudhammata’’nti, (su. ni. 182) tehi tapparāyaṇatākārassa paveditattā tathā vuttaṃ.
而此皈依,依亲属等而有别……此处应一一分别连结为“依亲属之力”“依怖畏之力”“依老师之力”“依应供者之力”。其中,“依亲属之力”是指基于亲属关系之状态。其余各项类此。“由应供者礼敬”,是指以应供者为因的礼敬。其余三种礼敬,则是依亲属关系等状态而生起的礼敬。为详细阐明“其余”等简略所说的意义,而说“因此”等。“敬礼”是描述礼敬特相之语。所谓“像这样”,是针对现法利益而说的。因为,期望来世利益或寻求教诫的人,只会行应供者礼敬。这是意趣所在。显示巴利原文
So panesa ñāti…pe… vasenāti ettha ñātivasena, bhayavasena, ācariyavasena, dakkhiṇeyyavasenāti paccekaṃ yojetabbaṃ. Tattha ñātivasenāti ñātibhāvavasena. Evaṃ sesesupi. Dakkhiṇeyyapaṇipātenāti dakkhiṇeyyatāhetukena paṇipātena. Itarehīti ñātibhāvādivasappavattehi tīhi paṇipātehi. ‘‘Itarehī’’tiādinā saṅkhepato vuttamatthaṃ vitthārato dassetuṃ ‘‘tasmā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Vandatīti paṇipātassa lakkhaṇavacanaṃ. Evarūpanti diṭṭhadhammikaṃ sandhāya vadati. Samparāyikañhi niyyānikaṃ vā anusāsaniṃ paccāsisanto dakkhiṇeyyapaṇipātameva karotīti adhippāyo.
“皈依的分类”,即对皈依所作的区分。显示巴利原文
Saraṇagamanappabhedoti saraṇagamanavibhāgo.
圣道本身即是出世间的皈依,故说“四沙门果为异熟果”。“一切苦的灭尽”,即所有轮回之苦的不生与灭尽。“此”,指“以正慧照见四圣谛”中所说的见谛。显示巴利原文
Ariyamaggo eva lokuttaraṃ saraṇagamananti ‘‘cattāri sāmaññaphalāni vipākaphala’’nti vuttaṃ. Sabbadukkhakkhayoti sakalassa vaṭṭadukkhassa anuppādanirodho. Etanti ‘‘cattāri ariyasaccāni, sammappaññāya passatī’’ti evaṃ vuttaṃ ariyasaccassa dassanaṃ.
“不以常等趋近等方式”,即不以“常”等执取的方式。“无有是处”,是否定其因;“无机会”,是否定其缘。两者皆是否定其因。“由于那种原因”,指依何种原因。“具见者”,指具足道见的入流者。对于任何行——即在四地范围内的诸行中的任何一种行,“会执取为常”,指会执取它为恒常。“会执取为乐”,则是针对“自我成为纯乐、无病,死后亦然”这样的我见,而执取为乐。然而,圣弟子若以不与见相应的心,为平息内心的热恼,就如一位被醉象追赶的清净婆罗门,为躲开而跳入粪坑一般,也可能将某种行执取为乐。在“自我”的文句中,为了含摄地遍等施设,故不称“行”,而说“某种法”。在这些文句中,应理解为皆以四地或三地为范围来界定。因为凡夫以执取抓住什么,圣弟子便从那里解开那种执取。显示巴利原文
Niccādito anupagamanādivasenāti ‘‘nicca’’nti aggahaṇādivasena. Aṭṭhānanti hetupaṭikkhepo. Anavakāsoti paccayapaṭikkhepo. Ubhayenāpi kāraṇameva paṭikkhipati. Yanti yena kāraṇena. Diṭṭhisampannoti maggadiṭṭhiyā samannāgato sotāpanno. Kañci saṅkhāranti catubhūmakesu saṅkhatasaṅkhāresu ekasaṅkhārampi. Niccato upagaccheyyāti ‘‘nicco’’ti gaṇheyya. ‘‘Sukhato upagaccheyyā’’ti. ‘‘Ekantasukhī attā hoti arogo paraṃ maraṇā’’ti (dī. ni. 1.76) evaṃ attadiṭṭhivasena sukhato gāhaṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ . Diṭṭhivippayuttacittena pana ariyasāvako pariḷāhavūpasamanatthaṃ mattahatthiparittāsito viya cokkhabrāhmaṇo ukkārabhūmiṃ kañci saṅkhāraṃ sukhato upagacchati. Attavāre kasiṇādipaññattisaṅgahatthaṃ ‘‘saṅkhāra’’nti avatvā ‘‘kañci dhamma’’nti vuttaṃ. Imesupi vāresu catubhūmakavaseneva paricchedo veditabbo, tebhūmakavaseneva vā. Yaṃ yañhi puthujjano gāhavasena gaṇhāti, tato tato ariyasāvako gāhaṃ viniveṭheti.
“母”等词中,母亲指生育者,父亲指生育者,此处特指的阿拉汉是已成就人身之漏尽者。难道圣弟子还会夺取他人生命吗?这也是“无有是处”,即不可能发生的事。如此说,是为显示凡夫位的大过,亦为显示圣弟子的道果。“心败坏者”,指以杀心令心败坏。“使如来出血”,谓于活的身体上,即使如同小蝇吸血那样,令出极少之血。“破僧”,指分裂在同一界内共住的僧团,即通过所说的五种方式——以羯磨、以诵出、以宣称、以白二甘马、以取筹——来制造分裂。“认他师为导师”,是说执取其他外道师,心想“这是我的老师”。这些事皆不可能发生。“不堕恶趣”,是说已皈依佛者,不会因皈依之缘而投生恶趣,反将充满天界。显示巴利原文
‘‘Mātara’’ntiādīsu janikā mātā, janako pitā, manussabhūto khīṇāsavo arahāti adhippeto. Kiṃ pana ariyasāvako aññaṃ jīvitā voropeyyāti? Etampi aṭṭhānaṃ, puthujjanabhāvassa pana mahāsāvajjabhāvadassanatthaṃ, ariyasāvakassa ca phaladassanatthaṃ evaṃ vuttaṃ. Duṭṭhacittoti vadhakacittena paduṭṭhacitto. Lohitaṃ uppādeyyāti jīvamānakasarīre khuddakamakkhikāya pivanamattampi lohitaṃ uppādeyya. Saṅghaṃ bhindeyyāti samānasaṃvāsakaṃ samānasīmāyaṃ ṭhitaṃ saṅghaṃ. ‘‘Kammena, uddesena, voharanto, anussāvanena, salākaggāhenā’’ti (pari. 458) evaṃ vuttehi pañcahi kāraṇehi bhindeyya. Aññaṃ satthāranti aññaṃ titthakaraṃ ‘‘ayaṃ me satthā’’ti evaṃ gaṇheyya, netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjatīti attho. Na te gamissanti apāyabhūminti te buddhaṃ saraṇaṃ gatā taṃnimittaṃ apāyaṃ na gamissanti, devakāyaṃ pana paripūressantīti attho.
“以十种理由”,即由十种原因。“更殊胜”,即更为超胜。依照《毗罗摩经》等所说:毗罗摩居士行此“毗罗摩大布施”七年又七月无有间断,施舍了八万四千个金钵、银钵、铜钵,每一钵的大小为“迦哩沙”量制的四分之一,并依次盛满白银、黄金、宝藏;又施舍了八万四千头以一切庄严具美饰的大象,八万四千匹马,八万四千辆车,八万四千头乳牛,八万四千名少女,八万四千张床,八万四千俱胝套衣服,以及不可计量的种种嚼食、啖食等食物。然而,相比于这样的布施,供养一位入流者的布施其果报更为超胜;相比于供养一百位入流者,供养一位一来者的布施果报更为超胜;再接下来,供养一位不来者的果报更为超胜;供养一位阿拉汉的果报更为超胜;供养一位独觉佛的果报更为超胜;供养正自觉者的果报更为超胜;供养以佛陀为首的僧团的果报更为超胜;为四方僧团建造精舍的果报更为超胜;再进一步,皈依三宝的果报则更为超胜。为显明此理,故引《毗罗摩经》。经中确有此言:‘居士,毗罗摩婆罗门虽做了那样的广大布施,但若有人供养一位具见者一餐之食,后者的果报更为超胜。’云云。显示巴利原文
Dasahi ṭhānehīti dasahi kāraṇehi. Adhigaṇhantīti abhibhavanti. Velāmasuttādivasenāpīti ettha karīsassa catutthabhāgappamāṇānaṃ caturāsītisahassasaṅkhyānaṃ suvaṇṇapātirūpiyapātikaṃsapātīnaṃ yathākkamaṃ rūpiyasuvaṇṇahiraññapūrānaṃ, sabbālaṅkārapaṭimaṇḍitānaṃ caturāsītiyā hatthisahassānaṃ, caturāsītiyā assasahassānaṃ, caturāsītiyā rathasahassānaṃ, caturāsītiyā dhenusahassānaṃ, caturāsītiyā kaññāsahassānaṃ, caturāsītiyā pallaṅkasahassānaṃ, caturāsītiyā vatthakoṭisahassānaṃ, aparimāṇassa ca khajjabhojjādibhedassa āhārassa pariccajanavasena sattamāsādhikāni sattasaṃvaccharāni nirantaraṃ pavattavelāmamahādānato ekassa sotāpannassa dinnadānaṃ mahapphalataraṃ, tato sataṃ sotāpannānaṃ dinnadānato ekassa sakadāgāmino, tato ekassa anāgāmino, tato ekassa arahato, tato ekassa paccekabuddhassa, tato sammāsambuddhassa, tato buddhappamukhassa saṅghassa dinnadānaṃ mahapphalataraṃ, tato cātuddisasaṅghaṃ uddissa vihārakaraṇaṃ, tato saraṇagamanaṃ mahapphalataranti imamatthaṃ pakāsentassa velāmasuttassa (a. ni. 9.20) vasena. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘yaṃ gahapati velāmo brāhmaṇo dānaṃ adāsi mahādānaṃ, yo cekaṃ diṭṭhisampannaṃ bhojeyya, idaṃ tato mahapphalatara’’ntiādi (a. ni. 9.20). Velāmasuttādīti ādisaddena aggappasādasuttādīnaṃ (a. ni. 4.34; itivu. 90) saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo.
“无明”,即对于三宝的功德全然无知,由此而产生的迷惘。“疑”,即心中推度“这真的是佛陀吗?还是并非如此?”等诸如此类的疑惑、犹豫。“邪智”,是将三宝的功德虚妄计度为无功德,而生起的颠倒执取。此处“等”字,更含摄了不恭敬、不尊重等行为。“非大光明”,即不光辉,意为不清净、不清白。“非广大”,即不博大。“有过失”,指由于渴爱、邪见等而具有种种瑕疵。世间的皈依或受戒,犹如在领受时便已界定了期限,其效用仅持续至寿命终了为止,因此才说“它的坏灭在寿尽时,此种坏灭非过失”。所以,皈依的坏灭本身虽非过失,但即便没有过失,它亦不产生可爱的果报,因而说“无果”。何以故?因为它并不产生异熟。毕竟,世间的皈依并非不善法。显示巴利原文
Aññāṇaṃ vatthuttayassa guṇānaṃ ajānanaṃ, tattha sammoho. ‘‘Buddho nu kho, na nu kho’’tiādinā vicikicchā saṃsayo. Micchāñāṇaṃ tassa guṇānaṃ aguṇabhāvaparikappanena viparītaggāho. Ādi-saddena anādarāgāravādīnaṃ saṅgaho. Na mahājutikanti na ujjalaṃ, aparisuddhaṃ apariyodātanti attho. Na mahāvipphāranti anuḷāraṃ. Sāvajjoti taṇhādiṭṭhādivasena sadoso, lokiyasaraṇagamanaṃ sikkhāsamādānaṃ viya aggahitakālaparicchedaṃ jīvitapariyantameva hoti, tasmā tassa khandhabhedena bhedoti āha ‘‘anavajjo kālakiriyāyā’’ti. Soti anavajjo saraṇagamanabhedo. Satipi anavajjatte iṭṭhaphalopi na hotīti āha ‘‘aphalo’’ti. Kasmā? Avipākattā. Na hi taṃ akusalanti.
“何谓优婆塞?”是问其体性,即问具备何等相状才称为优婆塞。“何以故?”则是问其因由,意在表明由何种现起之相,令“优婆塞”之名得以安立于此人,由此而问:“何以称其为优婆塞?”所谓名称在所诠对象上的现起之相,即是此词义得以成立的原因。“其戒如何?”是问此优婆塞的戒行是何等,须具足多少戒,方可称为“戒具足”者,此即其义。“其命如何?”是问其正命为何;正命因远离邪命而成就,故亦须分别解说。“何为失坏?”是问其戒或命的退失为何;因为接下来会涉及开许或遮止。至于“具足”一词,也当依同理而解。显示巴利原文
Ko upāsakoti sarūpapucchā, kiṃlakkhaṇo upāsakoti vuttaṃ hoti. Kasmāti hetupucchā, tena kena pavattinimittena upāsaka-saddo tasmiṃ puggale nirūḷhoti dasseti, tenāha ‘‘kasmā upāsakoti vuccatī’’ti. Saddassa abhidheyye pavattinimittaṃ tadatthassa tabbhāvakāraṇaṃ. Kimassa sīlanti kīdisaṃ assa upāsakassa sīlaṃ, kittakena sīlenāyaṃ sīlasampanno nāma hotīti attho. Ko ājīvoti ko assa sammāājīvo, so pana micchājīvassa parivajjanena hotīti sopi vibhajīyati. Kā vipattīti kā assa sīlassa, ājīvassa vā vipatti. Anantarassa hi vidhi vā paṭisedho vā. Sampattīti etthāpi eseva nayo.
“无论谁”,指不论刹帝利等何种出身的人,此处意在表明:成为优婆塞的依据在于皈依这一事实,而非由出身等差别所决定。显示巴利原文
Yo kocīti khattiyādīsu yo koci, tena saraṇagamanaṃ evaṃ kāraṇaṃ, na jāti ādivisesoti dasseti.
“亲近承事”:正是通过那样的皈依,并对三宝心怀恭敬、尊重、敬仰等而行修习,因此称为亲近承事。显示巴利原文
Upāsanatoti teneva saraṇagamanena, tattha ca sakkaccakiriyāya ādara gāravabahumānādiyogena payirupāsanato.
“离”:杀生等恶戒称为“怨敌”,因远离、断除、灭尽这些怨敌,故名“离”。此指五种远离。由于远离是此戒的关要,故而说“他成为远离者”。显示巴利原文
Veramaṇiyoti veraṃ vuccati pāṇātipātādidussīlyaṃ, tassa maṇanato hananato vināsanato veramaṇiyo, pañca viratiyo viratipadhānattā tassa sīlassa, tenevāha ‘‘paṭivirato hotī’’ti.
「邪买卖」:即不正当的交易、不合适的交易。「舍弃」:指彻底不作而断除。「依法」:依于法、不违越法;由此也否定了其他不如法的活命方式。「平等」:即正直无偏,以此显示避免身体歪曲等恶行,以身体端正的善行而活命。武器买卖:制造或令人制造武器,或取得现成武器后出售。人口买卖:贩卖人口。肉买卖:如同屠狗者那样,饲养鹿、猪等,生产肉品后出售。酒买卖:调制任何酒类后出售。毒买卖:调制或取得毒药后出售。其中,武器买卖因为会伤害他人的缘故,说为不应作;人口买卖因为令人丧失自主;肉买卖因为是杀害的因缘;酒买卖因为是放逸的依处。显示巴利原文
Micchāvaṇijjāti na sammāvaṇijjā ayuttavaṇijjā asāruppavaṇijjā. Pahāyāti akaraṇeneva pajahitvā. Dhammenāti dhammato anapetena, tena aññampi adhammikaṃ jīvikaṃ paṭikkhipati. Samenāti avisamena, tena kāyavisaṃ ādiduccaritaṃ vajjetvā kāyasamādinā sucaritena jīvikaṃ dasseti. Satthavaṇijjāti āvudhabhaṇḍaṃ katvā vā kāretvā vā yathākataṃ vā paṭilabhitvā tassa vikkayo. Sattavaṇijjāti manussavikkayo. Maṃsavaṇijjāti sūnakārādayo viya migasūkarādike posetvā maṃsaṃ sampādetvā vikkayo. Majjavaṇijjāti yaṃ kiñci majjaṃ yojetvā tassa vikkayo. Visavaṇijjāti visaṃ yojetvā vā visaṃ gahetvā vā tassa vikkayo. Tattha satthavaṇijjā paroparodhanimittatāya akaraṇīyā vuttā sattavaṇijjā abhujissabhāvakaraṇato, maṃsavaṇijjā vadhahetuto, majjavaṇijjā pamādaṭṭhānato.
「同此」:指具有五远离相特征的戒,以及具有远离五种邪命买卖特征的正命。「失坏」:即破坏、违犯。「以何」:指以哪种行道方式。「贱民」:是近事男中的贱民。「垢秽」:是近事男的垢秽。「最劣者」:是近事男中最下劣者。对佛陀等以及业与业果的信之颠倒,即是无信、错误胜解;具足如前所说的无信者,称为无信者。由前述的戒失坏和正命失坏,成为破戒者。具足由愚人所计度的所谓‘以此所见等,这就是吉祥’这种由见、闻、觉知构成的迷信者,是迷信吉祥者。「信受吉祥」:相信见吉祥之类的吉祥本身。「不信业」:不信业是自作自受。「从此之外」:从此遍知一切的佛陀教法之外,在外道学说中。「寻找应供者」:寻找那些行为不正却自以为堪受供养的人。「先行善行」:先做布施、礼敬等善行。在此,将寻找应供者和先行善行合在一起,应知有此五种法。显示巴利原文
Tassevāti pañcaveramaṇilakkhaṇassa sīlassa ceva pañcamicchāvaṇijjālakkhaṇassa ājīvassa ca. Vipattīti bhedo, pakopo ca. Yāyāti yāya paṭipattiyā. Caṇḍāloti upāsakacaṇḍālo. Malanti upāsakamalaṃ. Paṭikiṭṭhoti upāsakanihīno. Buddhādīsu kammakammaphalesu ca saddhāvipariyāyo assaddhiyaṃ micchādhimokkho, yathāvuttena assaddhiyena samannāgato assaddho. Yathāvuttasīlavipattiājīvavipattivasena dussīlo. ‘‘Iminā diṭṭhādinā idaṃ nāma maṅgalaṃ hotī’’ti evaṃ bālajanaparikappitakotūhalasaṅkhātena diṭṭhasutamutamaṅgalena samannāgato kotūhalamaṅgaliko. Maṅgalaṃ paccetīti diṭṭhamaṅgalādibhedaṃ maṅgalameva pattiyāyati. No kammanti kammassakataṃ no pattiyāyati. Ito ca bahiddhāti ito sabbaññubuddhasāsanato bahiddhā bāhirakasamaye. Dakkhiṇeyyaṃ pariyesatīti duppaṭipannaṃ dakkhiṇārahasaññī gavesati. Pubbakāraṃ karotīti dānamānaṃ ādikaṃ kusalakiriyaṃ paṭhamataraṃ karoti. Ettha ca dakkhiṇeyyapariyesanapubbakāre ekaṃ katvā pañca dhammā veditabbā.
应以失坏中所说的相反方式,了知成就。但此处有差别:由于能令四众生起欢喜,近事男即是宝,故称「近事男宝」;由于功德光辉、美誉远播、言语芬芳,近事男即是莲花,故称「近事男莲花」;同样,近事男即是白莲,故称「近事男白莲」。显示巴利原文
Vipattiyaṃ vuttavipariyāyena sampatti veditabbā. Ayaṃ pana viseso – catunnampi parisānaṃ ratijananaṭṭhena upāsakova ratanaṃ upāsakaratanaṃ. Guṇasobhākittisaddasugandhatāya upāsakova padumaṃ upāsakapadumaṃ. Tathā upāsakapuṇḍarīkaṃ.
「在开始处」:即‘在最初’的意思。「以末端」:指边际、尽头。「以精舍的部分」:指按各个房间来划分,意思是‘按各个居住处所来区分,例如:住在此房的人获得如此这般的果报等等’。「从今以后」或「从今日起」:意思就是‘今天’。显示巴利原文
Ādimhītiādiatthe. Koṭiyanti pariyantakoṭiyaṃ. Vihāraggenāti ovarakakoṭṭhāsena, ‘‘imasmiṃ gabbhe vasantānamidaṃ nāma panasaphalaṃ pāpuṇātī’’tiādinā taṃ taṃvasanaṭṭhānakoṭṭhāsenāti attho. Ajjatagganti vā ajjadagganti vā ajja icceva attho.
「有命而依止」一句,是表明他的皈依乃尽形寿。在宣说‘只要我的生命尚在延续’等语之后,又以生命礼拜三宝,为了阐明国王心中生起‘我守护皈依’的意向,而宣说‘我……’等句。「有命而依止」者,就是说:只要我的生命尚存,我便皈依;而且,这并非仅仅是口头宣说,也并非仅仅发心一次,而是以身命相许,尽形寿皆在皈依。这便是此处所说之义。显示巴利原文
‘‘Pāṇehi upeta’’nti iminā tassa saraṇagamanassa āpāṇakoṭikataṃ dassento ‘‘yāva me jīvitaṃ pavattatī’’tiādīni vatvā puna jīvitenāpi taṃ vatthuttayaṃ paṭipūjento ‘‘saraṇagamanaṃ rakkhāmī’’ti uppannaṃ tassa rañño adhippāyaṃ vibhāvento ‘‘ahañhī’’tiādimāha. Pāṇehi upetanti hi yāva me pāṇā dharanti, tāva saraṇaṃ upetaṃ, upento ca na vācāmattena, na ekavāraṃ cittuppādamattena, atha kho pāṇānaṃ pariccajanavasena yāvajīvaṃ upetanti evamettha attho veditabbo.
「过犯」:践踏了善的界限、逾越而行,称为‘过犯’,故说‘罪过’。或者,因为通过它而超越,称为‘过犯’,即导致违犯的不善法。这过失本身令人犯错,故称‘罪过’。因为这种罪过是在压制犯错之人后而生起的,所以说是‘超越、压制后生起的’。「运作」:即行、做。「依法」:以不偏离法的方式。「请接受」:指通过认可而接受,故说‘请原谅’。显示巴利原文
Accayanaṃ sādhumariyādaṃ madditvā vītikkamanaṃ accayoti āha ‘‘aparādho’’ti. Acceti atikkamati etenāti vā accayo, vītikkamassa pavattanako akusaladhammo. So eva aparajjhati etenāti aparādho. So hi aparajjhantaṃ purisaṃ abhibhavitvā pavattati, tenāha ‘‘atikkamma abhibhavitvā pavatto’’ti. Caratīti ācarati karoti. Dhammenevāti dhammato anapetena payogena. Paṭiggaṇhātūti adhivāsanavasena sampaṭicchatūti atthoti āha ‘‘khamatū’’ti.
251 「皈依」:由于应被包括天界在内的世间所皈依,故称圣者、如来。因此说「在圣者的律、佛陀世尊的教法中」。虽然教导本可以依法为所依而展开——比如「这确实是增长」等,但在此为了将说法立足于个人,他进入了防护,所以才这样说。应当如此联系理解。显示巴利原文
251. Sadevakena lokena ‘‘saraṇa’’nti araṇīyato ariyo, tathāgatoti āha ‘‘ariyassa vinaye buddhassa bhagavato sāsane’’ti. Puggalādhiṭṭhānaṃ karontoti kāmaṃ ‘‘vuddhi hesā’’ti dhammādhiṭṭhānavasena vākyaṃ āraddhaṃ, tathāpi desanaṃ pana puggalādhiṭṭhānaṃ karonto saṃvaraṃ āpajjatīti āhāti yojanā.
253 「被挖掘」:指挖断了自己在今生本可产生的善根。「被毁坏」:指毁坏了那些善根。两者都是说他的业行过失。「依处」:即赖以进入正性决定的支撑,也就是他的亲依止成就。由于行为上的过失,那个依处遭到破坏、毁灭,所以称为「依处已坏」,因此说「像这样……」。「法眼」:在四圣谛法中,因能照见这些法,故称为眼。「在其他处」:指在其他经典中。「将解脱」:在受煎熬六万年之后,将从铜釜地狱中解脱出来。显示巴利原文
253. Imasmiṃyeva attabhāve nippajjanakānaṃ attano kusalamūlānaṃ khaṇanena khato, tesaṃyeva upahananena upahato. Ubhayenāpi tassa kammāparādhameva vadati. Patiṭṭhāti sammattaniyāmokkamanaṃ etāyāti patiṭṭhā, tassa upanissayasampadā. Sā kiriyāparādhena bhinnā vināsitā etenāti bhinnapatiṭṭho, tenāha ‘‘tathā’’tiādi. Dhammesu cakkhunti catusaccadhammesu tesaṃ dassanaṭṭhena cakkhu. Aññesu ṭhānesūti aññesu suttapadesu. Muccissatīti saṭṭhi vassasahassāni paccitvā lohakumbhī narakato muccissati.
如果他在紧接着的下一生便堕入地狱,那么国王听了这部经后,获得了什么利益呢?答言「有大利益」等。这利益是以获得安稳睡眠(安心)为开端而说的,也就是当时消除了身心的痛苦、对三宝作了大供养、获得了殊胜的凡夫信等,这一类属于现法利益;至于来世的利益,在未来的生生世世中,更是无量无边,应当如此理解。显示巴利原文
Yadi anantare attabhāve narake paccati, imaṃ pana suttaṃ sutvā rañño ko ānisaṃso laddhoti āha ‘‘mahānisaṃso’’tiādi. So pana ānisaṃso niddālābhasīsena vutto tadā kāyikacetasikadukkhāpagamo, tiṇṇaṃ ratanānaṃ mahāsakkārakiriyā, sātisayo pothujjanikasaddhāpaṭilābhoti evaṃpakāro diṭṭhadhammiko, samparāyiko pana aparāparesupi bhavesu aparimāṇo yevāti veditabbo.
这里有一个疑问:如果国王没有业障,就在那座位上会生起法眼,又怎么会在未来成为独觉佛后般涅槃呢?如果他将成为独觉佛后般涅槃,那时又怎么会在座上生起法眼呢?声闻菩提与辟支菩提的资粮难道不相违吗?这不矛盾,因为从今以后,他将开始累积辟支菩提的资粮。即使是志求声闻菩提的有情,如果欠缺声闻菩提的因缘和合,由于过去曾作过愿求,也可能在未来以辟支菩提觉悟。另一些论师则说:‘他本来就是为辟支菩提而发愿的。虽发过愿,但并未达到决定位,他的智慧尚未成熟,因此在遇到导师之后,证得了声闻菩提。所以世尊才说“诸比丘,若此国王……”等语。唯有大菩萨能从无间业中解脱,其他菩萨则不能。正如提婆达多,虽决定趣向辟支菩提,却因长久以来对世间怙主怀有嗔恨,造下了极其沉重的无间业。因此,由于业障的障碍,这位国王现在不具备见道的现观,未来将以辟支菩提的决定种性成为独觉佛后般涅槃。’应当这样理解。显示巴利原文
Etthāha – yadi rañño kammantarāyābhāve tasmiṃyeva āsane dhammacakkhu uppajjissati, kathaṃ anāgate paccekabuddho hutvā parinibbāyissati. Atha paccekabuddho hutvā parinibbāyissati, kathaṃ tadā dhammacakkhuṃ uppajjissati, nanu ime sāvakabodhipaccekabodhiupanissayā bhinnanissayāti? Nāyaṃ virodho ito parato evassa paccekabodhisambhārānaṃ sambharaṇīyato. Sāvakabodhiyā bujjhanakasattāpi hi asati tassā samavāye kālantare paccekabodhiyā bujjhissanti katābhinīhārasambhavato. Apare pana bhaṇanti ‘‘paccekabodhiyā yevāyaṃ katābhinīhāro. Katābhinīhārāpi hi tattha niyatiṃ appattā tassa ñāṇassa paripākaṃ anupagatattā satthu sammukhībhāve sāvakabodhiṃ pāpuṇissantīti bhagavā ‘sacāyaṃ bhikkhave rājā’tiādimāha. Mahābodhisattānameva ca ānantariyaparimutti, na itarabodhisattānaṃ. Tathā hi paccekabodhiyaṃ niyato samāno devadatto cirakālasambhūtena lokanāthe āghātena garutarāni ānantariyāni pasavi, tasmā kammantarāyenāyaṃ idāni asamavetadassanābhisamayo rājā paccekabodhiniyāmena anāgate paccekabuddho hutvā parinibbāyissatī’’ti daṭṭhabbaṃ.